Electronics and communications engineering Books
John Wiley & Sons Inc The Wireless Internet of Things
Book SynopsisProvides a detailed analysis of the standards and technologies enabling applications for the wireless Internet of Things The Wireless Internet of Things: A Guide to the Lower Layers presents a practitioner's perspective toward the Internet of Things (IoT) focusing on over-the-air interfaces used by applications such as home automation, sensor networks, smart grid, and healthcare. The authora noted expert in the fieldexamines IoT as a protocol-stack detailing the physical layer of the wireless links, as both a radio and a modem, and the media access control (MAC) that enables communication in congested bands. Focusing on low-power wireless personal area networks (WPANs) the text outlines the physical and MAC layer standards used by ZigBee, Bluetooth LE, Z-Wave, and Thread. The text deconstructs these standards and provides background including relevant communication theory, modulation schemes, and access methods. The author includes a discussion on Wi-Fi aTable of ContentsPreface vii Acknowledgments ix About the Author xi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 What is the Internet of Things? 1 1.2 What is the Wireless Internet of Things? 4 1.3 Wireless Networks 5 1.4 What is the Role of Wireless Standards in the Internet of Things? 10 1.5 Protocol Stacks 10 1.6 Introduction to the Protocols for the Wireless Internet of Things 16 1.7 The Approach of this Book 17 References 18 2 Protocols of the Wireless Internet of Things 21 2.1 Bluetooth 22 2.2 ITU G.9959 29 2.3 Z-Wave 32 2.4 IEEE 802.15.4 33 2.5 The ZigBee Specification 38 2.6 Thread 40 2.7 Wi-Fi 41 References 44 3 Radio Layer 47 3.1 The Wireless System 47 3.2 Basic Transceiver Model 48 3.3 The Basics of Channels 67 3.4 Bit and Symbol Error Rate 74 3.5 Complex Channels 76 References 81 4 Modem Layer 83 4.1 The Signal Model 84 4.2 Pulse Shaping 90 4.3 Modulation Techniques 95 4.4 Synchronization 120 4.5 Spread Spectrum 132 References 137 5 MAC Layer 139 5.1 Bands and Spectrum Planning 140 5.2 Spectrum Access for the Wireless IoT 144 5.3 Multiple Access Techniques 145 5.4 Spread Spectrum as Multiple Access 153 5.5 Error Detection and Correction 154 5.6 Energy Efficiency 167 References 170 6 Conclusion 173 6.1 Selecting the Right Standard 173 6.2 Higher Layer Standardization and the Future of IoT 175 Index 177
£80.06
John Wiley & Sons Inc Power Integrity for Electrical and Computer
Book SynopsisA professional guide to the fundamentals of power integrity analysis with an emphasis on silicon level power integrity Power Integrity for Electrical and Computer Engineers embraces the most recent changes in the field, offers a comprehensive introduction to the discipline of power integrity, and provides an overview of the fundamental principles. Written by noted experts on the topic, the book goes beyond most other resources to focus on the detailed aspects of silicon and optimization techniques in order to broaden the field of study. This important book offers coverage of a wide range of topics including signal analysis, EM concepts for PI, frequency domain analysis for PI, numerical methods (overview) for PI, and silicon device PI modeling.Power Integrity for Electrical and Computer Engineers examine platform technologies, system considerations,power conversion, system level modeling, and optimization methodologies. To reinforce the material presented, the authors include examplTable of ContentsPart I Power Integrity Fundamentals 1 1 Introduction 3 1.1 Introduction to Power Integrity for Computer Engineers 3 1.2 Some Advancements in Power Integrity 5 1.3 First Principles Analysis 10 1.4 Scope of Text 15 Bibliography 19 2 Power Conversion for Power Integrity 21 2.1 Power Distribution Systems 21 2.2 The Buck Converter 27 2.2.1 The LC Filter 30 2.2.2 Silicon Power Devices in a Buck Regulator 37 2.2.2.1 Power MOSFETs 37 2.3 Inductors 53 2.3.1 Losses in Power Inductors 60 2.4 Controllers 69 2.4.1 A Simple Feedback System 71 2.4.2 Generalized Controller Feedback Design Setup 74 2.4.3 Buck Regulator Design Example 76 2.5 Integration of Closed Loop Model into SPICE 82 2.6 Short Discussion on System Considerations for Power Conversion Integration 90 2.7 Advanced Topics in Power Conversion 91 2.8 Summary 97 Bibliography 102 3 Platform Technologies and System Considerations 105 3.1 Physical Elements 106 3.1.1 Capacitors for PDN Applications 121 3.2 Power Delivery System Interaction 130 3.2.1 Power Load Line Fundamentals 130 3.2.1.1 Tolerance Band 139 3.2.1.2 Voltage Guardband 143 3.3 System Noise Considerations in Power Integrity 150 3.4 EMI and Power Integrity 154 3.5 Brief Discussion on Noise Mitigation for Power Integrity 161 3.6 Summary 162 Bibliography 164 4 Electromagnetic Concepts for Power Integrity 167 4.1 Coordinate Systems 169 4.1.1 The Cylindrical Coordinate System 172 4.1.2 The Spherical Coordinate Systems 175 4.2 EM Concepts – Maxwell’s Equations 177 4.2.1 The Biot–Savart Law 182 4.2.2 The Magnetic Vector Potential 186 4.3 Some Useful Closed-Form Equations 188 4.3.1 Simple Plane-Pair Inductance 190 4.3.2 Inductance of Two Wires in Space 192 4.3.3 Resistance Between Two Vias in a Plane 193 4.3.4 Inductance of Small Wire or Trace Above Plane Using Image Theory 196 4.4 Examples of Using Equations 197 4.4.1 Power Trace Above a Plane Between Capacitors 197 4.4.2 Inductance of a Trace Over a Plane 199 4.5 Summary 201 Bibliography 203 Part II Tools for Power Integrity Analysis 205 5 Transmission Line Theory and Application 207 5.1 Telegrapher’s Equations 207 5.1.1 Damped Transmission Line Approximation 209 5.2 Frequency-Domain Analysis Fundamentals 211 5.3 Power Planes, Grids, and Transmission Lines 224 5.4 Summary 226 Bibliography 227 6 Signal Analysis Review 229 6.1 Linear, Time-Invariant Systems 229 6.2 The Dirac Delta Function 230 6.3 Convolution 231 6.4 Fourier Series 234 6.5 Fourier Transform 239 6.5.1 Convolution Theorem 240 6.5.2 Time-Shift Theorem 241 6.5.3 Superposition Theorem 241 6.5.4 Duality Theorem 242 6.5.5 Differentiation Theorem 242 6.5.6 Integration Theorem 242 6.5.7 Multiplication Theorem 245 6.5.8 Time-Scaling Theorem 245 6.5.9 Modulation or Frequency-Translation Theorem 246 6.6 Laplace Transform 250 6.6.1 Convolution Theorem 251 6.6.2 Time-Shift Theorem 251 6.6.3 Superposition Theorem 252 6.6.4 Differentiation Theorem 252 6.6.5 Integration Theorem 253 6.6.6 Multiplication Theorem 254 6.6.7 S-shift Theorem 254 6.7 Summary 261 Bibliography 262 7 Numerical Methods for Power Integrity 263 7.1 Introduction to Analytical Methods 266 7.1.1 Separation of Variables 267 7.1.2 Introduction to Variational Methods 278 7.1.2.1 The Galerkin Method 285 7.1.3 Conformal Mapping 288 7.2 Numerical Methods 292 7.2.1 The Finite Difference Method 292 7.2.2 The Finite Element Method 311 7.3 Error and Convergence 315 7.3.1 Errors in Numerical Analysis 316 7.3.2 Convergence and Accuracy 319 7.4 Summary 321 Bibliography 323 Part III Power Integrity Analytics 327 8 Frequency-Domain Analysis 329 8.1 Introduction to FDA 329 8.2 The PDN Structure, Physically and Electrically 331 8.2.1 The Damped Transmission Line Approximation 333 8.2.2 The Subcomponents of the PDN 343 8.3 Analytical Methods 350 8.4 Excitation in PDN Systems 364 8.5 PDN Optimization 376 8.5.1 Monte Carlo Analysis 383 8.6 Power Loss in PDN Systems 388 8.7 Summary 390 Bibliography 392 9 Time-Domain Analysis 395 9.1 Introduction to TDA 395 9.1.1 Data and Power Integrity 396 9.2 Voltage Droop Definitions 398 9.3 Droop Behavior and Dynamic Loads 399 9.3.1 Step Response 403 9.3.2 High-Frequency Pulse Droop 408 9.3.3 Susceptible State Voltage Droop 421 9.4 Analytical Approach to Step Response 430 9.5 Boundary Budget System Discussion 436 9.6 Power Loss Due to the PDN 439 9.6.1 Dynamic Silicon Power and Leakage 440 9.6.2 DC Losses in the PDN 446 9.6.3 AC Power Loss in PDN 451 9.7 Summary 454 Bibliography 458 10 Silicon Power Integrity 461 10.1 Introduction 461 10.2 Device Construction and Architecture Considerations 463 10.3 On-die Decoupling 476 10.4 Device Metal Routing Revisited 483 10.5 The Localized Impedance Network 490 10.6 Multi-rail vs. Single Rail Power Discussion 494 10.7 On-die Gating 499 10.8 Discussion of System-Level Issues with Charge and Current Density 502 10.9 Noise 507 10.10 Summary 516 Bibliography 520 Appendices 523 A.1 Introduction to SPICE 523 A.1.1 The SPICE Deck 524 A.1.2 Sources and Loads 526 A.1.3 Passive Elements 529 A.1.4 Transistor Formats 531 A.1.5 Analysis Calls, Frequency/Time Steps, and Initial Conditions 532 A.1.6 Some SPICE Examples 533 B.1 Quasi-Static Fields 537 C.1 Spherical Coordinate System 540 D.1 Vector Identities and Formula 541 E.1 Summary of Common Relationships Among Coordinate Systems 542 E.1.1 Variable Translations 542 E.1.2 Coordinate Translations 543 E.1.3 Curl Equation Expansions 544 E.1.4 Divergence Equation Expansions 544 E.1.5 Del-Operator Expansions 544 E.1.6 Laplacian Expansions 545 F.1 Some Notation Definitions 545 G.1 Common Theorems 546 Bibliography 546 Index 547
£100.76
John Wiley & Sons Inc Analysis and Design of Transimpedance Amplifiers
Book SynopsisAn up-to-date, comprehensive guide for advanced electrical engineering studentsand electrical engineers working in the IC and optical industries This book covers the major transimpedance amplifier (TIA) topologies and their circuit implementations for optical receivers.Table of ContentsPreface vii References xi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Optical Transceivers 1 1.2 Modulation Formats 5 1.3 Transmission Modes 12 References 20 2 Optical Fibers 25 2.1 Loss and Bandwidth 25 2.2 Dispersion 29 2.3 Nonlinearities 34 2.4 Pulse Spreading due to Chromatic Dispersion 37 2.5 Summary 40 Problems 41 References 42 3 Photodetectors 45 3.1 pin Photodetector 46 3.2 Avalanche Photodetector 60 3.3 pin Detector with Optical Preamplifier 67 3.4 Integrated Photodetectors 78 3.5 Detectors for Phase-Modulated Optical Signals 86 3.6 Summary 94 Problems 96 References 97 4 Receiver Fundamentals 107 4.1 Receiver Model 108 4.2 Noise and Bit-Error Rate 110 4.3 Signal-to-Noise Ratio 116 4.4 Sensitivity 120 4.5 Noise Bandwidths and Personick Integrals 134 4.6 Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio 138 4.7 Power Penalty 146 4.8 Inter-symbol Interference and Bandwidth 151 4.9 Frequency Response 162 4.10 Summary 167 Problems 168 References 171 5 Transimpedance Amplifier Specifications 177 5.1 Transimpedance 177 5.2 Input Overload Current 182 5.3 Maximum Input Current for Linear Operation 183 5.4 Bandwidth 184 5.5 Phase Linearity and Group Delay Variation 186 5.6 Timing Jitter 187 5.7 Input Referred Noise Current 187 5.8 Crosstalk 193 5.9 Product Examples 195 5.10 Summary 195 Problems 197 References 198 6 Basic Transimpedance Amplifier Design 201 6.1 Low and High Impedance Front Ends 202 6.2 Shunt Feedback TIA 205 6.3 Noise Analysis 224 6.4 Noise Optimization 236 6.5 Noise Matching 248 6.6 Summary 260 Problems 262 References 265 7 Advanced Transimpedance Amplifier Design I 271 7.1 TIA with Post Amplifier 271 7.2 TIA with Differential Inputs and Outputs 276 7.3 TIA with DC Input Current Control 281 7.4 TIA with Adaptive Transimpedance 284 7.5 Common Base and Common Gate TIAs 292 7.6 Regulated Cascode TIA 303 7.7 TIA with Inductive Broadbanding 311 7.8 Distributed Amplifier TIA 315 7.9 Summary 321 Problems 323 References 324 8 Advanced Transimpedance Amplifier Design II 331 8.1 TIA with Nonresistive Feedback 331 8.2 Current Mode TIA 337 8.3 TIA with Bootstrapped Photodetector 339 8.4 Burst Mode TIA 340 8.5 Analog Receiver TIA 347 8.6 Summary 351 Problems 352 References 352 9 Transimpedance Amplifier Circuit Examples 359 9.1 BJT, HBT, and BiCMOS Circuits 359 9.2 CMOS Circuits 366 9.3 MESFET and HFET Circuits 373 9.4 Summary 375 References 378 A Communication Signals 383 A.1 NonReturn-to-Zero Signal 384 A.2 Return-to-Zero Signal 387 A.3 Pulse Amplitude Modulated Signal 389 A.4 Analog Television Signal 391 A.5 Digital Television Signal 394 References 396 B Eye Diagrams 397 References 404 C Timing Jitter 405 C.1 Data Jitter 405 C.2 Clock Jitter 415 C.3 Jitter, Phase Noise, and BitError Rate 419 Problems 422 References 422 D Nonlinearity 425 D.1 Gain Compression 426 D.2 Harmonic Distortions 427 D.3 Intermodulation Distortions 429 D.4 Composite Distortions 430 Problems 433 References 433 E Adaptive Equalizers 435 E.1 Feedforward and Decision Feedback Equalizers 436 E.2 Adaptation Algorithms 440 E.3 Hardware Implementations 444 Problems 447 References 447 F Decision Point Control 453 Problems 457 References 457 G Forward Error Correction 459 Problems 464 References 465 H Second Order Low Pass Transfer Functions 467 References 479 I Answers to the Problems 481 References 514 J Notation 517 K Symbols 519 L Acronyms 529 Index 537
£107.06
John Wiley & Sons Inc RFMicrowave Engineering and Applications in
Book SynopsisRF/MICROWAVE ENGINEERING AND APPLICATIONS IN ENERGY SYSTEMS An essential text with a unique focus on RF and microwave engineering theory and its applications In RF/Microwave Engineering and Applications in Energy Systems, accomplished researcher Abdullah Eroglu delivers a detailed treatment of key theoretical aspects of radio-frequency and microwave engineering concepts along with parallel presentations of their practical applications. The text includes coverage of recent advances in the subject, including energy harvesting methods, RFID antenna designs, HVAC system controls, and smart grids. The distinguished author provides step-by-step solutions to common engineering problems by way of numerous examples and offers end-of-chapter problems and solutions on each topic. These practical applications of theoretical subjects aid the reader with retention and recall and demonstrate a solid connection between theory and practice. The author also applies common simulation tools in several cTable of ContentsPreface xiii Biography xv Acknowledgments xvii About the Companion Website xix 1 Fundamentals of Electromagnetics 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Line, Surface, and Volume Integrals 1 1.2.1 Vector Analysis 1 1.2.1.1 Unit Vector Relationship 1 1.2.1.2 Vector Operations and Properties 2 1.2.2 Coordinate Systems 4 1.2.2.1 Cartesian Coordinate System 4 1.2.2.2 Cylindrical Coordinate System 5 1.2.2.3 Spherical Coordinate System 6 1.2.3 Differential Length (dl), Differential Area (ds), and Differential Volume (dv) 8 1.2.3.1 dl, ds, and dv in a Cartesian Coordinate System 8 1.2.3.2 dl, ds, and dv in a Cylindrical Coordinate System 8 1.2.3.3 dl, ds, and dv in a Spherical Coordinate System 9 1.2.4 Line Integral 10 1.2.5 Surface Integral 12 1.2.6 Volume Integral 12 1.3 Vector Operators and Theorems 13 1.3.1 Del Operator 13 1.3.2 Gradient 13 1.3.3 Divergence 15 1.3.4 Curl 16 1.3.5 Divergence Theorem 16 1.3.6 Stokes’ Theorem 19 1.4 Maxwell’s Equations 21 1.4.1 Differential Forms of Maxwell’s Equations 21 1.4.2 Integral Forms of Maxwell’s Equations 22 1.5 Time Harmonic Fields 23 References 25 Problems 25 2 Passive and Active Components 27 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 Resistors 27 2.3 Capacitors 29 2.4 Inductors 32 2.4.1 Air Core Inductor Design 34 2.4.2 Magnetic Core Inductor Design 36 2.4.3 Planar Inductor Design 37 2.4.4 Transformers 38 2.5 Semiconductor Materials and Active Devices 39 2.5.1 Si 40 2.5.2 Wide-Bandgap Devices 40 2.5.2.1 GaAs 41 2.5.2.2 GaN 41 2.5.3 Active Devices 41 2.5.3.1 BJT and HBTs 41 2.5.3.2 FETs 43 2.5.3.3 MOSFETs 44 2.5.3.4 LDMOS 53 2.5.3.5 High Electron Mobility Transistor (HEMT) 54 2.6 Engineering Application Examples 55 References 62 Problems 63 3 Transmission Lines 71 3.1 Introduction 71 3.2 Transmission Line Analysis 71 3.2.1 Limiting Cases for Transmission Lines 75 3.2.2 Transmission Line Parameters 76 3.2.2.1 Coaxial Line 76 3.2.2.2 Two-wire Transmission Line 80 3.2.2.3 Parallel Plate Transmission Line 80 3.2.3 Terminated Lossless Transmission Lines 81 3.2.4 Special Cases of Terminated Transmission Lines 85 3.2.4.1 Short-circuited Line 85 3.2.4.2 Open-circuited Line 85 3.3 Smith Chart 86 3.3.1 Input Impedance Determination with a Smith Chart 91 3.3.2 Smith Chart as an Admittance Chart 95 3.3.3 ZY Smith Chart and Its Applications 95 3.4 Microstrip Lines 97 3.5 Striplines 104 3.6 Engineering Application Examples 107 References 109 Problems 109 4 Network Parameters 113 4.1 Introduction 113 4.2 Impedance Parameters – Z Parameters 113 4.3 Y Admittance Parameters 116 4.4 ABCD Parameters 117 4.5 h Hybrid Parameters 117 4.6 Network Connections 123 4.7 MATLAB Implementation of Network Parameters 129 4.8 S-Scattering Parameters 141 4.8.1 One-port Network 141 4.8.2 N-port Network 143 4.8.3 Normalized Scattering Parameters 146 4.9 Measurement of S Parameters 154 4.9.1 Measurement of S Parameters for Two-port Network 154 4.9.2 Measurement of S Parameters for a Three-port Network 156 4.10 Chain Scattering Parameters 158 4.11 Engineering Application Examples 160 References 176 Problems 176 5 Impedance Matching 181 5.1 Introduction 181 5.2 Impedance Matching Network with Lumped Elements 181 5.3 Impedance Matching with a Smith Chart – Graphical Method 184 5.4 Impedance Matching Network with Transmission Lines 187 5.4.1 Quarter-wave Transformers 187 5.4.2 Single Stub Tuning 188 5.4.2.1 Shunt Single Stub Tuning 188 5.4.2.2 Series Single Stub Tuning 189 5.4.3 Double Stub Tuning 190 5.5 Impedance Transformation and Matching between Source and Load Impedances 193 5.6 Bandwidth of Matching Networks 195 5.7 Engineering Application Examples 197 References 219 Problems 220 6 Resonator Circuits 223 6.1 Introduction 223 6.2 Parallel and Series Resonant Networks 223 6.2.1 Parallel Resonance 223 6.2.2 Series Resonance 229 6.3 Practical Resonances with Loss, Loading, and Coupling Effects 232 6.3.1 Component Resonances 232 6.3.2 Parallel LC Networks 235 6.3.2.1 Parallel LC Networks with Ideal Components 235 6.3.2.2 Parallel LC Networks with Nonideal Components 236 6.3.2.3 Loading Effects on Parallel LC Networks 237 6.3.2.4 LC Network Transformations 240 6.3.2.5 LC Network with Series Loss 244 6.4 Coupling of Resonators 245 6.5 LC Resonators as Impedance Transformers 249 6.5.1 Inductive Load 249 6.5.2 Capacitive Load 250 6.6 Tapped Resonators as Impedance Transformers 252 6.6.1 Tapped-C Impedance Transformer 252 6.6.2 Tapped-L Impedance Transformer 256 6.7 Engineering Application Examples 256 References 265 Problems 265 7 Couplers, Combiners, and Dividers 271 7.1 Introduction 271 7.2 Directional Couplers 271 7.2.1 Microstrip Directional Couplers 272 7.2.1.1 Two-line Microstrip Directional Couplers 272 7.2.1.2 Three-line Microstrip Directional Couplers 276 7.2.2 Multilayer and Multiline Planar Directional Couplers 279 7.2.3 Transformer Coupled Directional Couplers 281 7.2.3.1 Four-port Directional Coupler Design and Implementation 282 7.2.3.2 Six-port Directional Coupler Design 284 7.3 Multistate Reflectometers 289 7.3.1 Multistate Reflectometer Based on Four-port Network and Variable Attenuator 289 7.4 Combiners and Dividers 292 7.4.1 Analysis of Combiners and Dividers 292 7.4.2 Analysis of Dividers with Different Source Impedance 300 7.4.3 Microstrip Implementation of Combiners/Dividers 313 7.5 Engineering Application Examples 318 References 347 Problems 348 8 Filters 351 8.1 Introduction 351 8.2 Filter Design Procedure 351 8.3 Filter Design by the Insertion Loss Method 360 8.3.1 Low Pass Filters 361 8.3.1.1 Binomial Filter Response 362 8.3.1.2 Chebyshev Filter Response 365 8.3.2 High Pass Filters 376 8.3.3 Bandpass Filters 378 8.3.4 Bandstop Filters 382 8.4 Stepped Impedance Low Pass Filters 383 8.5 Stepped Impedance Resonator Bandpass Filters 386 8.6 Edge/Parallel-coupled, Half-wavelength Resonator Bandpass Filters 388 8.7 End-Coupled, Capacitive Gap, Half-Wavelength Resonator Bandpass Filters 394 8.8 Tunable Tapped Combline Bandpass Filters 400 8.8.1 Network Parameter Representation of Tunable Tapped Filter 402 8.9 Dual Band Bandpass Filters using Composite Transmission Lines 405 8.10 Engineering Application Examples 406 References 422 Problems 422 9 Waveguides 425 9.1 Introduction 425 9.2 Rectangular Waveguides 425 9.2.1 Waveguide Design with Isotropic Media 426 9.2.1.1 TEmn Modes 427 9.2.2 Waveguide Design with Gyrotropic Media 429 9.2.2.1 TEm0 Modes 431 9.2.3 Waveguide Design with Anisotropic Media 432 9.3 Cylindrical Waveguides 442 9.3.1 TE Modes 442 9.3.2 TM Modes 444 9.4 Waveguide Phase Shifter Design 444 9.5 Engineering Application Examples 446 References 454 Problems 454 10 Power Amplifiers 457 10.1 Introduction 457 10.2 Amplifier Parameters 457 10.2.1 Gain 457 10.2.2 Efficiency 459 10.2.3 Power Output Capability 460 10.2.4 Linearity 460 10.2.5 1 dB Compression Point 461 10.2.6 Harmonic Distortion 462 10.2.7 Intermodulation 465 10.3 Small Signal Amplifier Design 470 10.3.1 DC Biasing Circuits 471 10.3.2 BJT Biasing Circuits 472 10.3.2.1 Fixed Bias 473 10.3.2.2 Stable Bias 474 10.3.2.3 Self-bias 475 10.3.2.4 Emitter Bias 476 10.3.2.5 Active Bias Circuit 477 10.3.2.6 Bias Circuit using Linear Regulator 477 10.3.3 FET Biasing Circuits 477 10.3.4 Small Signal Amplifier Design Method 478 10.3.4.1 Definitions Power Gains for Small Signal Amplifiers 478 10.3.4.2 Design Steps for Small Signal Amplifier 482 10.3.4.3 Small Signal Amplifier Stability 483 10.3.4.4 Constant Gain Circles 488 10.3.4.5 Unilateral Figure of Merit 493 10.4 Engineering Application Examples 494 References 508 Problems 509 11 Antennas 513 11.1 Introduction 513 11.2 Antenna Parameters 514 11.3 Wire Antennas 521 11.3.1 Infinitesimal (Hertzian) Dipole (l ≤ λ/50) 521 11.3.2 Short Dipole ( λ/50 ≤ l ≤ λ/10) 524 11.3.3 Half-wave Dipole (l = λ/2) 525 11.4 Microstrip Antennas 531 11.4.1 Type of Patch Antennas 533 11.4.2 Feeding Methods 533 11.4.2.1 Microstrip Line Feed 533 11.4.2.2 Proximity Coupling 536 11.4.3 Microstrip Antenna Analysis – Transmission Line Method 536 11.4.4 Impedance Matching 537 11.5 Engineering Application Examples 539 References 552 Problems 552 12 RF Wireless Communication Basics for Emerging Technologies 555 12.1 Introduction 555 12.2 Wireless Technology Basics 555 12.3 Standard Protocol vs Proprietary Protocol 556 12.3.1 Standard Protocols 556 12.3.2 Proprietary Protocols 556 12.3.2.1 Physical Layer Only Approach 557 12.4 Overview of Protocols 557 12.4.1 ZigBee 557 12.4.2 LowPAN 558 12.4.3 Wi-Fi 558 12.4.4 Bluetooth 560 12.5 RFIDs 560 12.5.1 Active RFID Tags 562 12.5.2 Passive RFID Tags 562 12.5.3 RFID Frequencies 562 12.5.3.1 Low Frequency ~124 kHz and High Frequency ~13.56 MHz 562 12.5.3.2 Ultrahigh Frequency (UHF) Tags ~423 MHz–2.45 GHz 563 12.6 RF Technology for Implantable Medical Devices 563 12.6.1 Challenges with IMDs 564 12.6.1.1 Biocompatibility 564 12.6.1.2 Frequency 564 12.6.1.3 Dimension Constraints 564 12.7 Engineering Application Examples 565 References 576 13 Energy Harvesting and HVAC Systems with RF Signals 577 13.1 Introduction 577 13.2 RF Energy Harvesting 577 13.3 RF Energy Harvesting System Design for Dual Band Operation 578 13.3.1 Matching Network for Energy Harvester 580 13.3.2 RF–DC Conversion for Energy Harvester 582 13.3.3 Clamper and Peak Detector Circuits 582 13.3.4 Cascaded Rectifier 584 13.3.5 Villard Voltage Multiplier 584 13.3.6 RF–DC Rectifier Stages 584 13.4 Diode Threshold Vth Cancellation 585 13.4.1 Internal Vth Cancellation 585 13.4.2 External Vth Cancellation 586 13.4.3 Self-Vth Cancellation 586 13.5 HVAC Systems 587 13.6 Engineering Application Examples 588 References 609 Index 611
£101.66
John Wiley & Sons Inc Fusion of Hard and Soft Control Strategies for
Book SynopsisAn in-depth review of hybrid control techniques for smart prosthetic hand technology by two of the world's pioneering experts in the field Long considered the stuff of science fiction, a prosthetic hand capable of fully replicating all of that appendage's various functions is closer to becoming reality than ever before. This book provides a comprehensive report on exciting recent developments in hybrid control techniquesone of the most crucial hurdles to be overcome in creating smart prosthetic hands. Coauthored by two of the world's foremost pioneering experts in the field, Fusion of Hard and Soft Control Strategies for Robotic Hand treats robotic hands for multiple applications. Itbegins withan overview of advances in main control techniques that have been made over the past decade before addressing the military context foraffordable robotic hand technology with tactile and/or proprioceptive feedbackfor hand amputees. Kinematics, homogeneous transformations, inverse and differentiTable of ContentsList of Figures xi List of Tables xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Relevance to Military 2 1.2 Control Strategies 3 1.2.1 Prosthetic/Robotic Hands 3 1.2.2 Chronological Overview 5 1.2.3 Overview of Main Control Techniques Since 2007 15 1.2.4 Revolutionary Prosthesis 18 1.3 Fusion of Intelligent Control Strategies 19 1.3.1 Fusion of Hard and Soft Computing/Control Strategies 19 1.4 Overview of Our Research 22 1.5 Developments in Neuroprosthetics 23 1.6 Chapter Summary 24 2 Kinematics and Trajectory Planning 47 2.1 Human Hand Anatomy 48 2.2 Forward Kinematics 49 2.2.1 Homogeneous Transformations 50 2.2.2 Serial -Link Revolute-Joint Planar Manipulator 54 2.2.3 Two-Link Thumb 58 2.2.4 Three-Link Index Finger 60 2.2.5 Three-Dimensional Five-Fingered Robotic Hand 62 2.3 Inverse Kinematics 66 2.3.1 Two-Link Thumb 66 2.3.2 Three-Link Fingers 67 2.3.3 Fingertip Workspace 68 2.3.3.1 Two-Link Thumb and Three-Link Index Finger 69 2.3.3.2 Five-Fingered Robotic Hand 70 2.4 Differential Kinematics 70 2.4.1 Serial -Link Revolute-Joint Planar Manipulator 71 2.4.1.1 Some Properties of RotationMatrices 72 2.4.1.2 Rigid Body Kinematics 74 2.4.2 Two-Link Thumb 78 2.4.3 Three-Link Index Finger 79 2.5 Trajectory Planning 80 2.5.1 Trajectory Planning Using Cubic Polynomial 81 2.5.2 Trajectory Planning Using Cubic Bezier Curve 82 2.5.3 Simulation Results of Trajectory Paths 84 3 Dynamic Models 93 3.1 Actuators 93 3.1.1 Electric DC Motor 93 3.1.2 Mechanical Gear Transmission 94 3.2 Dynamics 96 3.3 Two-Link Thumb 96 3.4 Three-Link Index Finger 99 4 Soft Computing/Control Strategies 105 4.1 Fuzzy Logic 105 4.2 Neural Network 108 4.3 Adaptive Neuro-Fuzzy Inference System 108 4.4 Tabu Search 113 4.4.1 Tabu Concepts 113 4.4.2 Enhanced Continuous Tabu Search 114 4.4.2.1 Initialization of Parameters 114 4.4.2.2 Diversification 114 4.4.2.3 Selecting the Most Promising Area 115 4.4.2.4 Intensi cation 116 4.5 Genetic Algorithm 118 4.5.1 Basic GA Procedures 118 4.6 Particle Swarm Optimization 121 4.6.1 Basic PSO Procedures and Formulations 121 4.6.2 Five Different PSO Techniques 125 4.6.3 Uniform Distribution and Normal Distribution 128 4.7 Adaptive Particle Swarm Optimization 130 4.7.1 APSO Procedures and Formulations 130 4.7.2 Changed/Unchanged Velocity Direction 134 4.8 Condensed Hybrid Optimization 136 4.9 Simulation Results and Discussion 137 4.9.1 PSO Dynamics Investigation 137 4.9.1.1 Benchmark Problems 137 4.9.1.2 Selection of Parameters 138 4.9.1.3 Simulations 139 4.9.2 APSO to Multiple Dimensional Problems 145 4.9.3 PSO in Other Biomedical Applications 149 4.9.3.1 Leukocyte Adhesion Molecules Modeling 149 4.9.4 CHO to Multiple Dimensional Problems 151 5 Fusion of Hard and Soft Control Strategies I 161 5.1 Feedback Linearization 161 5.1.1 State Variable Representation 162 5.2 PD/PI/PID Controllers 163 5.2.1 PD Controller 164 5.2.2 PI Controller 165 5.2.3 PID Controller 165 5.3 Optimal Controller 167 5.3.1 Optimal Regulation 167 5.3.2 Linear Quadratic Optimal Control with Tracking System 167 5.3.3 A Modified Optimal Control with Tracking System 168 5.4 Adaptive Controller 170 5.5 Simulation Results and Discussion 172 5.5.1 Two-Link Thumb 172 5.5.2 Three-Link Index Finger 175 5.5.3 Three-Dimensional Five-Fingered Robotic Hand 177 5.5.3.1 PID Control 177 5.5.3.2 Optimal Control 178 5.A Appendix: Regression Matrix 198 6 Fusion of Hard and Soft Control Strategies II 203 6.1 Fuzzy-Logic-Based PD Fusion Control Strategy 203 6.1.1 Simulation Results and Discussion 207 6.2 Genetic-Algorithm-Based PID Fusion Control Strategy 212 6.2.1 Simulation Results and Discussion 213 7 Conclusions and Future Work 223 7.1 Conclusions 223 7.2 Future Directions 225 Index 229 Epilogue 231
£106.16
John Wiley & Sons Inc 5G Backhaul and Fronthaul
Book Synopsis5G BACKHAUL AND FRONTHAUL In-depth coverage of all technologies required for deployment and further evolution of 5G mobile network backhaul and fronthaul In this book, a team of communications technology experts deliver an up-to-date and technical discussion of 5G backhaul and fronthaul, preparing readers for the deployment of 5G technologies, covering the technologies essentials, and offering views of further 5G backhaul and fronthaul evolution. 5G Backhaul and Fronthaul serves both advanced-level experts with senior roles in organizations who are already proficient in these technologies, and general interest readers seeking a primer on what these technologies can provide. Readers will also find: Thorough introductions to 5G backhaul and fronthaul, as well as selected industry forums and activities Analysis of high-level requirements for 5G backhaul and fronthaul and 5G network architecture In-depth explorations of wireless backhaul and fronthaul access technologies, including fiber Table of ContentsAcknowledgements xi About the Editors xiii List of Contributors xv 1 Introduction 1 Esa Metsälä and Juha Salmelin 1.1 Introducing 5G in Transport 1 1.2 Targets of the Book 3 1.3 Backhaul and Fronthaul Scope within the 5G System 3 1.4 Arranging Connectivity within the 5G System 4 1.5 Standardization Environment 5 1.5.1 3GPP and other organizations 5 References 8 2 5G System Design Targets and Main Technologies 11 Harri Holma and Antti Toskala 11 2.1 5G System Target 11 2.2 5G Technology Components 12 2.3 Network Architecture 14 2.4 Spectrum and Coverage 21 2.5 Beamforming 22 2.6 Capacity 24 2.6.1 Capacity per Cell 24 2.6.2 Capacity per Square Kilometre 24 2.7 Latency and Architecture 26 2.8 Protocol Optimization 28 2.8.1 Connectionless RRC 28 2.8.2 Contention-Based Access 28 2.8.3 Pipelining 29 2.9 Network Slicing and QoS 30 2.10 Integrated Access and Backhaul 32 2.11 Ultra Reliable and Low Latency 33 2.12 Open RAN 34 2.13 3GPP Evolution in Release 16/17 36 2.14 5G-Advanced 38 References 39 3 5G RAN Architecture and Connectivity – A Techno-economic Review 41 Andy Sutton 3.1 Introduction 41 3.2 Multi-RAT Backhaul 41 3.3 C-RAN and LTE Fronthaul 43 3.4 5G RAN Architecture 44 3.5 5G D-RAN Backhaul Architecture and Dimensioning 46 3.6 Integrating 5G within a Multi-RAT Backhaul Network 48 3.7 Use Case – BT/EE 5G Network in the UK 51 3.8 5G C-RAN – F1 Interface and Midhaul 55 3.9 5G C-RAN – CPRI, eCPRI and Fronthaul 56 3.10 Connectivity Solutions for Fronthaul 59 3.11 Small Cells in FR1 and FR 2 62 3.12 Summary 62 References 63 4 Key 5G Transport Requirements 65 Kenneth Y. Ho and Esa Metsälä 4.1 Transport Capacity 65 4.1.1 5G Radio Impacts to Transport 65 4.1.2 Backhaul and Midhaul Dimensioning Strategies 67 4.1.3 Protocol Overheads 68 4.1.4 Backhaul and Midhaul Capacity 69 4.1.5 Fronthaul Capacity 70 4.1.6 Ethernet Link Speeds 71 4.2 Transport Delay 73 4.2.1 Contributors to Delay in 5G System 73 4.2.2 Allowable Transport Delay 73 4.2.3 User Plane and Control Plane Latency for the Logical Interfaces 75 4.2.4 Fronthaul (Low-Layer Split Point) 76 4.2.5 Low-Latency Use Cases 77 4.3 Transport Bit Errors and Packet Loss 78 4.3.1 Radio-Layer Performance and Retransmissions 78 4.3.2 Transport Bit Errors and Packet Loss 79 4.4 Availability and Reliability 80 4.4.1 Definitions 80 4.4.2 Availability Targets 81 4.4.3 Availability in Backhaul Networks 82 4.4.4 Recovery Times in Backhaul and Fronthaul 84 4.4.5 Transport Reliability 84 4.4.6 Air Interface Retransmissions and Transport Reliability 87 4.4.7 Packet Duplication in 5G and Transport 88 4.4.8 Transport Analysis Summary for Availability and Reliability 90 4.5 Security 91 4.5.1 Summary of 5G Cryptographic Protection 91 4.5.2 Network Domain Protection 92 4.5.3 Security in Fronthaul 92 4.6 Analysis for 5G Synchronization Requirement 92 4.6.1 Frequency Error 93 4.6.2 Time Alignment Error (Due to TDD Timing) 93 4.6.3 Time Alignment Error (Due to MIMO) 100 4.6.4 Time Alignment Error (Due to Carrier Aggregation) 101 4.6.5 Time Alignment Accuracy (Due to Other Advanced Features) 102 References 102 5 Further 5G Network Topics 105 Esa Malkamäki, Mika Aalto, Juha Salmelin and Esa Metsälä 5.1 Transport Network Slicing 105 5.1.1 5G System-Level Operation 105 5.1.2 Transport Layers 105 5.2 Integrated Access and Backhaul 108 5.2.1 Introduction 108 5.2.2 IAB Architecture 109 5.2.3 Deployment Scenarios and Use Cases 110 5.2.4 IAB Protocol Stacks 111 5.2.5 IAB User Plane 113 5.2.6 IAB Signalling Procedures 114 5.2.7 Backhaul Adaptation Protocol 116 5.2.8 BH Link Failure Handling 117 5.2.9 IAB in 3GPP Release 17 and Beyond 118 5.3 Ntn 118 5.3.1 NTN in 3GPP 118 5.3.2 Different Access Types 119 5.3.3 Protocol Stacks 121 5.3.4 Transparent Architecture 123 5.3.5 Feeder Link Switchover 124 5.4 URLLC Services and Transport 125 5.4.1 Background 125 5.4.2 Reliability 127 5.4.3 Latency 128 5.5 Industry Solutions and Private 5G 129 5.5.1 Introduction to Private 5G Networking 129 5.5.2 3GPP Features Supporting Private 5G Use Cases 130 5.5.3 URLLC and TSC in Private 5G 133 5.6 Smart Cities 133 5.6.1 Needs of Cities 134 5.6.2 Possible Solutions 135 5.6.3 New Business Models 137 5.6.4 Implications for BH/FH 138 References 139 6 Fibre Backhaul and Fronthaul 141 Pascal Dom, Lieven Levrau, Derrick Remedios and Juha Salmelin 6.1 5G Backhaul/Fronthaul Transport Network Requirements 141 6.1.1 Capacity Challenge 141 6.1.2 Latency Challenge 143 6.1.3 Synchronization Challenge 144 6.1.4 Availability Challenge 144 6.1.5 Software-Controlled Networking for Slicing Challenge 145 6.1.6 Programmability and OAM Challenges 145 6.2 Transport Network Fibre Infrastructure 146 6.2.1 Availability of Fibre Connectivity 146 6.2.2 Dedicated vs Shared Fibre Infrastructure 147 6.2.3 Dedicated Infrastructure 149 6.2.4 Shared Infrastructure 149 6.3 New Builds vs Legacy Infrastructure 150 6.4 Optical Transport Characteristics 151 6.4.1 Optical Fibre Attenuation 151 6.4.2 Optical Fibre Dispersion 152 6.5 TSN Transport Network for the Low-Layer Fronthaul 153 6.6 TDM-PONs 154 6.6.1 TDM-PONs as Switched Transport Network for Backhaul and Midhaul 154 6.6.2 TDM-PONs as Switched Transport Network for Fronthaul 156 6.7 Wavelength Division Multiplexing Connectivity 156 6.7.1 Passive WDM Architecture 156 6.7.2 Active–Active WDM Architecture 158 6.7.3 Semi-Active WDM Architecture 160 6.8 Total Cost of Ownership for Fronthaul Transport Networking 161 References 163 7 Wireless Backhaul and Fronthaul 165 Paolo Di Prisco, Antti Pietiläinen and Juha Salmelin 7.1 Baseline 165 7.2 Outlook 166 7.3 Use Cases Densification and Network Upgrade 169 7.4 Architecture Evolution – Fronthaul/Midhaul/Backhaul 172 7.5 Market Trends and Drivers 172 7.5.1 Data Capacity Increase 173 7.5.2 Full Outdoor 174 7.5.3 New Services and Slicing 174 7.5.4 End-to-End Automation 175 7.6 Tools for Capacity Boost 176 7.6.1 mmW Technology (Below 100 GHz) 176 7.6.2 Carrier Aggregation 177 7.6.3 New Spectrum Above 100 GHz 181 7.7 Radio Links Conclusions 183 7.8 Free-Space Optics 183 7.8.1 Introduction 183 7.8.2 Power Budget Calculations 184 7.8.3 Geometric Loss 184 7.8.4 Atmospheric Attenuation 185 7.8.5 Estimating Practical Link Spans 186 7.8.6 Prospects of FSO 188 References 189 8 Networking Services and Technologies 191 Akash Dutta and Esa Metsälä 8.1 Cloud Technologies 191 8.1.1 Data Centre and Cloud Infrastructure 191 8.1.2 Data Centre Networking 194 8.1.3 Network Function Virtualization 196 8.1.4 Virtual Machines and Containers 198 8.1.5 Accelerators for RAN Functions 202 8.1.6 O-RAN View on Virtualization and Cloud Infrastructure 204 8.2 Arranging Connectivity 206 8.2.1 IP and MPLS for Connectivity Services 206 8.2.2 Traffic Engineering with MPLS-TE 208 8.2.3 E-vpn 208 8.2.4 Segment Routing 210 8.2.5 IP and Optical 211 8.2.6 IPv4 and IPv 6 212 8.2.7 Routing Protocols 212 8.2.8 Loop-Free Alternates 214 8.2.9 Carrier Ethernet Services 215 8.2.10 Ethernet Link Aggregation 216 8.3 Securing the Network 217 8.3.1 IPsec and IKEv 2 217 8.3.2 Link-Layer Security (MACSEC) 219 8.3.3 Dtls 220 8.4 Time-Sensitive Networking and Deterministic Networks 220 8.4.1 Motivation for TSN 220 8.4.2 IEEE 802.1CM – TSN for Fronthaul 221 8.4.3 Frame Pre-emption 223 8.4.4 Frame Replication and Elimination 223 8.4.5 Management 225 8.4.6 Deterministic Networks 226 8.5 Programmable Network and Operability 227 8.5.1 Software-Defined Networking Initially 227 8.5.2 Benefits with Central Controller 228 8.5.3 Netconf/YANG 229 References 230 9 Network Deployment 233 Mika Aalto, Akash Dutta, Kenneth Y. Ho, Raija Lilius and Esa Metsälä 9.1 NSA and SA Deployments 233 9.1.1 Shared Transport 233 9.1.2 NSA 3x Mode 235 9.1.3 SA Mode 237 9.2 Cloud RAN Deployments 237 9.2.1 Motivation for Cloud RAN 237 9.2.2 Pooling and Scalability in CU 240 9.2.3 High Availability in CU 242 9.2.4 Evolving to Real-Time Cloud – vDU 244 9.2.5 Enterprise/Private Wireless 250 9.3 Fronthaul Deployment 251 9.3.1 Site Solutions and Fronthaul 251 9.3.2 Carrying CPRI over Packet Fronthaul 252 9.3.3 Statistical Multiplexing Gain 253 9.3.4 Merged Backhaul and Fronthaul 255 9.4 Indoor Deployment 257 9.5 Deploying URLLC and Enterprise Networks 262 9.5.1 Private 5G Examples 262 9.5.2 Private 5G RAN Architecture Evolution 264 9.5.3 IP Backhaul and Midhaul Options for Private 5G 266 9.5.4 Fronthaul for Private 5G 266 9.5.5 Other Transport Aspects in Private 5G Networks 267 9.6 Delivering Synchronization 268 9.6.1 Network Timing Synchronization Using PTP and SyncE 269 9.6.2 SyncE 269 9.6.3 IEEE 1588 (aka PTP) 270 9.6.4 ITU-T Profiles for Telecom Industry Using SyncE and PTP 270 9.6.5 Example of Putting All Standards Together in Planning 271 9.6.6 Resilience Considerations in Network Timing Synchronization 275 9.6.7 QoS Considerations in Network Timing Synchronization 276 9.6.8 Special Considerations in Cloud RAN Deployment 276 9.6.9 Satellite-Based Synchronization 277 9.6.10 Conclusion for Synchronization 278 References 278 10 Conclusions and Path for the Future 279 Esa Metsälä and Juha Salmelin 10.1 5G Path for the Future 279 10.2 Summary of Content 280 10.3 Evolutionary Views for Backhaul and Fronthaul 280 Index 283
£64.76
John Wiley & Sons Inc 5G Explained
Book SynopsisPractical Guide Provides Students and Industry Professionals with Latest Information on 5G Mobile Networks Continuing the tradition established in his previous publications, Jyrki Penttinen offers 5G Explained as a thorough yet concise introduction to recent advancements and growing trends in mobile telecommunications. In this case, Penttinen focuses on the development and employment of 5G mobile networks and, more specifically, the challenges inherent in adjusting to new global standardization requirements and in maintaining a high level of security even as mobile technology expands to new horizons. The text discusses, for example, the Internet of Things (IoT) and how to keep networks reliable and secure when they are constantly accessed by many different devices with varying levels of user involvement and competence. 5G Explained is primarily designed for specialists who need rapid acclimation to the possibilities and concerns presented by 5G adoTable of ContentsAuthor Biography xv Preface xvii Acknowledgments xix Abbreviation List xxi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Overview 1 1.2 What Is 5G? 2 1.3 Background 3 1.4 Research 4 1.5 Challenges for Electronics 4 1.6 Expected 5G in Practice 5 1.7 5G and Security 7 1.8 Motivations 7 1.9 5G Standardization and Regulation 7 1.10 Global Standardization in 5G Era 11 1.11 Introduction to the Book 17 References 18 2 Requirements 21 2.1 Overview 21 2.2 Background 22 2.3 5G Requirements Based on ITU 23 2.4 The Technical Specifications of 3GPP 29 2.5 NGMN 38 2.6 Mobile Network Operators 43 2.7 Mobile Device Manufacturers 43 References 44 3 Positioning of 5G 47 3.1 Overview 47 3.2 Mobile Generations 47 3.3 The Role of 3GPP in LPWA and IoT 56 3.4 The Role of 5G in Automotive (V2X) 63 3.5 The Role of 5G in the Cyber-World 63 References 69 4 Architecture 71 4.1 Overview 71 4.2 Architecture 72 4.3 Renewed Functionality of the 5G System 92 4.4 Supporting Solutions for 5G 97 4.5 Control and User Plane Separation of EPC Nodes (CUPS) 100 References 102 5 Radio Network 105 5.1 Overview 105 5.2 5G Performance 106 5.3 5G Spectrum 107 5.4 5G Radio Access Technologies 112 5.5 Uplink OFDM of 5G: CP-OFDM and DFT-s-OFDM 124 5.6 Downlink 124 5.7 New Radio (NR) Interface of 3GPP 126 5.8 User Devices 133 5.9 Other Aspects 134 5.10 CBRS 134 References 137 6 Core Network 139 6.1 Overview 139 6.2 Preparing the Core for 5G 141 6.3 5G Core Network Elements 154 6.4 5G Functionalities Implemented in 5G Core 165 6.5 Transport Network 170 6.6 Protocols and Interfaces 173 References 185 7 Services and Applications 187 7.1 Overview 187 7.2 5G Services 188 7.3 Network Function-Related Cases 195 7.4 Vehicle Communications 197 7.5 Machine Learning and Artificial Intelligence 202 References 202 8 Security 205 8.1 Overview 205 8.2 5G Security Threats and Challenges 208 8.3 Development 213 8.4 Security Implications in 5G Environments and Use Cases 214 8.5 5G Security Layers 219 8.6 Device Security 220 8.7 Security between Network Entities 226 8.8 Security Opportunities for Stakeholders 227 8.9 5G Security Architecture for 3GPP Networks 229 8.10 UICC Evolution 239 8.11 5G Security Development 243 8.12 UICC Variants 243 References 252 9 5G Network Planning and Optimization 255 9.1 Overview 255 9.2 5G Core and Transmission Network Dimensioning 255 9.3 5G Radio Network Planning 259 References 268 10 Deployment 271 10.1 Overview 271 10.2 Trials and Early Adopters Prior to 2020 271 10.3 5G Frequency Bands 272 10.4 Core and Radio Network Deployment Scenarios 273 10.5 Standalone and Non-Standalone Deployment Scenarios 276 10.6 5G Network Interfaces and Elements 281 10.7 Core Deployment 282 10.8 CoMP 283 10.9 Measurements 284 References 290 Index 293
£91.76
John Wiley and Sons Ltd Introduction to Digital Media
Book SynopsisNew and updated English translation of the highly successful book on digital media This book introduces readers to the vast and rich world of digital media. It provides a strong starting point for understanding digital media's social and political significance to our culture and the culture of othersdrawing on an emergent and increasingly rich set of empirical and theoretical studies on the role and development of digital media in contemporary societies. Touching on the core points behind the discipline, the book addresses a wide range of topics, including media economics, online cooperation, open source, social media, software production, globalization, brands, marketing, the cultural industry, labor, and consumption. Presented in six sectionsMedia and Digital Technologies; The Information Society; Cultures and Identities; Digital Collaboration; Public Sphere and Power; Digital Economiesthe book offers in-depth chapter coverage of new and old media; network infrastructure; networkeTable of ContentsPreface vii Part I Frameworks 1 1 Media and Digital Technologies 3 1.1 The Digital Environment 3 1.2 New and Old Media 6 1.3 Digital Media 8 1.4 Infrastructures and Platforms 13 1.5 Technology and Society 15 2 The Information Society 21 2.1 A New Society? 21 2.2 The Networked Economy and Globalization 23 2.3 Theories of the Information Society 27 2.4 The History of Information Technologies 31 2.5 The Evolution of Networks 38 2.6 The Future of the Information Society 42 Part II Transformations 45 3 Cultures and Identities 47 3.1 Digital Sociality 47 3.2 Social Media 51 3.3 Media and Identity 54 3.4 Communities or Publics? 59 3.5 Reputation and Influence 63 3.6 Critiques of Digital Sociality 66 4 From Collaboration to Value 71 4.1 Collaborative Media 71 4.2 The Dilemma of Participation 75 4.3 From Free Software to Peer‐to‐Peer 77 4.4 Open Innovation 83 4.5 The Economic Value of Cooperation 88 5 The Public Sphere and Power 93 5.1 From Audiences to Active Publics 93 5.2 Journalism and the Public Sphere 95 5.3 Politics and Democracy 102 5.4 Social Movements 106 5.5 Surveillance and Control 110 5.6 Information and Civic Culture 114 6 Work and Economy 117 6.1 The Rise of Digital Capitalism 117 6.2 Economic Models and Actors 119 6.3 Digital Labor and Precarity 125 6.4 Immaterial Production: Brands and Finance 135 6.5 Global Inequalities and Development 140 Conclusion 145 Glossary 149 References 155 Index 171
£77.36
John Wiley & Sons Inc Free Space Optical Systems Engineering
Book SynopsisGets you quickly up to speed with the theoretical and practical aspects of free space optical systems engineering design and analysis One of today''s fastest growing system design and analysis disciplines is free space optical systems engineering for communications and remote sensing applications. It is concerned with creating a light signal with certain characteristics, how this signal is affected and changed by the medium it traverses, how these effects can be mitigated both pre- and post-detection, and if after detection, it can be differentiated from noise under a certain standard, e.g., receiver operating characteristic. Free space optical systems engineering is a complex process to design against and analyze. While there are several good introductory texts devoted to key aspects of opticssuch as lens design, lasers, detectors, fiber and free space, optical communications, and remote sensinguntil now, there were none offering comprehensive coverage of the basics nTable of ContentsPreface xii About the Companion Website xvi 1 Mathematical Preliminaries 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Linear Algebra 1 1.2.1 Matrices and Vectors 2 1.2.2 Linear Operations 2 1.2.3 Traces, Determinants, and Inverses 3 1.2.4 Inner Products, Norms, and Orthogonality 7 1.2.5 Eigenvalues, Eigenvectors, and Rank 8 1.2.6 Quadratic Forms and Positive Definite Matrices 8 1.2.7 Gradients, Jacobians, and Hessians 8 1.3 Fourier Series 9 1.3.1 Real Fourier Series 9 1.3.2 Complex Fourier Series 10 1.3.3 Effects of Finite Fourier Series Use 11 1.3.4 Some Useful Properties of Fourier Series 14 1.4 Fourier Transforms 15 1.4.1 Some General Properties 15 1.5 Dirac Delta Function 20 1.6 Probability Theory 21 1.6.1 Axioms of Probability 21 1.6.2 Conditional Probabilities 23 1.6.3 Probability and Cumulative Density Functions 25 1.6.4 Probability Mass Function 27 1.6.5 Expectation and Moments of a Scalar Random Variable 28 1.6.6 Joint PDF and CDF of Two Random Variables 29 1.6.7 Independent Random Variables 29 1.6.8 Vector-Valued Random Variables 30 1.6.9 Gaussian Random Variables 31 1.6.10 Quadratic and Quartic Forms 33 1.6.11 Chi-Squared Distributed Random Variable 34 1.6.12 Binomial Distribution 35 1.6.13 Poisson Distribution 37 1.6.14 Random Processes 38 1.7 Decibels 40 1.8 Problems 42 References 48 2 Fourier Optics Basics 51 2.1 Introduction 51 2.2 The Maxwell Equations 52 2.3 The Rayleigh–Sommerfeld–Debye Theory of Diffraction 55 2.4 The Huygens–Fresnel–Kirchhoff Theory of Diffraction 59 2.5 Fraunhofer Diffraction 68 2.6 Bringing Fraunhofer Diffraction into the Near Field 76 2.7 Imperfect Imaging 82 2.8 The Rayleigh Resolution Criterion 84 2.9 The Sampling Theorem 85 2.10 Problems 89 References 93 3 Geometrical Optics 95 3.1 Introduction 95 3.2 The Foundations of Geometrical Optics – Eikonal Equation and Fermat Principle 96 3.3 Refraction and Reflection of Light Rays 98 3.4 Geometrical Optics Nomenclature 101 3.5 Imaging System Design Basics 103 3.6 Optical Invariant 109 3.7 Another View of Lens Theory 111 3.8 Apertures and Field Stops 113 3.8.1 Aperture Stop 113 3.8.2 Entrance and Exit Pupils 114 3.8.3 Field Stop and Chief and Marginal Rays 115 3.8.4 Entrance and Exit Windows 117 3.8.5 Baffles 119 3.9 Problems 119 References 121 4 Radiometry 123 4.1 Introduction 123 4.2 Basic Geometrical Definitions 124 4.3 Radiometric Parameters 127 4.3.1 Radiant Flux (Radiant Power) 129 4.3.2 Radiant Intensity 130 4.3.3 Radiance 130 4.3.4 Étendue 132 4.3.5 Radiant Flux Density (Irradiance and Radiant Exitance) 135 4.3.6 Bidirectional Reflectance Distribution Function 135 4.3.7 Directional Hemispheric Reflectance 136 4.3.8 Specular Surfaces 136 4.4 Lambertian Surfaces and Albedo 137 4.5 Spectral Radiant Emittance and Power 138 4.6 Irradiance from a Lambertian Source 139 4.7 The Radiometry of Images 143 4.8 Blackbody Radiation Sources 145 4.9 Problems 151 References 151 5 Characterizing Optical Imaging Performance 153 5.1 Introduction 153 5.2 Linearity and Space Variance of the Optical System or Optical Channel 154 5.3 Spatial Filter Theory of Image Formation 156 5.4 Linear Filter Theory of Incoherent Image Formation 160 5.5 The Modulation Transfer Function 162 5.6 The Duffieux Formula 167 5.7 Obscured Aperture OTF 174 5.7.1 Aberrations 179 5.8 High-Order Aberration Effects Characterization 184 5.9 The Strehl Ratio 191 5.10 Multiple Systems Transfer Function 193 5.11 Linear Systems Summary 195 References 198 6 Partial Coherence Theory 201 6.1 Introduction 201 6.2 Radiation Fluctuation 202 6.3 Interference and Temporal Coherence 205 6.4 Interference and Spatial Coherence 214 6.5 Coherent Light Propagating Through a Simple Lens System 219 6.6 Partially Coherent Imaging Through any Optical System 231 6.7 Van Cittert–Zernike Theorem 233 6.8 Problems 235 References 237 7 Optical Channel Effects 239 7.1 Introduction 239 7.2 Essential Concepts in Radiative Transfer 239 7.3 The Radiative Transfer Equation 245 7.4 Mutual Coherence Function for an Aerosol Atmosphere 251 7.5 Mutual Coherence Function for a Molecular Atmosphere 255 7.6 Mutual Coherence Function for an Inhomogeneous Turbulent Atmosphere 256 7.7 Laser Beam Propagation in the Total Atmosphere 262 7.8 Key Parameters for Analyzing Light Propagation Through Gradient Turbulence 272 7.9 Two Refractive Index Structure Parameter Models for the Earth’s Atmosphere 278 7.10 Engineering Equations for Light Propagation in the Ocean and Clouds 282 7.11 Problems 294 References 295 8 Optical Receivers 299 8.1 Introduction 299 8.2 Optical Detectors 300 8.2.1 Performance Criteria 300 8.2.2 Thermal Detectors 302 8.2.3 Photoemissive Detectors 302 8.2.4 Semiconductor Photodetectors 305 8.2.5 Photodiode Array and Charge-Coupled Devices 325 8.3 Noise Mechanisms in Optical Receivers 325 8.3.1 Shot Noise 326 8.3.2 Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier (EDFA) Noise 330 8.3.3 Relative Intensity Noise 331 8.3.4 More Conventional Noise Sources 333 8.4 Performance Measures 335 8.4.1 Signal-to-Noise Ratio 336 8.4.2 The Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio 338 8.4.3 The Many Faces of the Signal-to-Noise Ratio 345 8.4.4 Noise Equivalent Power and Minimum Detectable Power 346 8.4.5 Receiver Sensitivity 347 8.5 Problems 350 References 353 9 Signal Detection and Estimation Theory 355 9.1 Introduction 355 9.2 Classical Statistical Detection Theory 356 9.2.1 The Bayes Criterion 358 9.2.2 The Minimax Criterion 360 9.2.3 The Neyman–Pearson Criterion 361 9.3 Testing of Simple Hypotheses Using Multiple Measurements 365 9.4 Constant False Alarm Rate (CFAR) Detection 374 9.5 Optical Communications 375 9.5.1 Receiver Sensitivity for System Noise-Limited Communications 375 9.5.2 Receiver Sensitivity for Quantum-Limited Communications 381 9.6 Laser Radar (LADAR) and LIDAR 389 9.6.1 Background 389 9.6.2 Coherent Laser Radar 392 9.6.3 Continuous Direct Detection Intensity Statistics 398 9.6.4 Photon-Counting Direct Detection Intensity Statistics 401 9.6.5 LIDAR 404 9.7 Resolved Target Detection in Correlated Background Clutter and Common System Noise 408 9.8 Zero Contrast Target Detection in Background Clutter 415 9.9 Multispectral Signal-Plus-Noise/Noise-Only Target Detection in Clutter 416 9.10 Resolved Target Detection in Correlated Dual-Band Multispectral Image Sets 427 9.11 Image Whitener 434 9.11.1 Orthogonal Sets 434 9.11.2 Gram–Schmidt Orthogonalization Theory 435 9.11.3 Prewhitening Filter Using the Gram–Schmidt Process 436 9.12 Problems 437 References 440 10 Laser Sources 443 10.1 Introduction 443 10.2 Spontaneous and Stimulated Emission Processes 444 10.2.1 The Two-Level System 444 10.2.2 The Three-Level System 451 10.2.3 The Four-Level System 453 10.3 Laser Pumping 454 10.3.1 Laser Pumping without Amplifier Radiation 454 10.3.2 Laser Pumping with Amplifier Radiation 455 10.4 Laser Gain and Phase-Shift Coefficients 456 10.5 Laser Cavity Gains and Losses 463 10.6 Optical Resonators 466 10.6.1 Planar Mirror Resonators – Longitudinal Modes 466 10.6.2 Planar Mirror Resonators – Transverse Modes 471 10.7 The ABCD Matrix and Resonator Stability 474 10.8 Stability of a Two-Mirror Resonator 477 10.9 Problems 479 References 482 Appendix A STATIONARY PHASE AND SADDLE POINT METHODS 485 A.1 Introduction 485 A.2 The Method of Stationary Phase 485 A.3 Saddle Point Method 487 Appendix B EYE DIAGRAM AND ITS INTERPRETATION 489 B.1 Introduction 489 B.2 Eye Diagram Overview 489 Appendix C VECTOR-SPACE IMAGE REPRESENTATION 491 C.1 Introduction 491 C.2 Basic Formalism 491 Reference 493 Appendix D PARAXIAL RAY TRACING – ABCD MATRIX 495 D.1 Introduction 495 D.2 Basic Formalism 495 D.2.1 Propagation in a Homogeneous Medium 497 D.2.2 Propagation Against a Curved Interface 498 D.2.3 Propagation into a Refractive Index Interface 499 References 502 Index 503
£108.86
John Wiley & Sons Inc Audio Source Separation and Speech Enhancement
Book SynopsisLearn the technology behind hearing aids, Siri, and Echo Audio source separation and speech enhancement aim to extract one or more source signals of interest from an audio recording involving several sound sources.Table of ContentsList of Authors xvii Preface xxi Acknowledgment xxiii Notations xxv Acronyms xxix About the Companion Website xxxi Part I Prerequisites 1 1 Introduction 3Emmanuel Vincent, Sharon Gannot, and Tuomas Virtanen 1.1 Why are Source Separation and Speech Enhancement Needed? 3 1.2 What are the Goals of Source Separation and Speech Enhancement? 4 1.3 How can Source Separation and Speech Enhancement be Addressed? 9 1.4 Outline 11 Bibliography 12 2 Time-Frequency Processing: Spectral Properties 15Tuomas Virtanen, Emmanuel Vincent, and Sharon Gannot 2.1 Time-Frequency Analysis and Synthesis 15 2.2 Source Properties in the Time-Frequency Domain 23 2.3 Filtering in the Time-Frequency Domain 25 2.4 Summary 28 Bibliography 28 3 Acoustics: Spatial Properties 31Emmanuel Vincent, Sharon Gannot, and Tuomas Virtanen 3.1 Formalization of the Mixing Process 31 3.2 Microphone Recordings 32 3.3 Artificial Mixtures 36 3.4 Impulse Response Models 37 3.5 Summary 43 Bibliography 43 4 Multichannel Source Activity Detection, Localization, and Tracking 47Pasi Pertilä, Alessio Brutti, Piergiorgio Svaizer, and Maurizio Omologo 4.1 Basic Notions in Multichannel Spatial Audio 47 4.2 Multi-Microphone Source Activity Detection 52 4.3 Source Localization 54 4.4 Summary 60 Bibliography 60 Part II Single-Channel Separation and Enhancement 655 Spectral Masking and Filtering 67Timo Gerkmann and Emmanuel Vincent 5.1 Time-Frequency Masking 67 5.2 Mask Estimation Given the Signal Statistics 70 5.3 Perceptual Improvements 81 5.4 Summary 82 Bibliography 83 6 Single-Channel Speech Presence Probability Estimation and Noise Tracking 87Rainer Martin and Israel Cohen 6.1 Speech Presence Probability and its Estimation 87 6.2 Noise Power Spectrum Tracking 93 6.3 Evaluation Measures 102 6.4 Summary 104 Bibliography 104 7 Single-Channel Classification and Clustering Approaches 107FelixWeninger, Jun Du, Erik Marchi, and Tian Gao 7.1 Source Separation by Computational Auditory Scene Analysis 108 7.2 Source Separation by Factorial HMMs 111 7.3 Separation Based Training 113 7.4 Summary 125 Bibliography 125 8 Nonnegative Matrix Factorization 131Roland Badeau and Tuomas Virtanen 8.1 NMF and Source Separation 131 8.2 NMF Theory and Algorithms 137 8.3 NMF Dictionary LearningMethods 145 8.4 Advanced NMF Models 148 8.5 Summary 156 Bibliography 156 9 Temporal Extensions of Nonnegative Matrix Factorization 161Cédric Févotte, Paris Smaragdis, NasserMohammadiha, and Gautham J.Mysore 9.1 Convolutive NMF 161 9.2 Overview of DynamicalModels 169 9.3 Smooth NMF 170 9.4 Nonnegative State-Space Models 174 9.5 Discrete DynamicalModels 178 9.6 The Use of DynamicModels in Source Separation 182 9.7 Which Model to Use? 183 9.8 Summary 184 9.9 Standard Distributions 184 Bibliography 185 Part III Multichannel Separation and Enhancement 189 10 Spatial Filtering 191Shmulik Markovich-Golan,Walter Kellermann, and Sharon Gannot 10.1 Fundamentals of Array Processing 192 10.2 Array Topologies 197 10.3 Data-Independent Beamforming 199 10.4 Data-Dependent Spatial Filters: Design Criteria 202 10.5 Generalized Sidelobe Canceler Implementation 209 10.6 Postfilters 210 10.7 Summary 211 Bibliography 212 11 Multichannel Parameter Estimation 219Shmulik Markovich-Golan,Walter Kellermann, and Sharon Gannot 11.1 Multichannel Speech Presence Probability Estimators 219 11.2 Covariance Matrix Estimators Exploiting SPP 227 11.3 Methods forWeakly Guided and Strongly Guided RTF Estimation 228 11.4 Summary 231 Bibliography 231 12 Multichannel Clustering and Classification Approaches 235Michael I.Mandel, Shoko Araki, and Tomohiro Nakatani 12.1 Two-Channel Clustering 236 12.2 Multichannel Clustering 244 12.3 Multichannel Classification 251 12.4 Spatial Filtering Based on Masks 255 12.5 Summary 257 Bibliography 258 13 Independent Component and Vector Analysis 263Hiroshi Sawada and Zbynˇek Koldovský 13.1 Convolutive Mixtures and their Time-Frequency Representations 264 13.2 Frequency-Domain Independent Component Analysis 265 13.3 Independent Vector Analysis 279 13.4 Example 280 13.5 Summary 284 Bibliography 284 14 Gaussian Model Based Multichannel Separation 289Alexey Ozerov and Hirokazu Kameoka 14.1 Gaussian Modeling 289 14.2 Library of Spectral and SpatialModels 295 14.3 Parameter Estimation Criteria and Algorithms 300 14.4 Detailed Presentation of Some Methods 305 14.5 Summary 312 Acknowledgment 312 Bibliography 312 15 Dereverberation 317Emanuël A.P. Habets and Patrick A. Naylor 15.1 Introduction to Dereverberation 317 15.2 Reverberation Cancellation Approaches 319 15.3 Reverberation Suppression Approaches 329 15.4 Direct Estimation 335 15.5 Evaluation of Dereverberation 336 15.6 Summary 337 Bibliography 337 Part IV Application Scenarios and Perspectives 345 16 Applying Source Separation to Music 347Bryan Pardo, Antoine Liutkus, Zhiyao Duan, and Gaël Richard 16.1 Challenges and Opportunities 348 16.2 Nonnegative Matrix Factorization in the Case of Music 349 16.3 Taking Advantage of the Harmonic Structure of Music 354 16.4 Nonparametric Local Models: Taking Advantage of Redundancies in Music 358 16.5 Taking Advantage of Multiple Instances 363 16.6 Interactive Source Separation 367 16.7 Crowd-Based Evaluation 367 16.8 Some Examples of Applications 368 16.9 Summary 370 Bibliography 370 17 Application of Source Separation to Robust Speech Analysis and Recognition 377ShinjiWatanabe, Tuomas Virtanen, and Dorothea Kolossa 17.1 Challenges and Opportunities 377 17.2 Applications 380 17.3 Robust Speech Analysis and Recognition 390 17.4 Integration of Front-End and Back-End 397 17.5 Use of Multimodal Information with Source Separation 403 17.6 Summary 404 Bibliography 405 18 Binaural Speech Processing with Application to Hearing Devices 413Simon Doclo, Sharon Gannot, Daniel Marquardt, and Elior Hadad 18.1 Introduction to Binaural Processing 413 18.2 Binaural Hearing 415 18.3 Binaural Noise Reduction Paradigms 416 18.4 The Binaural Noise Reduction Problem 420 18.5 Extensions for Diffuse Noise 425 18.6 Extensions for Interfering Sources 431 18.7 Summary 437 Bibliography 437 19 Perspectives 443Emmanuel Vincent, Tuomas Virtanen, and Sharon Gannot 19.1 Advancing Deep Learning 443 19.2 Exploiting Phase Relationships 447 19.3 AdvancingMultichannel Processing 450 19.4 Addressing Multiple-Device Scenarios 453 19.5 TowardsWidespread Commercial Use 455 Acknowledgment 457 Bibliography 457 Index 465
£101.66
John Wiley & Sons Inc Photovoltaic Power System
Book SynopsisPhotovoltaic Power System: Modelling, Design and Control is an essential reference with a practical approach to photovoltaic (PV) power system analysis and control. It systematically guides readers through PV system design, modelling, simulation, maximum power point tracking and control techniques making this invaluable resource to students and professionals progressing from different levels in PV power engineering. The development of this book follows the author''s 15-year experience as an electrical engineer in the PV engineering sector and as an educator in academia. It provides the background knowledge of PV power system but will also inform research direction. Key features: Details modern converter topologies and a step-by-step modelling approach to simulate and control a complete PV power system. Introduces industrial standards, regulations, and electric codes for safety practice and research direction. Covers new classificatTrade Review�This book is an excellent explanation of PV power systems and its controls. It brings sufficient knowledge on modeling and designing different kinds of PV systems (both standalone and grid-tied). In the first 4 chapters, it focuses more on the introduction and PV basics such as PV classification, characteristics, and mathematical models. This information will lead readers to a general understanding of PV fundamentals, providing a smooth transition from basic knowledge to advanced industrial PV applications. It perfectly combines the theory and practical exercises. In chapter 5, it discusses the design, simulates and evaluates of state-of-art system components such as PV-side converters, battery-side converters, and grid-side converters. After discussing the system components, in the next two chapters, the complete dynamic modeling of PV systems are introduced. This book emphasizes the computer-aided analysis and simulation verification. The detailed equations behind the functions are provided, and the simulation blocks used are built using the commonly used blocks in Simulink. Readers can easily follow the step-by-step instructions to simulate the whole PV system in Matlab. Apart from system modeling, the control of the entire PV system like linear control and MPPT technology are also addressed. This book fulfills important demand in both academia and industry. It is also a perfect choice to support teaching senior-undergraduate and graduate courses.� Dr. Yang Du, Xi�an Jiaotong Liverpool University �This is a textbook for a course that would appear to be suitable for upper level graduate students. It could also be used by undergraduates and master�s degree level students who want to get a general idea of how solar electric power systems work. The book reads well and should be accessible to most college students and certainly almost all graduate students. In addition to its use for higher education, this book could be used by engineers and utility executives who want to understand the technology of solar photovoltaic systems�It is possible to contemplate using this book to learn about and to teach about solar photovoltaic systems. This is clearly a textbook: it is not a design reference book. With increasing importance of sustainable sources of electric power, there is a clear need to better educate university students about the technology of photovoltaic power. This book should make a serious contribution.� James Kirtley, Professor of Electrical Engineering, Massachusetts Institute of Technology �This book is an excellent choice for beginners working in the photovoltaic industry. It contains a nice mix of industrial applications/examples along with theoretical derivations of photovoltaic system at component- and system-level. The step-by-step discussion on industry background, problem formulation, mathematical modelling, computer simulation, and practical implementation provides a holistic view of designing photovoltaic systems. Detailed simulations modelling the dynamics of individual photovoltaic cell, maximum power point tracking, energy conversion (DC-DC and DC-AC), and grid-level auxiliary services (such as voltage regulation) are also provided. Since the designed MATLAB/SIMULINK block diagrams are provided throughout this book, reproducing the waveforms and results are feasible. In my opinion, this is the most important element� The addition of this book helps students and researchers to quickly grasp the fundamentals of photovoltaic systems. Note that the materials covered in this book are more suitable for graduate students.� Jimmy C.-H. Peng, Assistant Professor, Department of Electrical & Computer Engineering, National University of Singapore �This book provides an inclusive introduction to the field of photovoltaic systems. It covers the basics of PV systems, their classifications, modeling, practical design issues, and their control and operation. It provides in-depth discussions for several modeling and control issues of PV systems and their power electronic converters. The book can be used to help students and researchers gain knowledge on the state of the art in this area and can familiarize engineers with designing safe and practical PV systems. I use the book as a textbook for the graduate course I teach at Worcester Polytechnic Institute about photovoltaic power systems. I found it the most comprehensive book that covers wide areas in PV engineering.� Yousef A. Mahmoud, Assistant Professor, Worcester Polytechnic InstituteTable of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgments xvii About the companion website xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Cell, Module, Panel, String, Subarray, and Array 2 1.2 Blocking Diode 5 1.3 Photovoltaic Cell Materials and Efficiency 6 1.4 Test Conditions 7 1.5 PV Module Test 8 1.6 PV Output Characteristics 9 1.7 PV Array Simulator 12 1.8 Power Interfaces 13 1.9 Standalone Systems 13 1.10 AC Grid-connected Systems 18 1.11 DC Grid and Microgrid Connections 19 1.12 Building-integrated Photovoltaics 21 1.13 Other Solar Power Systems 22 1.14 Sun Trackers 23 Problems 24 References 24 2 Classification of Photovoltaic Power Systems 25 2.1 Background 25 2.2 CMPPT Systems 26 2.2.1 Power Loss due to PV Array Mismatch 29 2.2.2 Communication and Data Acquisition for CMPPT Systems 32 2.3 DMPPT Systems at PV String Level 36 2.4 DMPPT Systems at PV Module Level 37 2.4.1 Module-integrated Parallel Inverters 37 2.4.2 Module-integrated Parallel Converters 39 2.4.3 Module-integrated Series Converters 40 2.4.4 Module-integrated Differential Power Processors 40 2.4.5 Module-integrated Series Inverters 41 2.5 DMPPT Systems at PV Submodule Level 42 2.5.1 Submodule-integrated Series Converters 42 2.5.2 Submodule-integrated Differential Power Processors 43 2.5.3 Isolated-port Differential Power Processors 44 2.6 DMPPT Systems at PV Cell Level 44 2.7 Summary 45 Problems 46 References 46 3 Safety Standards, Guidance and Regulation 49 3.1 Certification of PV Modules 49 3.2 Interconnection Standards 51 3.3 System Integration to Low-voltage Networks 55 3.3.1 Grounded Systems 55 3.3.2 DC Ground Fault Protection 56 3.3.3 Voltage Specification 56 3.3.4 Circuit Sizing and Current 58 3.3.5 Cable Selection 58 3.3.6 Connectors and Disconnects 59 3.3.7 Grid Interconnections through Power Distribution Panels 59 3.3.8 Marking 60 3.4 System Integration to Medium-voltage Network 60 3.4.1 Active Power Throttling 61 3.4.2 Fault Ride-through 61 3.4.3 Reactive Power Support 62 3.5 Summary 63 Problems 63 References 64 4 PV Output Characteristics and Mathematical Models 65 4.1 Ideal Single-diode Model 68 4.1.1 Product Specification 68 4.1.2 Parameter Identification at Standard Test Conditions 69 4.1.3 Variation with Irradiance and Temperature 71 4.2 Model Accuracy and Performance Indices 75 4.3 Simplified Single-diode Models 78 4.3.1 Parameter Identification: Part One 79 4.3.2 Parameter Identification: Part Two 81 4.3.3 Variation with Irradiance and Temperature 87 4.4 Model Selection from the Simplified Single-diode Models 88 4.5 Complete Single-diode Model 91 4.6 Model Aggregation and Terminal Output Configuration 92 4.7 Polynomial Curve Fitting 95 4.8 Summary 99 Problems 100 References 101 5 Power Conditioning 103 5.1 PV-side Converters 104 5.1.1 PV Module for Case Study 105 5.1.2 Buck Converter 105 5.1.3 Full-bridge Isolated Transformer DC/DC Converter 110 5.1.4 Boost Converter 115 5.1.5 Tapped-inductor Boost Topology 119 5.1.6 Buck–Boost Converter 122 5.1.7 Flyback Converter 126 5.2 Battery-side Converter for DC/DC Stage 130 5.2.1 Introduction to Dual Active Bridges 130 5.2.2 Discharge Operation 131 5.2.3 Charging Operation 135 5.2.4 Zero Voltage Switching 139 5.3 DC Link 142 5.3.1 DC Link for Single-phase Grid Interconnection 143 5.3.2 DC Link for Three-phase Grid Interconnections 145 5.4 Grid-side Converter for DC/AC Stage 147 5.4.1 DC to Single-phase AC Grid 147 5.4.2 DC to Three-phase AC Grid 151 5.4.3 Reactive Power 153 5.5 Grid Link 154 5.5.1 L-type for Single-phase Grid Connections 154 5.5.2 L-type for Three-phase Grid Interconnections 155 5.5.3 LCL-type Filters 157 5.5.4 LC-type Filters 160 5.6 Loss Analysis 160 5.6.1 Conduction Loss 161 5.6.2 High-frequency Loss 163 5.7 Conversion Efficiency 165 5.8 Wide Band-gap Devices for Future Power Conversion 165 5.9 Summary 167 Problems 169 References 171 6 Dynamic Modeling 173 6.1 State-space Averaging 173 6.2 Linearization 174 6.3 Dynamics of PV Link 175 6.3.1 Linearization of PV Output Characteristics 175 6.3.2 Buck Converter as the PV-link Power Interface 176 6.3.3 Full-bridge Transformer Isolated DC/DC as the PV-link Power Interface 180 6.3.4 Boost Converter as the PV-link Power Interface 182 6.3.5 Tapped-inductor Topology as the PV-link Power Interface 184 6.3.6 Buck–boost Converter as the PV-link Power Interface 186 6.3.7 Flyback Converter as the PV-link power Interface 188 6.4 Dynamics of DC Bus Voltage Interfaced with Dual Active Bridge 189 6.5 Dynamics of DC Link for AC Grid Connection 192 6.5.1 Single-phase Connection 192 6.5.2 Three-phase Connection 194 6.6 Summary 195 Problems 196 References 197 7 Voltage Regulation 199 7.1 Structure of Voltage Regulation in Grid-connected PV Systems 199 7.2 Affine Parameterization 201 7.3 PID-type Controllers 202 7.4 Desired Performance in Closed Loop 205 7.5 Relative Stability 206 7.6 Robustness 208 7.7 Feedforward Control 209 7.8 Voltage Regulation in PV Links 210 7.8.1 Boost Converter for PV Links 210 7.8.2 Tapped-inductor Topology for PV Links 213 7.8.3 Buck Converter as the PV-link Power Interface 214 7.8.4 Buck–boost Converter as the PV-link Power Interface 216 7.8.5 Flyback Converter as the PV-link Converter 218 7.9 Bus Voltage Regulation for DC Microgrids 220 7.10 DC-link Voltage Regulation for AC Grid Interconnections 221 7.10.1 Single-phase Grid Interconnection 222 7.10.2 Three-phase Grid Interconnection 226 7.11 Sensor, Transducer, and Signal Conditioning 227 7.12 Anti-windup 230 7.13 Digital Control 236 7.13.1 Continuous Time and Discrete Time 240 7.13.2 Digital Redesign 240 7.13.3 Time Delay due to Digital Conversion and Process 243 7.14 Summary 245 Problems 246 References 247 8 Maximum Power Point Tracking 249 8.1 Background 249 8.2 Heuristic Search 252 8.3 Extreme-value Searching 255 8.4 Sampling Frequency and Perturbation Size 257 8.5 Case Study 258 8.6 Start-stop Mechanism for HC-based MPPT 261 8.7 Adaptive Step Size Based on the Steepest Descent 264 8.8 Centered Differentiation 267 8.9 Real-time System Identification 270 8.9.1 Recursive Least Squares Method 270 8.9.2 Newton–Raphson Method for MPP Determination 272 8.9.3 Forgetting Factor 272 8.10 Extremum Seeking 273 8.11 Multiple Power Peaks and Global MPPT 276 8.12 Performance Evaluation of MPPT 277 8.12.1 Review of Indoor Test Environment 277 8.12.2 Review of Outdoor Test Environments 278 8.12.3 Recommended Test Benches for MPPT Evaluation 279 8.12.4 Statistical Paired Differential Evaluation 280 8.13 Summary 281 Problems 283 References 284 9 Battery Storage and Standalone System Design 285 9.1 Batteries 287 9.1.1 Battery Types 288 9.1.2 Battery Terminology 291 9.1.3 Charging Methods 292 9.1.4 Battery Mismatches and Balancing Methods 295 9.1.5 Battery Characteristics and Modeling 300 9.1.6 Battery Selection 308 9.2 Integrating Battery-charge Control with MPPT 308 9.3 Design of Standalone PV Systems 309 9.3.1 Systems without Significant Energy Storage 309 9.3.2 Systems with Significant Energy Storage 311 9.4 Equivalent Circuit for Simulation and Case Study 316 9.5 Simulation Model to Integrate Battery-charging with MPPT 317 9.6 Simulation Study of Standalone Systems 318 9.6.1 Simulation of PV Array 318 9.6.2 Short-term Simulation 319 9.6.3 Medium-term Simulation 321 9.6.4 Long-term Simulations 325 9.6.5 Very-long-term Simulations 328 9.7 Summary 329 Problems 331 References 332 10 System Design and Integration of Grid-connected Systems 333 10.1 System Integration of Single-phase Grid-connected System 335 10.1.1 Distributed Maximum Power Point Tracking at String Level 335 10.1.2 Distributed Maximum Power Point Tracking at PV Module Level 337 10.2 Design Example of Three-phase Grid-connected System 340 10.3 System Simulation and Concept Proof 343 10.3.1 Modeling and Simulation of PV String 344 10.3.2 Modeling and Simulation of DC/DC Stage 345 10.3.3 Modeling and Simulation of DC/AC Stage 349 10.3.4 Overall System Integration and Simulation 351 10.4 Simulation Efficiency for Conventional Grid-connected PV Systems 351 10.4.1 Averaging Technique for Switching-mode Converters 353 10.4.2 Overall System Integration and Simulation 354 10.4.3 Long-term Simulation 357 10.5 Grid-connected System Simulation Based on Module Integrated Parallel Inverters 359 10.5.1 Averaged Model for Module-integrated Parallel Inverters 359 10.5.2 Overall System Integration and Simulation 362 10.6 Summary 365 Problems 366 References 366 Index 367
£81.86
John Wiley & Sons Inc AeroMACS
Book SynopsisThis is a pioneering textbook on the comprehensive description of AeroMACS technology. It alsopresents the process of developing a new technology based on an established standard, in this case IEEE802.16 standards suite. The text introduces readers to the field of airport surface communications systems and provides them with comprehensive coverage of one the key components of the Next Generation Air Transportation System (NextGen); i.e., AeroMACS. It begins with a critical review of the legacy aeronautical communications system and a discussion of the impetus behind its replacement with network-centric digital technologies. It then describes wireless mobile channel characteristics in general, and focuses on the airport surface channel over the 5GHz band. This is followed by an extensive coverage of major features of IEEE 802.16-2009 Physical Layer (PHY)and Medium Access Control (MAC) Sublayer. The text then provides a comprehensive coverage of the AeroMACS standTable of ContentsPreface xvii Acronyms xxv 1 Airport Communications from Analog AM to AeroMACS 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Conventional Aeronautical Communication Domains (Flight Domains) 2 1.3 VHF Spectrum Depletion 4 1.4 The ACAST Project 5 1.5 Early Digital Communication Technologies for Aeronautics 7 1.5.1 ACARS 7 1.5.2 VHF Data Link (VDL) Systems 8 1.5.2.1 Aeronautical Telecommunications Network (ATN) 8 1.5.2.2 VDL Systems 8 1.5.3 Overlay Broadband Alternatives for Data Transmission 10 1.5.3.1 Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum Overlay 11 1.5.3.2 Broadband VHF (B-VHF) 11 1.5.4 Controller–Pilot Data Link Communications (CPDLC) 12 1.6 Selection of a Communications Technology for Aeronautics 14 1.7 The National Airspace System (NAS) 15 1.7.1 Flight Control 16 1.7.2 United States Civilian Airports 17 1.8 The Next Generation Air Transportation System (NextGen) 20 1.8.1 The NextGen Vision 22 1.8.2 NextGen Key Components and Functionalities 22 1.9 Auxiliary Wireless Communications Systems Available for the Airport Surface 25 1.9.1 Public Safety Mobile Radio for Airport Incidents 26 1.9.1.1 Public Safety Communications (PSC) Systems Architecture and Technologies 26 1.9.1.2 Public Safety Allocated Radio Spectrum 27 1.9.1.3 700 MHz Band and the First Responder Network Authority (FirstNet) 28 1.9.2 Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) Systems Applications for Airport Surface 30 1.10 Airport Wired Communications Systems 31 1.10.1 Airport Fiber-Optic Cable Loop System 34 1.10.2 Applications of CLCS in Airport Surface Communications and Navigation 35 1.11 Summary 36 References 36 2 Cellular Networking and Mobile Radio Channel Characterization 41 2.1 Introduction 41 2.2 The Crux of the Cellular Concept 42 2.2.1 The “Precellular” Wireless Mobile Communications Systems 43 2.2.2 The Core of the Cellular Notion 45 2.2.3 Frequency Reuse and Radio Channel Multiplicity 48 2.2.3.1 Co-Channel Reuse Ratio (CCRR), Cluster Size, and Reuse Factor 49 2.2.3.2 Signal to Co-Channel Interference Ratio (SIR) 50 2.2.3.3 Channel Allocation 55 2.2.4 Erlang Traffic Theory and Cellular Network Design 57 2.2.4.1 Trunking, Erlang, and Traffic 58 2.2.4.2 The Grade of Service 60 2.2.4.3 Blocked Calls Handling Strategies 60 2.2.4.4 Trunking Efficiency 62 2.2.4.5 Capacity Enhancement through Cell Splitting 64 2.2.4.6 Capacity Enhancement via Sectorization 67 2.3 Cellular Radio Channel Characterization 69 2.3.1 Cellular Link Impairments 69 2.3.2 Path Loss Computation and Estimation 71 2.3.2.1 Free-Space Propagation and Friis Formula 73 2.3.2.2 The Key Mechanisms Affecting Radio Wave Propagation 74 2.3.2.3 The Ray Tracing Technique 76 2.3.2.4 Ground Reflection and Double-Ray Model 76 2.3.2.5 Empirical Techniques for Path Loss (Large-Scale Attenuation) Estimation 81 2.3.2.6 Okumura–Hata Model for Outdoor Median Path Loss Estimation 82 2.3.2.7 COST 231-Hata Model 84 2.3.2.8 Stanford University Interim (SUI) Model: Erceg Model 85 2.3.2.9 ECC-33 Model 86 2.3.3 Large-Scale Fading: Shadowing and Foliage 87 2.3.3.1 Log-Normal Shadowing 88 2.3.3.2 Estimation of Useful Coverage Area (UCA) within a Cell Footprint 91 2.3.4 Small-Scale Fading: Multipath Propagation and Doppler Effect 94 2.3.4.1 Multipath Propagation 95 2.3.4.2 Double Path Example 97 2.3.4.3 Doppler Shift 99 2.3.4.4 Impulse Response of Multipath Channels 100 2.3.4.5 Delay Spread and Fading Modes 102 2.3.4.6 Methods of Combating Frequency-Selective Fading 103 2.3.4.7 Coherence Bandwidth and Power Delay Profiles (PDPs) 105 2.3.4.8 Frequency Flat Fading versus Frequency-Selective Fading 108 2.3.4.9 Frequency Dispersion and Coherence Time 109 2.3.4.10 Classification of Multipath Fading Channels 110 2.3.4.11 Probabilistic Models for Frequency Flat Fading Channels 112 2.3.4.12 Rayleigh Fading Channels 112 2.3.4.13 Rician Fading Channels 115 2.4 Challenges of Broadband Transmission over the Airport Surface Channel 117 2.5 Summary 118 References 119 3 Wireless Channel Characterization for the 5 GHz Band Airport Surface Area 123 3.1 Introduction 123 3.1.1 Importance of Channel Characterization 123 3.1.2 Channel Definitions 125 3.1.3 Airport Surface Area Channel 127 3.2 Statistical Channel Characterization Overview 129 3.2.1 The Channel Impulse Response and Transfer Function 129 3.2.2 Statistical Channel Characteristics 130 3.2.3 Common Channel Parameters and Statistics 133 3.3 Channel Effects and Signaling 134 3.3.1 Small-Scale and Large-Scale Fading 134 3.3.2 Channel Parameters and Signaling Relations 135 3.4 Measured Airport Surface Area Channels 137 3.4.1 Measurement Description and Example Results 137 3.4.2 Path Loss Results 141 3.5 Airport Surface Area Channel Models 143 3.5.1 Large/Medium-Sized Airports 144 3.5.2 Small Airports 144 3.6 Summary 144 References 147 4 Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing and Multiple Access 151 4.1 Introduction 151 4.2 Fundamental Principles of OFDM Signaling 152 4.2.1 Parallel Transmission, Orthogonal Multiplexing, Guard Time, and Cyclic Extension 154 4.2.1.1 Cyclic Prefix and Guard Time 155 4.2.2 Fourier Transform-Based OFDM Signal 156 4.2.3 Windowing, Filtering, and Formation of OFDM Signal 157 4.2.4 OFDM System Implementation 159 4.2.5 Choice of Modulation Schemes for OFDM 160 4.2.6 OFDM Systems Design: How the Key Parameters are Selected 161 4.3 Coded Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing: COFDM 161 4.3.1 Motivation 162 4.3.2 System-Level Functional Block Diagram of a Fourier-Based COFDM 162 4.3.3 Some Classical Applications of COFDM 164 4.3.3.1 COFDM Applied in Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) 164 4.3.3.2 COFDM Applied in Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi): The IEEE 802.11 Standard 165 4.4 Performance of Channel Coding in OFDM Networks 167 4.5 Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiple Access: OFDMA 169 4.5.1 Multiple Access Technologies: FDMA, TDMA, CDMA, and OFDMA 171 4.5.2 Incentives behind Widespread Applications of OFDMA in Wireless Networks 175 4.5.3 Subchannelization and Symbol Structure 176 4.5.4 Permutation Modes for Configuration of Subchannels 178 4.5.4.1 The Peak-to-Average Power Ratio Problem 179 4.6 Scalable OFDMA (SOFDMA) 179 4.6.1 How to Select the OFDMA Basic Parameters vis-à-vis Scalability 180 4.6.2 Options in Scaling 182 4.7 Summary 183 References 184 5 The IEEE 802.16 Standards and the WiMAX Technology 189 5.1 Introduction to the IEEE 802.16 Standards for Wireless MAN Networks 190 5.2 The Evolution and Characterization of IEEE 802.16 Standards 193 5.2.1 IEEE 802.16-2004 Standard 193 5.2.2 IEEE 802.16e-2005 Standard 194 5.2.3 IEEE 802.16-2009 Standard 194 5.2.4 IEEE 802.16j Amendment 194 5.2.5 The Structure of a WirelessMAN Cell 195 5.2.6 Protocol Reference Model (PRM) for the IEEE 802.16-2009 Standard 197 5.3 WiMAX: an IEEE 802.16-Based Technology 200 5.3.1 Basic Features of WiMAX Systems 200 5.3.2 WiMAX Physical Layer Characterization 204 5.3.2.1 OFDMA and SOFDMA for WiMAX 205 5.3.2.2 Comparison of Duplexing Technologies: TDD versus FDD 206 5.3.2.3 Subchannelization for Mobile WiMAX 207 5.3.2.4 WiMAX TDD Frame Structure 211 5.3.2.5 Adaptive (Advanced) Modulation and Coding (AMC) 215 5.3.2.6 ARQ and Hybrid ARQ: Multilayer Error Control Schemes 219 5.3.2.7 Multiple Antenna Techniques, MIMO, and Space-Time Coding 219 5.3.2.8 Fractional Frequency Reuse Techniques for Combating Intercell Interference and to Boost Spectral Efficiency 227 5.3.2.9 Power Control and Saving Modes in WiMAX Networks 230 5.3.3 WiMAX MAC Layer Description 231 5.3.3.1 WiMAX MAC CS; Connections and Service Flows 232 5.3.3.2 The MAC CPS Functionalities 232 5.3.3.3 WiMAX Security Sublayer 233 5.3.3.4 WiMAX MAC Frame and MAC Header Format 234 5.3.3.5 Quality of Service (QoS), Scheduling, and Bandwidth Allocation 235 5.3.4 WiMAX Forum and WiMAX Profiles 239 5.3.4.1 WiMAX System Profiles and Certification Profiles 240 5.3.4.2 WiMAX Mobile System Profiles 241 5.3.5 WiMAX Network Architecture 245 5.3.5.1 WiMAX Network Reference Model as Presented by WiMAX Forum 246 5.3.5.2 Characterization of Major Logical and Physical Components of WiMAX NRM 248 5.3.5.3 Visual Depiction of WiMAX NRM 250 5.3.5.4 The Description of WiMAX Reference Points 250 5.3.6 Mobility and Handover in WiMAX Networks 250 5.3.7 Multicast and Broadcast with WiMAX 253 5.4 Summary 254 References 255 6 Introduction to AeroMACS 259 6.1 The Origins of the AeroMACS Concept 259 6.1.1 WiMAX Salient Features and the Genealogy of AeroMACS 260 6.2 Defining Documents in the Making of AeroMACS Technology 262 6.3 AeroMACS Standardization 267 6.3.1 AeroMACS Standards and Recommended Practices (SARPS) 268 6.3.2 Harmonization Document 270 6.3.3 Overview of Most Recent AeroMACS Profile 271 6.3.3.1 The AeroMACS Profile Background and Concept of Operations 273 6.3.3.2 AeroMACS Profile Technical Aspects 275 6.3.3.3 Profile’s Key Assumptions for AeroMACS System Design 275 6.3.3.4 AeroMACS Radio Profile Requirements and Restrictions 276 6.3.3.5 AeroMACS Profile Common Part and TDD Format 277 6.3.4 AeroMACS Minimum Operational Performance Standards (MOPS) 279 6.3.4.1 AeroMACS Capabilities and Operational Applications 280 6.3.4.2 MOPS Equipment Test Procedures 281 6.3.4.3 Minimum Performance Standard 281 6.3.5 AeroMACS Minimum Aviation System Performance Standards (MASPS) 283 6.3.6 AeroMACS Technical Manual 285 6.4 AeroMACS Services and Applications 287 6.5 AeroMACS Prototype Network and Testbed 295 6.5.1 Testbed Configuration 296 6.5.2 Early Testing Procedures and Results 297 6.5.2.1 Mobile Application Testing with ARV 298 6.5.2.2 The Results of AeroMACS Mobile Tests with Boeing 737–700 299 6.5.2.3 AeroMACS Performance Validation 300 6.6 Summary 301 References 302 7 AeroMACS Networks Characterization 305 7.1 Introduction 305 7.2 AeroMACS Physical Layer Specifications 306 7.2.1 OFDM and OFDMA for AeroMACS 309 7.2.2 AeroMACS OFDMA TDD Frame Configuration 309 7.2.3 AeroMACS Modulation Formats 312 7.2.3.1 How to Select a Modulation Technique for a Specific Application 313 7.2.3.2 General Characteristics of Modulation Schemes Supported by AeroMACS 315 7.2.4 AeroMACS Channel Coding Schemes 318 7.2.4.1 Mandatory Channel Coding for AeroMACS 318 7.2.4.2 Optional CC–RS Code Concatenated Scheme 320 7.2.4.3 Convolutional Turbo Coding (CTC) Technique 321 7.2.5 Adaptive Modulation and Coding (AMC) for AeroMACS Link Adaptation 323 7.2.6 AeroMACS Frame Structure 325 7.2.7 Computation of AeroMACS Receiver Sensitivity 326 7.2.8 Fractional Frequency Reuse for WiMAX and AeroMACS Networks 327 7.2.9 Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) Configurations for AeroMACS 328 7.3 Spectrum Considerations 329 7.4 Spectrum Sharing and Interference Compatibility Constraints 332 7.5 AeroMACS Media Access Control (MAC) Sublayer 334 7.5.1 Quality of Service for AeroMACS Networks 336 7.5.2 Scheduling, Resource Allocation, and Data Delivery 338 7.5.3 Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ) Protocols 341 7.5.4 Handover (HO) Procedures in AeroMACS Networks 344 7.5.4.1 MS-Initiated Handover Process 345 7.6 AeroMACS Network Architecture and Reference Model 347 7.6.1 AeroMACS Network Architecture 347 7.6.2 AeroMACS Network Reference Model (NRM) 349 7.7 Aeronautical Telecommunications Network Revisited 353 7.8 AeroMACS and the Airport Network 355 7.9 Summary 356 References 358 8 AeroMACS Networks Fortified with Multihop Relays 361 8.1 Introduction 361 8.2 IEEE 802.16j Amendment Revisited 362 8.3 Relays: Definitions, Classification, and Modes of Operation 365 8.3.1 A Double-Hop Relay Configuration: Terminologies and Definitions 366 8.3.2 Relay Modes: Transparent versus Non-Transparent 368 8.3.3 Time Division Transmit and Receive Relays (TTR) and Simultaneous Transmit and Receive Relays (STR) 371 8.3.4 Further Division of Relay Modes of Operation 372 8.3.5 Relays Classification Based on MAC Layer Functionalities: Centralized and Distributed Modes 373 8.3.6 Physical Classification of IEEE 802.16j Relays: Relay Types 374 8.3.6.1 Relay Type and Latency 375 8.3.7 Modes of Deployment of IEEE 802.16j Relays in Wireless Networks 376 8.3.8 Frame Structure for Double-Hop IEEE 802.16j TDD TRS 377 8.3.8.1 The Detail of IEEE 802-16j Operation with Transparent Relays 380 8.3.9 The Frame Structure for TTR–NTRS 381 8.3.10 The Frame Structure for STR–NTRS 382 8.3.10.1 STR Implementation in Different Layers 384 8.4 Regarding MAC Layers of IEEE 802.16j and NRTS 385 8.4.1 Data Forwarding Schemes 385 8.4.1.1 Routing Selection and Path Management 386 8.4.1.2 Initial Ranging and Network Entry 387 8.4.2 Scheduling 388 8.4.3 Security Schemes 390 8.4.4 Quality of Service (QoS) in Relay-Augmented Networks 390 8.4.4.1 The Impact of Scheduling and Relay Mode on AeroMACS Network Parameters 391 8.5 Challenges and Practical Issues in IEEE 802.16j-Based AeroMACS 392 8.5.1 Latency 392 8.5.2 The Number of Hops 392 8.5.3 The Output Power and Antenna Selection 393 8.6 Applications and Usage Scenarios for Relay-Augmented Broadband Cellular Networks 394 8.6.1 Some Applications of Relay-Fortified Systems 395 8.6.1.1 The European REWIND Project 395 8.6.1.2 Vehicular Networks 396 8.6.1.3 4G and 5G Cellular Networks 396 8.6.1.4 Cognitive Femtocell 397 8.6.2 Potential Usage Scenarios of IEEE 802.16j 397 8.6.2.1 Radio Outreach Extension 397 8.6.2.2 The Concept of “Filling a Coverage Hole” 399 8.6.2.3 Relays for Capacity and Throughput Improvement 399 8.6.2.4 The Case of Cooperative Relaying 399 8.6.2.5 Reliable Coverage for In-Building and In-Door Scenarios 400 8.6.2.6 The Mobile Relays 401 8.6.2.7 The Temporary Relay Stations 401 8.7 IEEE 802.16j-Based Relays for AeroMACS Networks 401 8.7.1 Airport Surface Radio Coverage Situations for which IEEE 802.16j Offers a Preferred Alternative 402 8.8 Radio Resource Management (RRM) for Relay-Fortified Wireless Networks 403 8.9 The Multihop Gain 405 8.9.1 Computation of Multihop Gain for the Simplest Case 405 8.10 Interapplication Interference (IAI) in Relay-Fortified AeroMACS 407 8.11 Making the Case for IEEE 802.16j-Based AeroMACS 411 8.11.1 The Main Arguments 411 8.11.1.1 Supporting and Drawback Instants 412 8.11.2 The Second Argument 412 8.11.3 How to Select a Relay Configuration 413 8.11.4 A Note on Cell Footprint Extension 413 8.12 Summary 414 References 415 Index 419
£112.46
John Wiley & Sons Inc Operation and Control of Renewable Energy Systems
Book SynopsisA comprehensive reference to renewable energy technologies with a focus on power generation and integration into power systems This book addresses the generation of energy (primarily electrical) through various renewable sources.Table of ContentsPreface xvii 1 Sources of Energy and Technologies 1 1.1 Energy Uses in Different Countries 1 1.2 Energy Sources 3 1.2.1 Non-Renewable Energy Resources 3 1.2.2 Renewable Sources of Energy 3 1.3 Energy and Environment 5 1.3.1 Climate Change 7 1.4 Review of Technologies for Renewable Energy System 8 1.4.1 Fluid Dynamics 8 1.4.1.1 Conservation of Mass 8 1.4.1.2 Conservation of Momentum 9 1.4.1.3 Conservation of Energy 10 1.5 Thermodynamics 11 1.5.1 Enthalpy 12 1.5.2 Specific Heat 12 1.5.3 Zeroth Law 13 1.5.4 First Law 13 1.5.4.1 Limitations of First law 14 1.5.5 Second Law of Thermodynamics 14 1.5.5.1 Kelvin–Planck Statement 15 1.5.5.2 Clausius Statement 16 1.5.6 Third Law of Thermodynamics 16 1.6 Thermodynamic Power Cycles 16 1.6.1 Ideal Cycle (Carnot Cycle) 17 1.6.2 Rankine Cycle 18 1.6.3 Brayton Cycle 18 1.7 Summary 21 References 21 2 Power Electronic Converters 23 2.1 Types of Power Electronic Converters 23 2.2 Power Semiconductor Devices 23 2.2.1 Thyristor 25 2.2.1.1 Line Commutation 25 2.2.1.2 Load Commutation 26 2.2.1.3 Forced Commutation 26 2.2.2 Gate Turn-OffThyristor (GTO) 26 2.2.3 Power Bipolar Junction Transistor 27 2.2.4 Power MOSFET 29 2.2.5 Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) 29 2.3 ac-to-dc Converters 30 2.3.1 Single-Phase Diode Bridge Rectifiers 31 2.3.2 Three-Phase Full-Wave Bridge Diode Rectifiers 32 2.3.3 Single-Phase Fully Controlled Rectifiers 32 2.3.4 Three-Phase Fully Controlled Bridge Converter 33 2.4 dc-to-ac Converters (Inverters) 34 2.4.1 Single-Phase Voltage Source Inverters 34 2.4.2 Square-Wave PWMInverter 34 2.4.3 Single-Pulse-WidthModulation 35 2.4.4 Multiple-Pulse-WidthModulation 36 2.4.5 Sinusoidal-Pulse-WidthModulation 36 2.4.6 Three-Phase Voltage Source Inverters 37 2.4.7 Single-Phase Current Source Inverters 39 2.4.7.1 Three-Phase Current Source Inverter 39 2.5 Multilevel Inverters 40 2.5.1 Diode-Clamped Multilevel Inverter 41 2.5.2 Flying-Capacitor Multilevel Inverter 42 2.5.3 Cascaded Multicell with Different dc Source Inverter 43 2.6 Resonant Converters 43 2.6.1 Series Resonant Converter 44 2.6.1.1 Discontinuous Conduction Mode 45 2.6.2 Parallel Resonant Inverter 45 2.6.3 ZCS Resonant Converters 45 2.6.4 ZVS Resonant Converter 46 2.6.5 Resonant dc-Link Inverters 46 2.7 Matrix Converters 47 2.8 Summary 48 References 48 3 Renewable Energy Generator Technology 51 3.1 Energy Conversion 51 3.2 Power Conversion and Control ofWind Energy Systems 51 3.2.1 Induction Generator 52 3.2.2 Permanent Magnet Synchronous Generator 53 3.2.3 Linear PM Synchronous Machine 53 3.3 Operation and Control of Induction Generators forWES 53 3.3.1 Equivalent Circuit 54 3.3.2 Wound-Rotor Induction Machine 55 3.3.3 Doubly Fed Induction Generator (DFIG) 57 3.3.3.1 Equivalent Circuit of DGIG 59 3.3.3.2 Braking System 60 3.4 PermanentMagnet Synchronous Generator 60 3.4.1 Modelling of PMSG 62 3.5 Wave Energy Conversion (WEC) Technologies 63 3.5.1 Linear Permanent Magnet Synchronous Machine 64 3.5.2 Tubular Permanent Magnet LinearWave Generator (TPMLWG) 66 3.5.3 Linear Induction Machines 67 3.6 Summary 67 References 68 4 Grid-Scale Energy Storage 69 4.1 Requirement of Energy Storage 69 4.2 Types of Energy Storage Technologies 69 4.3 Electromechanical Storage 70 4.3.1 Pumped Hydro Storage (PHS) System 70 4.3.2 Underground Pumped Hydro Energy Storage 71 4.3.3 Compressed Air Energy Storage 72 4.3.4 Flywheel Storage 73 4.3.4.1 Energy Stored in Flywheel 74 4.3.4.2 Motors for Flywheels 74 4.4 Superconducting Magnetic Energy Storage 75 4.5 Supercapacitors 76 4.5.1 Equivalent Circuit 79 4.6 Chemical Storage (Batteries) 79 4.6.1 Lead–acid Battery 80 4.6.2 UltraBattery 82 4.6.3 Lithium-ion Battery 84 4.6.4 Liquid metal battery 86 4.6.5 Flow Battery 86 4.6.6 Nickle-Based Battery 87 4.7 Thermal Storage 88 4.7.1 Sensible Heat Storage 89 4.7.2 Latent Heat Storage 90 4.7.3 Thermochemical Energy Storage (TES) 91 4.8 Hydrogen Energy Storage Technology 91 4.9 Summary 92 References 93 5 Solar Energy Systems 95 5.1 Sun as Source of Energy 95 5.2 Solar Radiations on Earth 95 5.2.1 Spectral Distribution of Solar Energy 96 5.3 Measurement of Solar Radiation 97 5.3.1 Pyrheliometer 97 5.3.2 Pyranometer 99 5.3.3 Sources of Errors in RadiationMeters 100 5.3.4 Sunshine Recorder 100 5.4 Solar Radiation on Different Surfaces 101 5.4.1 Zenith and Zenith Angle 101 5.4.2 Solar Time 102 5.4.3 Latitude (∅) 102 5.4.4 Declination Angle (;;) 102 5.4.5 Hour Angle (;;) 102 5.4.6 Surface Azimuth Angle (Y) 103 5.4.7 Tilt Angle (;;) 103 5.4.8 Angle of Incidence 103 5.4.9 Solar Radiation on an Inclined Surface 104 5.5 Utilization of Solar Energy 104 5.6 Solar Thermal Systems 105 5.6.1 Flat-Plate Collectors 106 5.6.1.1 Thermal Performance of Collector 108 5.6.2 Evacuated Tube Collector 108 5.6.2.1 Direct-Flow Evacuated Tube Collector 109 5.6.2.2 Heat-Pipe Evacuated Tube Collector 109 5.6.3 Parabolic Collectors 111 5.6.4 Linear Fresnel Reflector (LFR) 112 5.6.5 Parabolic Trough Collector (PTC) 113 5.6.6 Cylindrical Trough Collector (CTC) 114 5.6.7 Parabolic Dish Reflector 115 5.6.8 Heliostat Field Collector (HFC) 116 5.7 Application of Solar Energy 117 5.7.1 SolarWater Heating 117 5.7.2 Passive Systems with Thermosiphon Circulation 117 5.7.3 Integrated Collector Storage Systems (Passive) 119 5.7.4 Active Solar Systems 119 5.7.4.1 Direct Circulation Systems 119 5.7.4.2 Indirect Circulation (Closed-Loop) Systems 120 5.7.5 Air Heating Systems 120 5.8 Solar Thermal Power Generation 122 5.9 Desalination ofWater 122 5.10 Steam Pressurization Systems Using Heat Energy 123 5.11 Summary 124 References 124 6 Photovoltaic Systems 125 6.1 PV Solar Cells and Solar Module 125 6.1.1 Semiconductor Technology 126 6.2 Solar Cell Characteristics 127 6.2.1 Equivalent Circuit 129 6.2.2 Solar PV Module 129 6.2.3 Series and Parallel Connections of Cells 129 6.2.4 Solar PV Panel 131 6.2.5 PV Array 132 6.2.5.1 Design of PV System 132 6.3 Maximizing Power Output of PV Array 133 6.3.1 Solar Tracking 134 6.3.2 Design of Simple Automatic Solar Tracker 134 6.3.3 Load Matching for Optimal Operation 135 6.4 Maximum Power Point Tracking Algorithm 135 6.4.1 Constant-VoltageMethod 136 6.4.2 Hill-Climbing/Perturb and Observe Techniques 136 6.4.2.1 Perturb and Observe 137 6.4.3 Incremental Conductance (IC) 137 6.5 Types of Solar Cells and Technologies 138 6.5.1 Crystalline Solar Cells 138 6.5.1.1 Monocrystalline Solar Cells 139 6.5.1.2 Polycrystalline Silicon Cells 140 6.6 Thin-Film Solar Cells 140 6.6.1 Amorphous Silicon Solar Cells (a-Si) 141 6.6.2 Cadmium Telluride (CdTe) 142 6.6.3 Copper Indium Gallium Diselenide (CIGS) 143 6.6.4 Copper Indium Selenide (CIS) 143 6.6.5 Crystalline Silicon (c-si)Thin-Film Solar Cells 144 6.7 Concentrating Photovoltaic Systems 144 6.8 New Emerging Technologies 144 6.9 Solar PV Systems 146 6.9.1 Grid-Connected PV System 147 6.9.2 Grid-Connected System without Battery Storage 147 6.9.3 Grid-Connected System with Battery Storage 148 6.10 Design and Control of Stand-Alone PV System 148 6.10.1 Battery Rating 149 6.11 Summary 150 References 150 7 Wind Energy 153 7.1 Wind as Source of Energy 153 7.1.1 Origin ofWind 153 7.1.2 Wind Power Potential 154 7.2 Power and Energy inWind 155 7.3 Aerodynamics ofWind Turbines 156 7.3.1 Momentum 157 7.4 Types ofWind Turbines 160 7.4.1 Horizontal-AxisWind Turbines 160 7.4.1.1 Horizontal-AxisWind Turbines withWake Rotation 161 7.4.2 Vertical-AxisWind Turbines 164 7.4.3 Main Components ofWind Turbine 166 7.4.3.1 Drive Train 167 7.5 Dynamics and Control ofWind Turbines 167 7.5.1 Pitch Control 168 7.5.2 Yaw Control 169 7.5.3 Passive and Active Stall Power Control 169 7.5.3.1 Passive Stall Control 169 7.5.3.2 Active Stall Control 169 7.6 Wind Turbine ConditionMonitoring 170 7.7 Wind Energy Conversion Systems (WECS) 171 7.7.1 Based on Capacity of Power Generation 171 7.7.2 Systems without Power Electronics 171 7.8 OffshoreWind Energy 174 7.8.1 OffshoreWind Turbines 174 7.8.2 Foundation 174 7.8.3 Electrical Connection and Installation 174 7.8.4 Operation and Maintenance 175 7.9 Advantages of OffshoreWind Energy Systems 175 7.10 Environmental Impact ofWind Energy Systems 175 7.10.1 Impact of Noise 175 7.10.2 Electromagnetic Interference 176 7.11 Combining theWind Power Generation System with Energy Storage 176 7.12 Summary 176 References 176 8 Biomass Energy Systems 179 8.1 Biomass Energy 179 8.2 Biomass Production 181 8.2.1 Forest Industries 182 8.2.2 Forest Residues 182 8.2.2.1 ForestThinnings 183 8.2.3 Agriculture Residues 183 8.2.4 Energy Crops 183 8.2.5 Food and IndustrialWastes 184 8.3 Biomass Conversion Process 185 8.4 Thermochemical Conversion 185 8.4.1 Combustion 185 8.4.2 Gasification 186 8.4.2.1 Applications 190 8.4.3 Pyrolysis 190 8.4.3.1 Torrefaction 193 8.4.4 Liquefaction 194 8.5 Biochemical/Biological Conversion 194 8.5.1 Fermentation 195 8.5.2 Anaerobic Digestion 196 8.5.3 Anaerobic Digestion Technologies Suitable for Dairy Manure 198 8.6 Classification of Biogas Plants 199 8.7 Mechanical Extraction (with Esterification) 200 8.8 Municipal SolidWaste to Energy Conversion 201 8.9 The Production of Electricity fromWood and Other Solid Biomass 203 8.10 Summary 205 References 205 9 Geothermal Energy 207 9.1 The Origin of Geothermal Energy 207 9.2 Types of Geothermal Resources 208 9.3 Hydrothermal Resources 210 9.3.1 Vapour-Dominated Systems 211 9.3.2 Water-Dominated Systems 212 9.4 The Geopressured Resources 213 9.5 Hard Rock Resources 214 9.5.1 Solidified (Hot Dry Rock Resources) 214 9.5.2 Part Still Molten (Magma) 214 9.6 Energy Contents of Geothermal Resources 215 9.6.1 Hard Dry Rock Resources 215 9.7 Exploration of Geothermal Resources 216 9.8 Geophysical Methods in Geothermal Exploration 217 9.8.1 Thermal Methods 217 9.8.2 Electrical Methods 217 9.8.3 MagneticMeasurements 218 9.9 Geochemical Techniques 219 9.9.1 Water or Solute Geothermometers 219 9.9.1.1 Na-K Geothermometer 219 9.9.1.2 Na-K-Ca Geothermometer 220 9.9.2 Gas Thermometers 220 9.9.3 Isotopes 220 9.9.4 Drilling 220 9.10 Utilization of Geothermal Resource 221 9.10.1 Electricity Generation from Geothermal Resources 222 9.10.2 Dry Steam Power Plants 222 9.10.3 Single-Flash Steam Power Plant 223 9.10.4 Double-Flash Power Plant 225 9.10.5 Binary Cycle Power Plant 226 9.11 Enhanced Geothermal Systems 227 9.11.1 Combined or Hybrid Plants 227 9.11.2 Combined Heat and Power (CHP) Plants 227 9.12 Direct Use of Geothermal Energy 228 9.13 Environmental Impact 230 9.14 Summary 231 References 231 10 Ocean Energy 233 10.1 Energy from Ocean 233 10.2 Harnessing the Tidal Energy 235 10.2.1 Tidal Barrage Power 236 10.2.2 Tidal Barrage Technologies 236 10.2.3 Tidal Stream Power 237 10.2.4 Dynamic Tidal Power Generation 238 10.3 Energy of Tides 238 10.4 Turbine Technologies 240 10.4.1 Horizontal-Axis Turbines 240 10.4.2 Vertical-Axis Turbines 241 10.4.3 Reciprocating Hydrofoils 242 10.5 Support Structure 242 10.5.1 Gravity Structures 242 10.5.2 Piled Structures 242 10.5.3 Floating Foundations 243 10.6 Wave Energy 243 10.6.1 Wave Energy and Power 243 10.7 Wave Energy Converters 245 10.7.1 OscillatingWater Column 245 10.7.2 Oscillating Body 246 10.7.3 Overtopping Converters (or Terminators) 246 10.7.4 Point Absorbers and Attenuators 247 10.8 Power Takeoff Systems 248 10.8.1 Air Turbines for OWC 249 10.8.2 Hydraulic Systems 249 10.8.3 Water Turbines 250 10.8.4 Direct Drive 250 10.9 Piezoelectric Generators 252 10.9.1 Power Extraction Systems 253 10.10 OceanThermal Energy Conversion 254 10.10.1 Technology for OTEC 254 10.10.1.1 Closed-Cycle 255 10.10.1.2 Open-Cycle 256 10.10.1.3 Hybrid Systems 257 10.11 Summary 258 References 258 11 Fuel Cells 261 11.1 Fuel Cell Technologies 261 11.2 Types of Fuel Cells 262 11.3 Proton Exchange Membrane (PEM) Fuel Cell 262 11.3.1 Water Management 263 11.3.2 Fuel Requirement 265 11.3.3 Reforming Technologies 265 11.3.3.1 Partial Oxidation 266 11.3.4 Hydrogen Storage 266 11.3.5 Catalysts for PEM Fuel Cell 267 11.4 Solid Oxide Fuel Cell 267 11.4.1 Electrolytes for SOFC 268 11.5 Molten Carbonate Fuel Cell 269 11.6 Phosphoric Acid Fuel Cell 270 11.7 Alkaline Fuel Cell 272 11.8 Direct Methanol Fuel Cell 274 11.8.1 CO Removal 276 11.9 Fuel Cell Stacks 276 11.9.1 Cooling with Separate Airflow 277 11.9.2 Liquid Cooling 277 11.10 Fuel Cell Applications 278 11.10.1 Application in Automobile Industry 278 11.10.2 Stationary Power Applications 278 11.10.3 Portable Applications 279 11.11 Modelling of Fuel Cell 280 11.11.1 Steady-StateModel 280 11.12 Summary 281 References 281 12 Small Hydropower Plant 283 12.1 Hydropower 283 12.2 Classification of Hydropower Plants 284 12.2.1 Basics of Hydropower Generation 285 12.3 Resource Assessment 285 12.3.1 Velocity Area Method 286 12.3.2 Float Method 287 12.4 System Components 288 12.4.1 DiversionWeir 288 12.4.1.1 Side Intake withoutWeir 288 12.4.1.2 Side Intake withWeir 288 12.4.1.3 Bottom Intake 288 12.4.2 Water Conductor System or Channels 289 12.4.3 Forebay Tank 289 12.4.4 Penstock 289 12.4.5 Spillways 289 12.5 Turbines 290 12.6 Impulse Turbines 290 12.6.1 Pelton Turbine 291 12.6.2 Cross-Flow Turbine 292 12.6.3 Turgo Turbine 293 12.7 Reaction Turbine 294 12.7.1 The Propeller Turbine 295 12.7.2 Reverse Pump Turbines 295 12.8 Generators for Small Hydro Plants 296 12.9 Design Considerations of Micro-Hydropower Plants 297 12.9.1 Example 299 References 299 13 Control of Grid-Connected Photovoltaic and Wind Energy Systems 301 13.1 Introduction 301 13.2 Operation and Control of Grid-Connected PV System 302 13.2.1 Control of Single-Phase PV System 302 13.2.1.1 Control of PV-Side dc/dc Converter 303 13.2.1.2 Control of Grid-Side Inverter 304 13.2.1.3 Inner Current Loop 305 13.3 Grid Synchronization 305 13.4 Control of Three-Phase Grid-Connected PV system 306 13.5 Selection of Inverter for PV System 307 13.5.1 Central Inverters 307 13.5.2 String Inverter 308 13.5.3 ac Module Inverter 309 13.5.4 Multi-String Inverters 310 13.6 Power Decoupling 311 13.7 Isolation Between Input and Output 311 13.8 Transformers and Interconnections 311 13.8.1 Transformerless PV Inverter Topologies 312 13.9 Filters for Grid-Connected PV Inverters 314 13.10 Islanding DetectionMethods 314 13.11 Operation and Control of Grid-ConnectedWind Energy System 315 13.11.1 Grid Integration ofWind Turbine System 316 13.11.2 Power Electronics inWind Energy System 317 13.11.3 Control of Doubly Fed Induction Generator–BasedWind Turbine Systems 318 13.11.3.1 Control of a DFIG under Unbalanced Grid 319 13.11.4 PMSG-BasedWind Energy Conversion System 320 13.11.4.1 Current-Source-Based PMSG 321 13.12 Summary 322 References 322 14 Renewable Energy Sources Integration in Microgrid 325 14.1 Microgrid 325 14.2 Types of Microgrids 327 14.3 dc Microgrid 327 14.3.1 Control Methods for dc Grid System 329 14.3.2 Energy Storage System 330 14.3.3 Operational Modes of dc Microgrid 330 14.3.3.1 Mode 1: IslandingMode (Battery Discharge) 330 14.3.3.2 Mode 2: IslandingMode (Excess Power Available) 331 14.3.3.3 Mode 3: Grid-Connected Mode (Power Taken from Grid) 331 14.3.3.4 Mode 4: Grid-Connected Mode (Power Supplied to Grid) 332 14.3.4 Application of dc Microgrids 332 14.4 ac Microgrid 332 14.4.1 Interconnected or Grid-Connected Mode 333 14.4.2 Islanded Mode 334 14.5 Control of ac Microgrid in Grid-Connected Mode 334 14.5.1 Primary Control 337 14.5.2 Secondary Control 337 14.5.3 Tertiary Control 338 14.6 Autonomous Operation of Microgrid 338 14.6.1 Islanding Detection 339 14.6.1.1 ImpedanceMeasurement Method 340 14.6.1.2 Slip-Mode Frequency Shift (SMS) Method 340 14.6.1.3 Active Frequency Drift Method 340 14.6.1.4 Sandia Frequency Shift (SFS) 341 14.6.2 Stability Issues 342 14.7 Load Frequency Control in Microgrid 342 14.7.1 Secondary Load-Frequency Control 343 14.8 Combined ac/dc Microgrid 343 14.8.1 Operation and Control of Hybrid ac/dc Grid 344 14.8.2 Modelling 345 14.9 Summary 345 References 345 Index 347
£87.26
John Wiley & Sons Inc Power System Control Under Cascading Failures
Book SynopsisOffers a comprehensive introduction to the issues of control of power systems during cascading outages and restoration process Power System Control Under Cascading Failures offers comprehensive coverage of three major topics related to prevention of cascading power outages in a power transmission grid: modelling and analysis, system separation and power system restoration. The book examines modelling and analysis of cascading failures for reliable and efficient simulation and better understanding of important mechanisms, root causes and propagation patterns of failures and power outages. Second, it covers controlled system separation to mitigate cascading failures addressing key questions such as where, when and how to separate. Third, the text explores optimal system restoration from cascading power outages and blackouts by well-designed milestones, optimised procedures and emerging techniques. The authors noted experts in the field include state-of-thTable of ContentsAbout the Companion Website xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Importance of Modeling and Understanding Cascading Failures 1 1.1.1 Cascading Failures 1 1.1.2 Challenges in Modeling and Understanding Cascading Failures 4 1.2 Importance of Controlled System Separation 6 1.2.1 Mitigation of Cascading Failures 6 1.2.2 Uncontrolled and Controlled System Separations 7 1.3 Constructing Restoration Strategies 9 1.3.1 Importance of System Restoration 9 1.3.2 Classification of System Restoration Strategies 10 1.3.3 Challenges of System Restoration 13 1.4 Overview of the Book 15 References 18 2 Modeling of Cascading Failures 23 2.1 General Cascading Failure Models 23 2.1.1 Bak–Tang–Wiesenfeld Sandpile Model 23 2.1.2 Failure‐Tolerance Sandpile Model 24 2.1.3 Motter–Lai Model 30 2.1.4 Influence Model 30 2.1.5 Binary‐Decision Model 33 2.1.6 Coupled Map Lattice Model 34 2.1.7 CASCADE Model 35 2.1.8 Interdependent Failure Model 37 2.2 Power System Cascading Failure Models 39 2.2.1 Hidden Failure Model 39 2.2.2 Manchester Model 40 2.2.3 OPA Model 42 2.2.4 Improved OPA Model 46 2.2.5 OPA Model with Slow Process 49 2.2.6 AC OPA Model 58 2.2.7 Cascading Failure Models Considering Dynamics and Detailed Protections 62 References 64 3 Understanding Cascading Failures 69 3.1 Self‐ Organized Criticality 70 3.1.1 SOC Theory 70 3.1.2 Evidence of SOC in Blackout Data 71 3.2 Branching Processes 72 3.2.1 Definition of the Galton–Watson Branching Process 74 3.2.2 Estimation of Mean of the Offspring Distribution 74 3.2.3 Estimation of Variance of the Offspring Distribution 75 3.2.4 Processing and Discretization of Continuous Data 78 3.2.5 Estimation of Distribution of Total Outages 81 3.2.6 Statistical Insight of Branching Process Parameters 81 3.2.7 Branching Processes Applied to Line Outage Data 82 3.2.8 Branching Processes Applied to Load Shed Data 84 3.2.9 Cross‐Validation for Branching Processes 85 3.2.10 Efficiency Improvement by Branching Processes 85 3.3 Multitype Branching Processes 87 3.3.1 Estimation of Multitype Branching Process Parameters 88 3.3.2 Estimation of Joint Probability Distribution of Total Outages 90 3.3.3 An Example for a Two‐Type Branching Process 91 3.3.4 Validation of Estimated Joint Distribution 92 3.3.5 Number of Cascades Needed for Multitype Branching Processes 94 3.3.6 Estimated Parameters of Branching Processes 96 3.3.7 Estimated Joint Distribution of Total Outages 98 3.3.8 Cross‐Validation for Multitype Branching Processes 100 3.3.9 Predicting Joint Distribution from One Type of Outage 102 3.3.10 Estimating Failure Propagation of Three Types of Outages 104 3.4 Failure Interaction Analysis 105 3.4.1 Estimation of Interactions between Component Failures 106 3.4.2 Identification of Key Links and Key Components 108 3.4.3 Interaction Model 111 3.4.4 Validation of Interaction Model 113 3.4.5 Number of Cascades Needed for Failure Interaction Analysis 115 3.4.6 Estimated Interaction Matrix and Interaction Network 119 3.4.7 Identified Key Links and Key Components 121 3.4.8 Interaction Model Validation 125 3.4.9 Cascading Failure Mitigation 129 3.4.10 Efficiency Improvement by Interaction Model 134 References 137 4 Strategies for Controlled System Separation 141 4.1 Questions to Answer 141 4.2 Literature Review 142 4.3 Constraints on Separation Points 144 4.4 Graph Models of a Power Network 148 4.4.1 Undirected Node‐Weighted Graph 149 4.4.2 Directed Edge‐Weighted Graph 152 4.5 Generator Grouping 153 4.5.1 Slow Coherency Analysis 154 4.5.2 Elementary Coherent Groups 158 4.6 Finding Separation Points 160 4.6.1 Formulations of the Problem 160 4.6.2 Computational Complexity 164 4.6.3 Network Reduction 167 4.6.4 Network Decomposition for Parallel Processing 173 4.6.5 Application of the Ordered Binary Decision Diagram 175 4.6.6 Checking the Transmission Capacity and Small Disruption Constraints 185 4.6.7 Checking All Constraints in Three Steps 190 References 192 5 Online Decision Support for Controlled System Separation 197 5.1 Online Decision on the Separation Strategy 197 5.1.1 Spectral Analysis-Based Method 198 5.1.2 Frequency‐Amplitude Characteristics of Electromechanical Oscillation 199 5.1.3 Phase‐Locked Loop-Based Method 204 5.1.4 Timing of Controlled Separation 210 5.2 WAMS‐ Based Unified Framework for Controlled System Separation 212 5.2.1 WAMS‐Based Three‐Stage CSS Scheme 212 5.2.2 Offline Analysis Stage 214 5.2.3 Online Monitoring Stage 216 5.2.4 Real‐Time Control Stage 221 References 223 6 Constraints of System Restoration 225 6.1 Physical Constraints During Restoration 225 6.1.1 Generating Unit Start‐Up 225 6.1.2 System Sectionalizing and Reconfiguration 230 6.1.3 Load Restoration 233 6.2 Electromagnetic Transients During System Restoration 235 6.2.1 Generator Self‐Excitation 237 6.2.2 Switching Overvoltage 237 6.2.3 Resonant Overvoltage in the Case of Energizing No‐Load Transformer 242 6.2.4 Impact of Magnetizing Inrush Current on Transformer 245 6.2.5 Voltage and Frequency Analysis in Picking up Load 247 References 251 7 Restoration Methodology and Implementation Algorithms 255 7.1 Algorithms for Generating Unit Start‐Up 255 7.1.1 A General Bilevel Framework 255 7.1.2 Algorithms for the Primary Problem 260 7.1.3 Algorithms for the Second Problem 265 7.2 Algorithms for Load Restoration 269 7.2.1 Estimate Operational Region Bound 271 7.2.2 Formulate MINLR Model to Maximize Load Pickup 272 7.2.3 Branch‐and‐Cut Solver: Design and Justification 275 7.2.4 Selection of Branching Methods 278 7.3 Case Studies 278 7.3.1 Illustrative Example for Restoring Generating Units 278 7.3.2 Optimal Load Restoration Strategies for RTS 24‐Bus System 283 7.3.3 Optimal Load Restoration Strategies for IEEE 118‐Bus System 287 References 291 8 Renewable and Energy Storage in System Restoration 295 8.1 Planning of Renewable Generators in System Restoration 295 8.1.1 Renewables for System Restoration 295 8.1.2 The Offline Restoration Tool Using Renewable Energy Resources 296 8.1.3 System Restoration with Renewables’ Participation 298 8.2 Operation and Control of Renewable Generators in System Restoration 305 8.2.1 Prerequisites of Type 3 WTs for System Restoration 307 8.2.2 Problem Setup of Type 3 WTs for System Restoration 308 8.2.3 Black‐Starting Control and Sequence of Type 3 WTs 314 8.2.4 Autonomous Frequency Mechanism of a Type 3 WT-Based Stand‐Alone System 317 8.2.5 Simulation Study 320 8.3 Energy Storage in System Restoration 323 8.3.1 Pumped‐Storage Hydro Units in Restoration 323 8.3.2 Batteries for System Restoration 332 8.3.3 Electric Vehicles in System Restoration 340 References 351 9 Emerging Technologies in System Restoration 357 9.1 Applications of FACTS and HVDC 357 9.1.1 LCC‐HVDC Technology for System Restoration 357 9.1.2 VSC‐HVDC Technology for System Restoration 363 9.1.3 FACTS Technology for System Restoration 370 9.2 Applications of PMUs 376 9.2.1 Review of PMU 376 9.2.2 System Restoration with PMU Measurements 378 9.3 Microgrid in System Restoration 385 9.3.1 Microgrid‐Based Restoration 385 9.3.2 Demonstration and Practice 388 References 393 10 Black-Start Capability Assessment and Optimization 399 10.1 Background of Black Start 399 10.1.1 Definition of Black Start 399 10.1.2 Constraints During BS 400 10.1.3 BS Service Procurement 401 10.1.4 Power System Restoration Procedure 403 10.2 BS Capability Assessment 404 10.2.1 Installation Criteria of New BS Generators 404 10.2.2 Optimal Installation Strategy of BS Capability 407 10.2.3 Examples 408 10.3 Optimal BS Capability 411 10.3.1 Problem Formulation 411 10.3.2 Solution Algorithm 418 10.3.3 Examples 421 References 431 Index 433
£114.26
John Wiley & Sons Inc Introduction to Flat Panel Displays
Book SynopsisTHE PERFECT GUIDE TO FLAT PANEL DISPLAYS FOR RESEARCHERS AND INDUSTRY PERSONNEL ALIKE Introduction to Flat Panel Displays, 2nd Edition is the leading introductory reference to state-of-the-art flat panel display technologies. The 2nd edition has been newly updated to include the latest developments for high pixel resolution support, high brightness, improved contrast settings, and low power consumption. The 2nd edition has also been updated to include the latest developments of head-mounted displays for virtual and augmented reality applications. Introduction to Flat Panel Displays introduces and updates both the fundamental physics and materials concepts underlying flat panel display technology and their application to smart phones, ultra-high definitions TVs, computers, and virtual and augmented reality systems. The book includes new information on quantum-dot enhanced LCDs, device configurations and performance, and nTable of ContentsSeries Editor’s Foreword xiii 1 Flat Panel Displays 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Emissive and non-emissive Displays 4 1.3 Display Specifications 4 1.3.1 Physical Parameters 5 1.3.2 Brightness and Color 7 1.3.3 Contrast Ratio 8 1.3.4 Spatial and Temporal Characteristics 8 1.3.5 Efficiency and Power Consumption 9 1.3.6 Flexible Displays 9 1.4 Applications of Flat Panel Displays 9 1.4.1 Liquid Crystal Displays 10 1.4.2 Light-Emitting Diodes 10 1.4.3 Organic Light-Emitting Devices 11 1.4.4 Reflective Displays 11 1.4.5 Head-Mounted Displays 12 1.4.6 Touch Panel Technologies 12 References 13 2 Color Science and Engineering 15 2.1 Introduction 15 2.2 Photometry 16 2.3 The Eye 18 2.4 Colorimetry 22 2.4.1 Trichromatic Space 22 2.4.2 CIE 1931 Colormetric Observer 24 2.4.3 CIE 1976 Uniform Color System 27 2.4.4 CIECAM 02 Color Appearance Model 30 2.4.5 Color Gamut 31 2.4.6 Light Sources 32 2.4.6.1 Sunlight and Blackbody Radiators 32 2.4.6.2 Light Sources for Transmissive, Reflective, and Projection Displays 33 2.4.6.3 Color Rendering Index 34 2.5 Production and Reproduction of Colors 34 2.6 Display Measurements 35 Homework Problems 36 References 36 3 Thin Film Transistors 39 3.1 Introduction 39 3.2 Basic Concepts of Crystalline Semiconductor Materials 39 3.2.1 Band Structure of Crystalline Semiconductors 40 3.2.2 Intrinsic and Extrinsic Semiconductors 43 3.3 Classification of Silicon Materials 46 3.4 Hydrogenated Amorphous Silicon (a-Si:H) 46 3.4.1 Electronic Structure of a:Si-H 47 3.4.2 Carrier Transport in a-Si:H 48 3.4.3 Fabrication of a-Si:H 48 3.5 Polycrystalline Silicon 49 3.5.1 Carrier Transport in Polycrystalline Silicon 49 3.5.2 Fabrication of Polycrystalline-Silicon 50 3.6 Thin-Film Transistors 52 3.6.1 Fundamentals of TFTs 52 3.6.2 a-Si:H TFTs 55 3.6.3 Poly-Si TFTs 55 3.6.4 Organic TFTs 56 3.6.5 Oxide Semiconductor TFTs 57 3.6.6 Flexible TFT Technology 59 3.7 PM and AM Driving Schemes 61 Homework Problems 67 References 67 4 Liquid Crystal Displays 71 4.1 Introduction 71 4.2 Transmissive LCDs 72 4.3 Liquid Crystal Materials 74 4.3.1 Phase Transition Temperatures 75 4.3.2 Eutectic Mixtures 75 4.3.3 Dielectric Constants 77 4.3.4 Elastic Constants 78 4.3.5 Rotational Viscosity 79 4.3.6 Optical Properties 80 4.3.7 Refractive Indices 80 4.3.7.1 Wavelength Effect 80 4.3.7.2 Temperature Effect 82 4.4 Liquid Crystal Alignment 83 4.5 Homogeneous Cell 84 4.5.1 Phase Retardation Effect 85 4.5.2 Voltage Dependent Transmittance 86 4.6 Twisted Nematic (TN) 87 4.6.1 Optical Transmittance 87 4.6.2 Viewing Angle 89 4.6.3 Film-Compensated TN 90 4.7 In-Plane Switching (IPS) 91 4.7.1 Device Structure 92 4.7.2 Voltage-Dependent Transmittance 92 4.7.3 Viewing Angle 92 4.7.4 Phase Compensation Films 93 4.8 Fringe Field Switching (FFS) 95 4.8.1 Device Configurations 95 4.8.2 n-FFS versus p-FFS 96 4.9 Vertical Alignment (VA) 98 4.9.1 Voltage-Dependent Transmittance 98 4.9.2 Response Time 99 4.9.3 Overdrive and Undershoot Addressing 101 4.9.4 Multi-domain Vertical Alignment (MVA) 102 4.10 Ambient Contrast Ratio 103 4.10.1 Modeling of Ambient Contrast Ratio 103 4.10.2 Ambient Contrast Ratio of LCD 103 4.10.3 Ambient Contrast Ratio of OLED 104 4.10.4 Simulated ACR for Mobile Displays 105 4.10.5 Simulated ACR for TVs 105 4.10.6 Simulated Ambient Isocontrast Contour 106 4.10.6.1 Mobile Displays 106 4.10.6.2 Large-Sized TVs 108 4.10.7 Improving LCD’s ACR 109 4.10.8 Improving OLED’s ACR 110 4.11 Motion Picture Response Time (MPRT) 112 4.12 Wide Color Gamut 114 4.12.1 Material Synthesis and Characterizations 115 4.12.2 Device Configurations 116 4.13 High Dynamic Range 118 4.13.1 Mini-LED Backlit LCDs 118 4.13.2 Dual-Panel LCDs 120 4.14 Future Directions 121 Homework Problems 123 References 124 5 Light-Emitting Diodes 135 5.1 Introduction 135 5.2 Material Systems 138 5.2.1 AlGaAs and AlGaInP Material Systems for Red and Yellow LEDs 140 5.2.2 GaN-Based Systems for Green, Blue, UV and UV LEDs 141 5.2.3 White LEDs 143 5.3 Diode Characteristics 146 5.3.1 p- and n-Layer 147 5.3.2 Depletion Region 148 5.3.3 J–V Characteristics 150 5.3.4 Heterojunction Structures 152 5.3.5 Quantum-Well, -Wire, and -Dot Structures 152 5.4 Light-Emitting Characteristics 154 5.4.1 Recombination Model 154 5.4.2 L-J Characteristics 155 5.4.3 Spectral Characteristics 156 5.4.4 Efficiency Droop 159 5.5 Device Fabrication 160 5.5.1 Epitaxy 161 5.5.2 Process Flow and Device Structure Design 165 5.5.3 Extraction Efficiency Improvement 166 5.5.4 Packaging 168 5.6 Applications 169 5.6.1 Traffic Signals, Electronic Signage and Huge Displays 169 5.6.2 LCD Backlight 170 5.6.3 General Lighting 172 5.6.4 Micro-LEDs 173 Homework Problems 175 References 175 6 Organic Light-Emitting Devices 179 6.1 Introduction 179 6.2 Energy States in Organic Materials 180 6.3 Photophysical Processes 182 6.3.1 Franck–Condon Principle 182 6.3.2 Fluorescence and Phosphorescence 183 6.3.3 Jablonski Diagram 185 6.3.4 Intermolecular Processes 186 6.3.4.1 Energy Transfer Processes 186 6.3.4.2 Excimer and Exciplex Formation 188 6.3.4.3 Quenching Processes 188 6.3.5 Quantum Yield Calculation 189 6.4 Carrier Injection, Transport, and Recombination 191 6.4.1 Richardson–Schottky Thermionic Emission 192 6.4.2 SCLC, TCLC, and P–F Mobility 193 6.4.3 Charge Recombination 195 6.4.4 Electromagnetic Wave Radiation 195 6.5 Structure, Fabrication and Characterization 197 6.5.1 Device Structure of Organic Light-Emitting Device 198 6.5.1.1 Two-Layer Organic Light-Emitting Device 198 6.5.1.2 Matrix Doping in the EML 200 6.5.1.3 HIL, EIL, and p-i-n Structure 202 6.5.1.4 Top-Emission and Transparent OLEDs 204 6.5.2 Polymer OLED 205 6.5.3 Device Fabrication 206 6.5.3.1 Thin-film Formation 207 6.5.3.2 Encapsulation and Passivation 210 6.5.3.3 Device Structures for AM Driving 211 6.5.4 Electrical and Optical Characteristics 212 6.5.5 Degradation Mechanisms 214 6.6 Triplet Exciton Utilization 219 6.6.1 Phosphorescent OLEDs 219 6.6.2 Triplet-Triplet Annihilation OLED 221 6.6.3 Thermally Activated Delayed Fluorescence 222 6.6.4 Exciplex-Based OLED 223 6.7 Tandem Structure 224 6.8 Improvement of Extraction Efficiency 226 6.9 White OLEDs 229 6.10 Quantum-Dot Light-Emitting Diode 231 6.11 Applications 233 6.11.1 Mobile OLED Display 233 6.11.2 OLED TV 234 6.11.3 OLED Lighting 235 6.11.4 Flexible OLEDs 235 6.11.5 Novel Displays 236 Homework Problems 236 References 237 7 Reflective Displays 245 7.1 Introduction 245 7.2 Electrophoretic Displays 245 7.3 Reflective Liquid Crystal Displays 249 7.4 Reflective Display Based on Optical Interference (Mirasol Display) 253 7.5 Electrowetting Display 254 7.6 Comparison of Different Reflective Display Technologies 256 Homework Problems 256 References 257 8 Fundamentals of Head-Mounted Displays for Virtual and Augmented Reality 259 8.1 Introduction 259 8.2 Human Visual System 262 8.3 Fundamentals of Head-mounted Displays 265 8.3.1 Paraxial Optical Specifications 265 8.3.2 Microdisplay Sources 272 8.3.3 HMD Optics Principles and Architectures 275 8.3.4 Optical Combiner 280 8.4 HMD Optical Designs and Performance Specifications 286 8.4.1 HMD Optical Designs 286 8.4.2 HMD Optical Performance Specifications 290 8.5 Advanced HMD Technologies 298 8.5.1 Eyetracked and Fovea-Contingent HMDs 299 8.5.2 Dynamic Range Enhancement 302 8.5.3 Addressable Focus Cues in HMDs 305 8.5.3.1 Extended Depth of Field Displays 307 8.5.3.2 Vari-Focal Plane (VFP) Displays 308 8.5.3.3 Multi-Focal Plane (MFP) Displays 309 8.5.3.4 Head-Mounted Light Field (LF) Displays 315 8.5.4 Head-Mounted Light Field Displays 316 8.5.4.1 InI-Based Head-Mounted Light Field Displays 317 8.5.4.2 Computational Multi-Layer Head-Mounted Light Field Displays 321 8.5.5 Mutual Occlusion Capability 323 References 328 9 Touch Panel Technology 337 9.1 Introduction 337 9.2 Resistive Touch Panel 338 9.3 Capacitive Touch Panel 339 9.4 On-Cell and In-Cell Touch Panel 344 9.5 Optical Sensing for Large Panels 347 Homework Problems 348 References 348 Index 351
£81.65
John Wiley & Sons Inc Printable Solar Cells
Book SynopsisThis book provides an overall view of the new and highly promising materials and thin film deposition techniques for printable solar cell applications. The book is organized in four parts. Organic and inorganic hybrid materials and solar cell manufacturing techniques are covered in Part I.Table of ContentsPreface xv Part I Hybrid Materials and Process Technologies for Printable Solar Cells 1 Organic and Inorganic Hybrid Solar Cells 3 Serap Güneş and Niyazi Serdar Sariciftci 1.1 Introduction 4 1.2 Organic/Inorganic Hybrid Solar Cells 5 1.2.1 Introduction to Hybrid Solar Cells 5 1.2.2 Hybrid Solar Cells 5 1.2.2.1 Operational Principles of Bulk Heterojunction Hybrid Solar Cells 5 1.2.2.2 Bulk Heterojunction Hybrid Solar Cells 8 1.2.2.3 Bilayer Heterojunction Hybrid Solar Cells 12 1.2.2.4 Inverted-Type Hybrid Bulk Heterojunction Solar Cells 15 1.2.2.5 Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells 16 1.2.2.6 Perovskite Solar Cells 21 1.3 Conclusion 23 References 25 2 Solution Processing and Thin Film Formation of Hybrid Semiconductors for Energy Applications 37 J. Ciro, J.F. Montoya, R. Betancur and F. Jaramillo 2.1 Physical Chemical Principles of Film Formation by Solution Processes: From Suspensions of Nanoparticles and Solutions to Nucleation, Growth, Coarsening and Microstructural Evolution of Films 38 2.2 Solution-Processing Techniques for Thin Film Deposition 40 2.2.1 Spin Coating 42 2.2.2 Doctor Blade 43 2.2.3 Slot-Die Coating 44 2.2.4 Spray Coating 46 2.3 Properties and Characterization of Thin Films: Transport, Active and Electrode Layers in Thin Film Solar Cells 46 2.4 Understanding the Crystallization Processes in Hybrid Semiconductor Films: Hybrid Perovskite as a Model 50 2.4.1 Thermal Transitions Revealed by DSC 50 2.4.2 Heat Transfer Processes in a Meso-Superstructured Perovskite Solar Cell 53 2.4.3 Effect of the Annealing Process on Morphology and Crystalline Properties of Perovskite Films 55 2.4.4 Role of Precursor Composition in the Crystallinity of Perovskite Films: Understanding the Role of Additives and Moisture in the Final Properties of Perovskite Layers 56 References 57 3 Organic-Inorganic Hybrid Solar Cells Based on Quantum Dots 65 Wenjin Yue 3.1 Introduction 65 3.2 Polymer/QD Solar Cells 67 3.2.1 Working Principle 67 3.2.2 Device Parameters 68 3.2.2.1 Open-Circuit Voltage (Voc) 68 3.2.2.2 Short-Circuit Current (Jsc) 68 3.2.2.3 Fill Factor (FF) 69 3.2.3 Device Structure 70 3.2.4 Progress of Polymer/QD Solar Cells 71 3.2.4.1 Device Based on Cd Compound 71 3.2.4.2 Device Based on Pb Compound 74 3.2.4.3 Device Based on CuInS2 76 3.2.5 Strategy for Improved Device Performance 78 3.2.5.1 QDs Surface Treatment 78 3.2.5.2 In-Situ Synthesis of QDs 81 3.2.5.3 Polymer End-Group Functionalization 82 3.3 Outlooks and Conclusions 83 Acknowledgment 83 4 Hole Transporting Layers in Printable Solar Cells 93 David Curiel and Miriam Más-Montoya 4.1 Introduction 94 4.2 Hole Transporting Layers in Organic Solar Cells 97 4.2.1 Utility of Hole Transporting Layers 97 4.2.1.1 Energy Level Alignment at the Interfaces and Effect on the Open-Circuit Voltage 98 4.1.1.2 Definition of Device Polarity, Charge Transport and Use as Blocking Layer 102 4.1.1.3 Optical Spacer 103 4.1.1.4 Modulation of the Active Layer Morphology and Use as Protective Layer 103 4.1.2 Overview of Materials Used as Hole Transporting Layers 104 4.1.2.1 Polymers 104 4.1.2.2 Small Molecules 109 4.1.2.3 Metals 112 4.1.2.4 Metal Oxides 112 4.1.2.5 Metal Salts 116 4.1.2.6 Carbon Nanotubes 116 4.1.2.7 Graphene-Based Materials 116 4.1.2.8 Self-Assembled Monolayers 119 4.2 Hole Transporting Layers in Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells 121 4.2.1 Overview of Materials Used as Hole Transporting Layers 123 4.2.1.1 Small Molecules 123 4.2.1.2 Polymers 126 4.3 Hole Transporting Layers in Perovskite Solar Cells 127 4.3.1 Overview of Materials Used as Hole Transporting Layers 128 4.3.1.1 Small Molecules 128 4.3.1.2 Polymers 137 4.3.1.3 Metal Oxides 139 4.3.1.4 Metal Salts 140 4.3.1.5 Carbon Nanotubes 141 4.3.1.6 Graphene-Based Materials 142 4.4 Concluding Remarks 143 5 Printable Solar Cells 163 Alexander Kovalenko and Michal Hrabal 5.1 Introduction 164 5.2 Printable Solar Cells Working Principles 165 5.2.1 CIGS Solar Cells 165 5.2.2 Perovskite Solar Cells 167 5.2.3 Organic Solar Cells 170 5.2.4 Printable Charge-Carrier Selective Layers 172 5.3 Solution-Based Deposition of Thin Film Layers 173 5.3.1 Coating Techniques 174 5.3.1.1 Casting 174 5.3.1.2 Spin Coating 174 5.3.1.3 Blade Coating 176 5.3.1.4 Slot-Die Coating 177 5.3.2 Printing Techniques 179 5.3.2.1 Screen Printing 180 5.3.2.2 Gravure Printing 182 5.3.2.3 Flexographic Printing 184 5.3.2.4 Inkjet Printing 185 5.4 Characterization Techniques 189 5.4.1 Characterization of Thin Layers 189 5.4.2 Electrical Characterization of Solar Cells 190 5.5 Conclusion 194 References 197 Part II Organic Materials and Process Technologies for Printable Solar Cells 6 Spray-Coated Organic Solar Cells 205 Yifan Zheng and Junsheng Yu 6.1 Introduction 205 6.2 Introduction of Spray-Coating Method 206 6.2.1 History of Spray Coating 206 6.2.2 Spray-Coating Equipment 206 6.2.2.1 Airbrush Spray Deposition 206 6.2.2.2 Ultrasonic Spray Deposition 209 6.2.2.3 Electrospray Deposition 210 6.2.3 Spray-Coating Treatment 212 6.2.3.1 Thermal Annealing 213 6.2.3.2 Solvent Treatments 214 6.3 Materials for Spray Coating 216 6.3.1 Organic Materials 216 6.3.2 Metal Oxide and Nanoparticles 220 6.3.3 Perovskite 222 6.4 Application of Spray Coating 224 6.5 Conclusions 226 Acknowledgment 226 References 226 7 Interface Engineering: A Key Aspect for the Potential Commercialization of Printable Organic Photovoltaic Cells 235 Varun Vohra, Nur Tahirah Razali and Hideyuki Murata 7.1 Introduction 236 7.2 SD-PSCs Based on P3HT:PCBM Active Layers 240 7.2.1 Increase in Donor-Acceptor Interface through Nanostructuration of SD-PSCs 240 7.2.2 Generation of Vertical Concentration Gradient by Addition of Regiorandom P3HT in SD-PSCs 242 7.2.3 Generation of Vertical Concentration Gradient and Molecular Orientation by Rubbing P3HT in SD-PSCs 246 7.3 High Performance BHJ-PSCs with Favorable Molecular Orientation Resulting from Active Layer/Substrate Interactions 248 7.4 Strongly Bond Metal Leaves as Laminated Top Electrodes for Low-Cost PSC Fabrication 252 7.5 Conclusions 257 References 258 8 Structural, Optical, Electrical and Electronic Properties of PEDOT: PSS Thin Films and Their Application in Solar Cells 263 Sheng Hsiung Chang, Cheng-Chiang Chen, Hsin-Ming Cheng and Sheng-Hui Chen 8.1 Introduction 264 8.2 Chemical Structure of PEDOT:PSS 265 8.3 Optical and Electrical Characteristics of PEDOT:PSS 267 8.4 Electronic Characteristics of PEDOT:PSS 270 8.5 Highly Conductive PEDOT:PSS Thin Films 271 8.6 Hole-Transporting Materials: PEDOT:PSS Thin Films 273 8.6.1 Effect of PEDOT/PSS Ratio 274 8.6.2 Effect of Spin Rate 275 8.6.3 Effect of Thermal Annealing Temperature 277 8.6.4 Effects of Viscosity of PEDOT:PSS Solutions 278 8.7 Directions for Future Development 281 8.8 Conclusion 282 Reference 283 Part III Perovskites and Process Technologies for Printable Solar Cells 9 Organometal Trihalide Perovskite Absorbers: Optoelectronic Properties and Applications for Solar Cells 291 Timur Sh. Atabaev and Nguyen Hoa Hong 9.1 Introduction 291 9.2 Optical Properties of Organic-Inorganic Perovskite Materials 293 9.3 Charge Transport Properties 294 9.4 Electron Transporting Materials (ETM) 295 9.5 Hole-Transporting Materials (HTM) 295 9.6 Perovskite Solar Cells Architectures 296 9.7 Perovskite Deposition Methods 298 9.8 Photoexcited States 300 9.9 Hysteresis 300 9.10 Stability in Humid Environment 302 9.11 Stability Under UV Light Exposure 302 9.12 Stability at High Temperatures 303 9.13 Additives 304 9.14 Conclusions and Outlook 305 Acknowledgment 306 References 306 10 Organic-Inorganic Hybrid Perovskite Solar Cells with Scalable and Roll-to-Roll Compatible Printing/Coating Processes 313 Dechan Angmo, Mei Gao and Doojin Vak 10.1 Introduction 314 10.2 Optoelectronic Properties 316 10.3 History 317 10.4 Device Configurations 318 10.5 Functional Materials 321 10.5.1 The Organic-Inorganic Halide Perovskites 322 10.5.2 Electron-Selective Layer 324 10.5.3 Hole-Selective Layer 325 10.5.4 Transparent Electrode 325 10.5.5 Counter Electrode 326 10.6 Spin Coating 327 10.7 Roll-to-Roll Processing 331 10.8 Substrate Limitation 331 10.9 Printing and Coating Methods 333 10.9.1 Coating Methods 335 10.9.1.1 Slot-Die Coating 335 10.9.1.2 Spray Coating 339 10.9.1.3 Doctor Blade Coating 342 10.9.1.4 Knife Coating 344 10.9.1.5 Reverse Gravure Coating 345 10.9.2 Printing Methods 346 10.9.2.1 Gravure Printing 346 10.9.2.2 Flexographic Printing 347 10.9.2.3 Screen Printing 349 10.9.2.4 Inkjet Printing 350 10.10 Future Outlook 352 References 352 11 Inkjet Printable Processes for Dye-Sensitized and Perovskite Solar Cells and Modules Based on Advanced Nanocomposite Materials 363 Theodoros Makris, Argyroula Mourtzikou, Andreas Rapsomanikis and Elias Stathatos 11.1 Introduction 364 11.1.1 Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells 364 11.1.2 Perovskite Solar Cells 367 11.2 Inkjet Printing Process 369 11.2.1 Inkjet Printing in DSSC Technology 370 11.2.1.1 Inkjet Printing of Transition Metal Oxides 372 11.2.1.2 Inkjet Printing of Dyes on Semiconducting Oxides 373 11.2.1.3 Inkjet Printing of Ionic Liquid-Based Electrolytes 374 11.2.2 Inkjet Printing in Perovskite Solar Cell Technology 377 11.2.2.1 Inkjet Printing of Perovskite Material 378 11.3 Conclusions 379 References 379 Part IV Inorganic Materials and Process Technologies for Printable Solar Cells 383 12 Solution-Processed Kesterite Solar Cells 385 Fangyang Liu 12.1 Introduction 385 12.2 Fundamental Aspects of Kesterite Solar Cells 386 12.2.1 Crystal Structure 386 12.2.2 Phase Space and Secondary Phases 388 12.2.3 Optical and Electrical Properties 390 12.2.4 Device Architecture 391 12.3 Keterite Absorber Deposition Strategies 393 12.4 Electrodeposition 395 12.4.1 Stacked Elemental Layer (SEL) Electrodeposition 396 12.4.2 Metallic Alloy Co-electrodeposition 398 12.4.3 Chalcogenide Co-electrodeposition 399 12.5 Direct Solution Coating 400 12.5.1 Hydrazine Solution Coating 401 12.5.2 Particulate-Based Solution Coating 402 12.5.3 Molecular-Based Solution Coating 405 12.6 Conclusion 409 References 409 13 Inorganic Hole Contacts for Perovskite Solar Cells: Towards High-Performance Printable Solar Cells 423 Xingtian Yin and Wenxiu Que 13.1 Introduction 424 13.2 Transition Metal Oxides 426 13.2.1 Molybdenum Oxide (MoOx, x < 3) 426 13.2.2 Nickel Oxide (NiO) 428 13.2.2.1 Mesoscopic NiO Perovskite Solar Cells 428 13.2.2.2 Planar NiO Perovskite Solar Cells 429 13.2.3 Binary Copper Oxide (CuO and Cu2O) 439 13.2.4 Other Transition Metal Oxides 440 13.3 Non-Oxide Copper Compounds 440 13.3.1 Cuprous Iodide (CuI) 441 13.3.2 Cuprous Rhodanide (CuSCN) 441 13.3.3 Copper Sulfide (CuS) 442 13.3.4 CuAlO2 443 13.3.5 CuInS2 and Cu2ZnSnS4 444 13.4 Other Inorganic HTMs 444 13.4.1 PdS Quantum Dots (QDs) 444 13.4.2 Two-Dimensional (2D) Materials 445 13.5 Towards Printable Solar Cells 446 13.6 Conclusions and Perspectives 449 Acknowledgment 450 References 450 14 Electrode Materials for Printable Solar Cells 457 Lijun Hu, Ke Yang, Wei Chen, Falin Wu, Jiehao Fu, Wenbo Sun, Hongyan Huang, Baomin Zhao, Kuan Sun and Jianyong Ouyang 14.1 Introduction 458 14.2 Transparent Conjugated Polymers 459 14.2.1 Solvent Additive Method 460 14.2.2 Post-Treatment of PEDOT:PSS Films 461 14.2.3 Printing PEDOT:PSS Inks 463 14.3 Carbon-Based Nanomaterials 463 14.3.1 Graphene 466 14.3.2 Carbon Nanotubes 472 14.4 Metallic Nanostructures 476 14.4.1 Metal Nanomeshes 476 14.4.2 Metal Nanowire Networks 480 14.4.3 Ultrathin Metal Films 482 14.5 Multilayer Thin Films 486 14.6 Printable Metal Back Electrodes 491 14.7 Carbon-Based Back Electrodes 494 14.8 Summary and Outlook 497 Acknowledgment 498 References 498 15 Photonic Crystals for Photon Management in Solar Cells 513 Shuai Zhang, Zhongze Gu and Jian-Ning Ding 15.1 Introduction 513 15.2 Fundamentals of PCs 515 15.3 Fabrication Strategies of PCs for Photovoltaics 518 15.3.1 1D Multilayer PCs 519 15.3.2 2D PCs 524 15.3.3 3D PCs 527 15.4 Different Functionalities of PCs in Solar Cells 530 15.4.1 PC Reflectors 531 15.4.2 PC Absorbers 535 15.4.3 Front-Side PCs 538 15.4.4 PCs for Other Functionalities 540 15.5 Summary and Outlook 540 Acknowledgment 542 References 542
£190.76
John Wiley & Sons Inc The Nystrom Method in Electromagnetics
Book SynopsisA comprehensive, step-by-step reference to the Nyström Method for solving Electromagnetic problems using integral equations Computational electromagnetics studies the numerical methods or techniques that solve electromagnetic problems by computer programming. Currently, there are mainly three numerical methods for electromagnetic problems: the finite-difference time-domain (FDTD), finite element method (FEM), and integral equation methods (IEMs). In the IEMs, the method of moments (MoM) is the most widely used method, but much attention is being paid to the Nyström method as another IEM, because it possesses some unique merits which the MoM lacks. This book focuses on that methodproviding information on everything that students and professionals working in the field need to know. Written by the top researchers in electromagnetics, this complete reference book is a consolidation of advances made in the use of the Nyström method for solving electromagnetic integral equations. It beginTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xiii Preface xv Acknowledgment xxi 1 Electromagnetics, Physics, and Mathematics 1 1.1 A Brief History of Electromagnetics 1 1.2 Enduring Legacy of Electromagnetic Theory–Why? 3 1.3 The Rise of Quantum Optics and Electromagnetics 4 1.3.1 Connection of Quantum Electromagnetics to Classical Electromagnetics 5 1.4 The Early Days – Descendent from Fluid Physics 6 1.5 The Complete Development of Maxwell’s Equations 7 1.5.1 Derivation of Wave Equation 9 1.6 Circuit Physics,Wave Physics, Ray Physics, and Plasmonic Resonances 10 1.6.1 Circuit Physics 10 1.6.2 Wave Physics 14 1.6.3 Ray Physics 15 1.6.4 Plasmonic Resonance 17 1.7 The Age of Closed Form Solutions 20 1.7.1 Separable Coordinate Systems 20 1.7.2 Integral Transform Solution 21 1.8 The Age of Approximations 23 1.8.1 Asymptotic Expansions 23 1.8.2 Matched Asymptotic Expansions 24 1.8.3 Ansatz-Based Approximations 27 1.9 The Age of Computations 28 1.9.1 Computations and Mathematics 30 1.9.2 Sobolev Space and Dual Space 33 1.10 Fast Algorithms 35 1.10.1 Cruelty of Computational Complexity 36 1.10.2 Curse of Dimensionality 38 1.10.3 Multiscale Problems 38 1.10.4 Fast Algorithm for Multiscale Problems 39 1.10.5 Domain Decomposition Methods 40 1.11 High Frequency Solutions 41 1.12 Inverse Problems 41 1.12.1 Distorted Born Iterative Method 42 1.12.2 Super-Resolution Reconstruction 43 1.12.3 Super-Resolution and the Weyl-Sommerfeld Identity 43 1.13 Metamaterials 46 1.14 Small Antennas 47 1.15 Conclusions 48 Bibliography 49 2 Computational Electromagnetics 75 2.1 Introduction 75 2.2 Analytical Methods 77 2.3 Numerical Methods 82 2.3.1 The Finite-Difference Time-Domain (FDTD)Method 83 2.3.2 The Finite Element Method (FEM) 83 2.3.3 The Method of Moments (MoM) 84 2.4 Electromagnetic Integral Equations 87 2.4.1 Surface Integral Equations (SIEs) 88 2.4.2 Volume Integral Equations (VIEs) 91 2.4.3 Volume-Surface Integral Equations (VSIEs) 93 2.5 Summary 95 Bibliography 95 3 The Nyström Method 99 3.1 Introduction 99 3.2 Basic Principle 100 3.3 Singularity Treatment 101 3.4 Higher-Order Scheme 102 3.5 Comparison to the Method of Moments 103 3.6 Comparison to the Point-Matching Method 104 3.7 Summary 105 Bibliography 106 4 Numerical Quadrature Rules 107 4.1 Introduction 107 4.2 Definition and Design 108 4.3 Quadrature Rules for a Segmental Mesh 108 4.4 Quadrature Rules for a Surface Mesh 109 4.4.1 Quadrature Rules for a Triangular Patch 109 4.4.2 Quadrature Rules for a Square Patch 112 4.5 Quadrature Rules for a Volumetric Mesh 116 4.5.1 Quadrature Rules for a Tetrahedral Element 116 4.5.2 Quadrature Rules for a Cuboid Element 121 4.6 Summary 122 Bibliography 123 5 Singularity Treatment 125 5.1 Introduction 125 5.2 Singularity Subtraction 126 5.2.1 Basic Principle 126 5.2.2 Subtraction for the Kernel of ; Operator 127 5.2.3 Subtraction for the Kernel of ; Operator 130 5.2.4 Subtraction for the Kernels of VIEs 132 5.3 Singularity Cancellation 133 5.3.1 Surface Integral Equation 134 5.3.2 Evaluation of the Weakly-Singular Integrals 135 5.3.3 Numerical Examples 138 5.4 Evaluation of Hypersingular and Weakly-Singular Integrals over Triangular Patches 143 5.4.1 Hypersingular Integrals 144 5.4.2 Weakly-Singular Integrals 149 5.4.3 Non-Singular Integrals 152 5.4.4 Numerical Examples 154 5.5 Different Scheme for Evaluating Strongly-Singular and Hypersingular Integrals Over Triangular Patches 154 5.5.1 Strongly-Singular and Hypersingular Integrals 157 5.5.2 Stokes’ Theorem 159 5.5.3 Derivation of New Formulas for HSIs and SSIs 160 5.5.4 Numerical Tests 164 5.5.5 Numerical Examples 164 5.6 Evaluation of Singular Integrals Over Volume Domains 167 5.6.1 Representation of Volume Current Density 168 5.6.2 Evaluation of Singular Integrals 169 5.6.3 Numerical Examples 172 5.7 Evaluation of Near-Singular Integrals 176 5.7.1 Integral Equations and Near-Singular Integrals 177 5.7.2 Evaluation 179 5.7.3 Numerical Examples 185 5.8 Summary 187 Bibliography 188 6 Application to Conducting Media 193 6.1 Introduction 193 6.2 Solution for 2D Structures 193 6.2.1 General 2D Structures 194 6.2.2 2D Open Structures with Edge Conditions 196 6.2.3 Evaluation of Singular and Near-Singular Integrations 199 6.2.4 Numerical Examples 204 6.3 Solution for Body-of-Revolution (BOR) Structures 211 6.3.1 2D Integral Equations 212 6.3.2 Evaluation of Singular Fourier Expansion Coefficients 215 6.3.3 Numerical Examples 219 6.4 Solutions of the Electric Field Integral Equation 221 6.4.1 Higher-order Nyström method 222 6.4.2 Numerical Examples 225 6.5 Solutions of the Magnetic Field Integral Equation 228 6.5.1 Integral Equations 229 6.5.2 Singularity and Near-Singularity Treatment 230 6.5.3 Numerical Examples 233 6.6 Solutions of the Combined Field Integral Equation 238 6.6.1 Integral Equations 239 6.6.2 Quality of Triangular Patches 240 6.6.3 Nyström Discretization 241 6.6.4 Numerical Examples 242 6.7 Summary 245 Bibliography 246 7 Application to Penetrable Media 253 7.1 Introduction 253 7.2 Surface Integral Equations for Homogeneous and Isotropic Media 254 7.2.1 Surface Integral Equations 254 7.2.2 Nyström Discretization 259 7.2.3 Numerical Examples 260 7.3 Volume Integral Equations for Homogeneous and Isotropic Media 266 7.3.1 Volume Integral Equations 268 7.3.2 Nyström Discretization 268 7.3.3 Local Correction Scheme 271 7.3.4 Numerical Examples 274 7.4 Volume Integral Equations for Inhomogeneous or/and Anisotropic Media 279 7.4.1 Volume Integral Equations 280 7.4.2 Inconvenience of the Method of Moments 282 7.4.3 Nyström Discretization 283 7.4.4 Numerical Examples 284 7.5 Volume Integral Equations for Conductive Media 287 7.5.1 Volume Integral Equations 289 7.5.2 Nyström Discretization 290 7.5.3 Numerical Examples 291 7.6 Volume-Surface Integral Equations for Mixed Media 296 7.6.1 Volume-Surface Integral Equations 298 7.6.2 Nyström-Based Mixed Scheme for Solving the VSIEs 299 7.6.3 Numerical Examples 301 7.7 Summary 306 Bibliography 309 8 Incorporation with Multilevel Fast Multipole Algorithm 317 8.1 Introduction 317 8.2 Multilevel Fast Multipole Algorithm 318 8.3 Surface Integral Equations for Conducting Objects 320 8.3.1 Integral Equations 321 8.3.2 Nyström Discretization and MLFMA Acceleration 321 8.3.3 Numerical Examples 323 8.4 Surface Integral Equations for Penetrable Objects 325 8.4.1 Integral Equations 327 8.4.2 MLFMA Acceleration 329 8.4.3 Numerical Examples 331 8.5 Volume Integral Equations for Conductive Media 335 8.5.1 Integral Equations 336 8.5.2 Nyström Discretization 337 8.5.3 Incorporation with the MLFMA 338 8.5.4 Numerical Examples 338 8.6 Volume-Surface Integral Equations for Conducting-Anisotropic Media 342 8.6.1 Integral Equations for Anisotropic Objects 343 8.6.2 Nyström Discretization 344 8.6.3 MLFMA Acceleration 345 8.6.4 Numerical Examples 347 8.7 Summary 352 Bibliography 353 9 Application to Solve Multiphysics Problems 357 9.1 Introduction 357 9.2 Solution of Elastic Wave Problems 359 9.2.1 Boundary Integral Equations 359 9.2.2 Singularity Treatment 362 9.2.3 Numerical Examples 364 9.3 MLFMA Acceleration for Solve Large Elastic Wave Problems 369 9.3.1 Formulations 370 9.3.2 Reformulation of Near Terms 375 9.3.3 Reduction of Number of Patterns 377 9.3.4 Numerical Examples 379 9.4 Solution of Acoustic Wave Problems with MLFMA Acceleration 383 9.4.1 Implementation of the MLFMA for the Acoustic BIE 383 Acoustic BIE 384 Radiation and Receiving Patterns 384 Near Terms 385 9.4.2 Numerical Examples 388 9.5 Unified Boundary Integral Equations for Elastic Wave and Acoustic Wave 395 9.5.1 Elastic Wave BIEs 397 9.5.2 Limit of Dyadic Green’s Function 398 9.5.3 Vector BIE for Acoustic Wave 399 9.5.4 Method of Moments (MoM) Solutions 401 9.5.5 Numerical Examples 403 9.6 Coupled Integral Equations for Electromagnetic Wave and Elastic Wave 411 9.6.1 EM Wave Integral Equations 412 9.6.2 Elastic Wave Integral Equations 415 9.6.3 Coupled Integral Equations 418 9.6.4 Solving Method 420 9.6.5 Numerical Examples 421 9.7 Summary 425 Bibliography 429 10 Application to Solve Time Domain Integral Equations 437 10.1 Introduction 437 10.2 Time Domain Surface Integral Equations for Conducting Media 438 10.2.1 Time Domain Electric Field Integral Equation 438 Formulations 439 Numerical Solution 440 Numerical Examples 442 10.2.2 Time Domain Magnetic Field Integral Equation 446 Formulations 447 Numerical Solution 447 Numerical Examples 449 10.3 Time Domain Surface Integral Equations for Penetrable Media 454 10.3.1 Formulations 455 10.3.2 Numerical Solution 456 10.3.3 Numerical Examples 459 10.4 Time Domain Volume Integral Equations for Penetrable Media 465 10.4.1 Formulations 466 10.4.2 Numerical Solution 467 10.4.3 Numerical Examples 470 10.5 Time Domain Combined Field Integral Equations for Mixed Media 476 10.5.1 Formulations 476 10.5.2 Numerical Solution 479 10.5.3 Numerical Examples 484 10.6 Summary 488 Bibliography 488 Index 493
£124.15
John Wiley & Sons Inc Probability and Statistics with Reliability
Book SynopsisAn accessible introduction to probability, stochastic processes, and statistics for computer science and engineering applicationsSecond edition now also available in Paperback. This updated and revised edition of the popular classic first edition relates fundamental concepts in probability and statistics to the computer sciences and engineering. The author uses Markov chains and other statistical tools to illustrate processes in reliability of computer systems and networks, fault tolerance, and performance.This edition features an entirely new section on stochastic Petri netsas well as new sections on system availability modeling, wireless system modeling, numerical solution techniques for Markov chains, and software reliability modeling, among other subjects. Extensive revisions take new developments in solution techniques and applications into account and bring this work totally up to date. It includes more than 200 worked examples and self-study exerciTrade Review"The book offers a comprehensive introduction to probability, stochastic processes, and statistics for students of computer science, electrical and computer engineering, and applied mathematics. Its wealth of practical examples and up-to-date information makes it an excellent resource for practitioners as well." (Zentralblatt MATH, 2016) "I highly recommend this book for academics for use as a textbook and for researchers and professionals in the field as a useful reference." (Interfaces, September/ October 2004) "This introduction...uses Markov chains and other statistical tools to illustrate process in reliability of computer systems, fault tolerance, and performance." (SciTech Book News, Vol. 26, No. 2, June 2002) "...an excellent self-contained book.... I recommend the book to beginners and veterans in the field..." (Computer Journal, Vol.45, No.6, 2002) "This book is a tour de force of clear, virtually error-free exposition of probability as it is applied in a host of up-to-date contexts.... It will richly reward the...reader.... Read this book cover to cover. It’s worth the effort." (Technometrics, Vol. 45, No. 1, February 2003)Table of ContentsPreface to the Paperback Edition ix Preface to the Second Edition xi Preface to the First Edition xiii Acronyms xv About the Companion Website xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Motivation 1 1.2 Probability Models 2 1.3 Sample Space 3 1.4 Events 6 1.5 Algebra of Events 7 1.6 Graphical Methods of Representing Events 11 1.7 Probability Axioms 13 1.8 Combinatorial Problems 19 1.9 Conditional Probability 24 1.10 Independence of Events 26 1.11 Bayes’ Rule 38 1.12 Bernoulli Trials 47 2 Discrete Random Variables 65 2.1 Introduction 65 2.2 Random Variables and Their Event Spaces 66 2.3 The Probability Mass Function 68 2.4 Distribution Functions 70 2.5 Special Discrete Distributions 72 2.6 Analysis of Program MAX 97 2.7 The Probability Generating Function 101 2.8 Discrete Random Vectors 104 2.9 Independent Random Variables 110 3 Continuous Random Variables 121 3.1 Introduction 121 3.2 The Exponential Distribution 125 3.3 The Reliability and Failure Rate 130 3.4 Some Important Distributions 135 3.5 Functions of a Random Variable 154 3.6 Jointly Distributed Random Variables 159 3.7 Order Statistics 163 3.8 Distribution of Sums 174 3.9 Functions of Normal Random Variables 190 4 Expectation 201 4.1 Introduction 201 4.2 Moments 205 4.3 Expectation Based on Multiple Random Variables 209 4.4 Transform Methods 216 4.5 Moments and Transforms of Some Distributions 226 4.6 Computation of Mean Time to Failure 238 4.7 Inequalities and Limit Theorems 247 5 Conditional Distribution and Expectation 257 5.1 Introduction 257 5.2 Mixture Distributions 266 5.3 Conditional Expectation 273 5.4 Imperfect Fault Coverage and Reliability 280 5.5 Random Sums 290 6 Stochastic Processes 301 6.1 Introduction 301 6.2 Classification of Stochastic Processes 307 6.3 The Bernoulli Process 313 6.4 The Poisson Process 317 6.5 Renewal Processes 327 6.6 Availability Analysis 332 6.7 Random Incidence 342 6.8 Renewal Model of Program Behavior 346 7 Discrete-Time Markov Chains 351 7.1 Introduction 351 7.2 Computation of n-step Transition Probabilities 356 7.3 State Classification and Limiting Probabilities 362 7.4 Distribution of Times Between State Changes 371 7.5 Markov Modulated Bernoulli Process 373 7.6 Irreducible Finite Chains with Aperiodic States 376 7.7 The M/G/ 1 Queuing System 391 7.8 Discrete-Time Birth–Death Processes 400 7.9 Finite Markov Chains with Absorbing States 407 8 Continuous-Time Markov Chains 421 8.1 Introduction 421 8.2 The Birth–Death Process 428 8.3 Other Special Cases of the Birth–Death Model 465 8.4 Non-Birth–Death Processes 474 8.5 Markov Chains with Absorbing States 519 8.6 Solution Techniques 541 8.7 Automated Generation 552 9 Networks of Queues 577 9.1 Introduction 577 9.2 Open Queuing Networks 582 9.3 Closed Queuing Networks 590 9.4 General Service Distribution and Multiple Job Types 620 9.5 Non-product-form Networks 628 9.6 Computing Response Time Distribution 641 9.7 Summary 654 10 Statistical Inference 661 10.1 Introduction 661 10.2 Parameter Estimation 663 10.3 Hypothesis Testing 718 11 Regression and Analysis of Variance 753 11.1 Introduction 753 11.2 Least-squares Curve Fitting 758 11.3 The Coefficients of Determination 762 11.4 Confidence Intervals in Linear Regression 765 11.5 Trend Detection and Slope Estimation 768 11.6 Correlation Analysis 771 11.7 Simple Nonlinear Regression 774 11.8 Higher-dimensional Least-squares Fit 775 11.9 Analysis of Variance 778 A Bibliography 791 A.1 Theory 791 A.2 Applications 796 B Properties of Distributions 804 C Statistical Tables 807 D Laplace Transforms 828 E Program Performance Analysis 835 Author Index 837 Subject Index 845
£95.36
John Wiley & Sons Inc Printed Batteries
Book SynopsisOffers the first comprehensive account of this interesting and growing research field Printed Batteries: Materials, Technologies and Applications reviews the current state of the art for printed batteries, discussing the different types and materials, and describing the printing techniques. It addresses the main applications that are being developed for printed batteries as well as the major advantages and remaining challenges that exist in this rapidly evolving area of research. It is the first book on printed batteries that seeks to promote a deeper understanding of this increasingly relevant research and application area. It is written in a way so as to interest and motivate readers to tackle the many challenges that lie ahead so that the entire research community can provide the world with a bright, innovative future in the area of printed batteries. Topics covered in Printed Batteries include, Printed Batteries: Definition, Types and AdvantageTable of Contents1 Printed Batteries: An Overview 1Juliana Oliveira, Carlos Miguel Costa and Senentxu Lanceros-Méndez 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Types of Printed Batteries 7 1.3 Design of Printed Batteries 9 1.4 Main Advantages and Disadvantages of Printed Batteries 11 1.4.1 Advantages 11 1.4.2 Disadvantages 12 1.5 Application Areas 13 1.6 Commercial Printed Batteries 14 1.7 Summary and Outlook 14 Acknowledgements 15 References 16 2 Printing Techniques for Batteries 21Andreas Willert, Anh-Tuan Tran-Le, Kalyan Yoti Mitra, Maurice Clair, Carlos Miguel Costa, Senentxu Lanceros-Méndez and Reinhard Baumann 2.1 Introduction/Abstract 21 2.2 Materials and Substrates 22 2.3 Printing Techniques 23 2.3.1 Screen Printing 25 2.3.1.1 Flatbed 25 2.3.1.2 Rotary 27 2.3.1.3 Screen Mesh 28 2.3.1.4 Squeegee 29 2.3.2 Stencil Printing 30 2.3.3 Flexographic Printing 31 2.3.3.1 Letterpress Printing 31 2.3.3.2 Flexography 32 2.3.4 Gravure Printing 33 2.3.5 Lithographic/Offset Printing 35 2.3.6 Coating 36 2.3.7 Inkjet 38 2.3.7.1 Inkjet Printing Technology and Applications 38 2.3.7.2 Selective View of the Market for Inkjet Technology 44 2.3.7.3 Advanced Applications: Printed Functionalities and Electronics 48 2.3.8 Drying Process 50 2.3.9 Process Chain 52 2.3.10 Printing of Layers 53 2.4 Conclusions 54 Acknowledgements 54 References 55 3 The Influence of Slurry Rheology on Lithium-ion Electrode Processing 63Ta]Jo Liu, Carlos Tiu, Li-Chun Chen and Darjen Liu 3.1 Introduction 63 3.2 Slurry Formulation 64 3.3 Rheological Characteristics of Electrode Slurry 65 3.3.1 Viscosity and Shear-Thinning 65 3.3.2 Viscoelasticity 66 3.3.3 Yield Stress 68 3.4 Effects of Rheology on Electrode Processing 69 3.4.1 Composition of Electrode Slurry 69 3.4.2 Electrode Slurry Preparation 70 3.4.2.1 Mixing Methods 70 3.4.2.2 Mixing Devices 73 3.4.3 Electrode Coating 75 3.4.4 Electrode Drying 75 3.5 Conclusion 76 List of Symbols and Abbreviations 76 References 76 4 Polymer Electrolytes for Printed Batteries 80Ela Strauss, Svetlana Menkin and Diana Golodnitsky 4.1 Electrolytes for Conventional Batteries 80 4.1.1 Polymer/Gel Electrolytes for Aqueous Batteries 81 4.1.2 Electrolytes for Lithium-ion Batteries 82 4.2 Electrolytes for Printed Batteries 84 4.2.1 Screen-printed Electrolytes 85 4.2.2 Spray-printed Electrolytes 86 4.2.3 Direct-write Printed Electrolytes 88 4.2.4 Laser-printed Electrolytes 99 4.3 Summary 107 References 108 5 Design of Printed Batteries: From Chemistry to Aesthetics 112Keun-Ho Choi and Sang-Young Lee 5.1 Introduction 112 5.2 Design of Printed Battery Components 114 5.2.1 Printed Electrodes 114 5.2.2 Printed Separator Membranes and Solid-state Electrolytes 121 5.3 Aesthetic Versatility of Printed Battery Systems 126 5.3.1 Zn/MnO2 Batteries 126 5.3.2 Supercapacitors 132 5.3.3 Li-ion Batteries 134 5.3.4 Other Systems 138 5.4 Summary and Prospects 138 Acknowledgements 141 References 141 6 Applications of Printed Batteries 144Abhinav M. Gaikwad, Aminy E. Ostfeld and Ana Claudia Arias 6.1 Printed Microbatteries 146 6.2 Printed Primary Batteries 151 6.3 Printed Rechargeable Batteries 160 6.4 High-Performance Printed Structured Batteries 169 6.5 Power Electronics and Energy Harvesting 174 References 182 7 Industrial Perspective on Printed Batteries 185Patrick Rassek, Michael Wendler and Martin Krebs 7.1 Introduction 185 7.2 Printing Technologies for Functional Printing 186 7.2.1 Flexography 188 7.2.2 Gravure Printing 190 7.2.3 Offset Printing 192 7.2.4 Screen Printing 193 7.2.5 Conclusion 197 7.3 Comparison of Conventional Battery Manufacturing Methods with Screen Printing Technology 197 7.4 Industrial Aspects of Screen-printed Thin Film Batteries 200 7.4.1 Layout Considerations 200 7.4.1.1 Sandwich Architecture (Stack Configuration) 200 7.4.1.2 Parallel Architecture (Coplanar Configuration) 201 7.4.2 Carrier Substrates and Multifunctional Substrates for Printed Batteries 203 7.4.2.1 Barrier Requirements and Material Selection 205 7.4.2.2 Process Requirements of Qualified Materials 206 7.4.3 Current Collectors 209 7.4.4 Electrodes 210 7.4.5 Electrolytes and Separator 214 7.4.6 Encapsulation Technologies 215 7.4.6.1 Screen Printing of Adhesives 215 7.4.6.2 Contact Heat Sealing 216 7.4.6.3 Ultrasonic Welding 217 7.4.7 Conclusion 219 7.5 Industrial Applications and Combination With Other Flexible Electronic Devices 220 7.5.1 Self-powered Temperature Loggers 220 7.5.2 Smart Packaging Devices 222 7.6 Industrial Perspective on Printed Batteries 223 7.6.1 Competition with Conventional Batteries 223 7.6.2 Cold Chain Monitoring 225 7.6.3 Health]monitoring Devices 226 7.7 Conclusion 226 References 227 8 Open Questions, Challenges and Outlook 230Carlos Miguel Costa, Juliana Oliveira and Senentxu Lanceros-Méndez Acknowledgements 233 References 233 Index 235
£113.36
John Wiley & Sons Inc Practical Applications of Bayesian Reliability
Book SynopsisDemonstrates how to solve reliability problems using practical applications of Bayesian models This self-contained reference provides fundamental knowledge of Bayesian reliability and utilizes numerous examples to show how Bayesian models can solve real life reliability problems. It teaches engineers and scientists exactly what Bayesian analysis is, what its benefits are, and how they can apply the methods to solve their own problems. To help readers get started quickly, the book presents many Bayesian models that use JAGS and which require fewer than 10 lines of command. It also offers a number of short R scripts consisting of simple functions to help them become familiar with R coding. Practical Applications of Bayesian Reliability starts by introducing basic concepts of reliability engineering, including random variables, discrete and continuous probability distributions, hazard function, and censored data. Basic concepts of Bayesian statistics, models, reasons, and theory are prTable of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xv About the Companion Website xvii 1 Basic Concepts of Reliability Engineering 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.1.1 Reliability Definition 3 1.1.2 Design for Reliability and Design for Six Sigma 4 1.2 Basic Theory and Concepts of Reliability Statistics 5 1.2.1 Random Variables 5 1.2.2 Discrete Probability Distributions 6 1.2.3 Continuous Probability Distributions 6 1.2.4 Properties of Discrete and Continuous Random Variables 6 1.2.4.1 Probability Mass Function 6 1.2.4.2 Probability Density Function 7 1.2.4.3 Cumulative Distribution Function 8 1.2.4.4 Reliability or Survival Function 8 1.2.4.5 Hazard Rate or Instantaneous Failure Rate 9 1.2.4.6 Cumulative Hazard Function 10 1.2.4.7 The Average Failure Rate Over Time 10 1.2.4.8 Mean Time to Failure 10 1.2.4.9 Mean Number of Failures 11 1.2.5 Censored Data 11 1.2.6 Parametric Models of Time to Failure Data 13 1.2.7 Nonparametric Estimation of Survival 14 1.2.8 Accelerated Life Testing 16 1.3 Bayesian Approach to Reliability Inferences 18 1.3.1 Brief History of Bayes’ Theorem and Bayesian Statistics 18 1.3.2 How Does Bayesian Statistics Relate to Other Advances in the Industry? 19 1.3.2.1 Advancement of Predictive Analytics 20 1.3.2.2 Cost Reduction 20 1.4 Component Reliability Estimation 20 1.5 System Reliability Estimation 20 1.6 Design Capability Prediction (Monte Carlo Simulations) 21 1.7 Summary 22 References 23 2 Basic Concepts of Bayesian Statistics and Models 25 2.1 Basic Idea of Bayesian Reasoning 25 2.2 Basic Probability Theory and Bayes’ Theorem 26 2.3 Bayesian Inference (Point and Interval Estimation) 32 2.4 Selection of Prior Distributions 35 2.4.1 Conjugate Priors 35 2.4.2 Informative and Non-informative Priors 38 2.5 Bayesian Inference vs. Frequentist Inference 44 2.6 How Bayesian Inference Works with Monte Carlo Simulations 48 2.7 Bayes Factor and its Applications 50 2.8 Predictive Distribution 53 2.9 Summary 57 References 57 3 Bayesian Computation 59 3.1 Introduction 59 3.2 Discretization 60 3.3 Markov Chain Monte Carlo Algorithms 66 3.3.1 Markov Chains 67 3.3.1.1 Monte Carlo Error 67 3.3.2 Metropolis–Hastings Algorithm 68 3.3.3 Gibbs Sampling 80 3.4 Using BUGS/JAGS 85 3.4.1 Define a JAGS Model 86 3.4.2 Create, Compile, and Run the JAGS Model 89 3.4.3 MCMC Diagnostics and Output Analysis 91 3.4.3.1 Summary Statistics 91 3.4.3.2 Trace Plots 92 3.4.3.3 Autocorrelation Plots 93 3.4.3.4 Cross-Correlation 93 3.4.3.5 Gelman–Rubin Diagnostic and Plots 94 3.4.4 Sensitivity to the Prior Distributions 95 3.4.5 Model Comparison 96 3.5 Summary 98 References 98 4 Reliability Distributions (Bayesian Perspective) 101 4.1 Introduction 101 4.2 Discrete Probability Models 102 4.2.1 Binomial Distribution 102 4.2.2 Poisson Distribution 104 4.3 Continuous Models 108 4.3.1 Exponential Distribution 108 4.3.2 Gamma Distribution 113 4.3.3 Weibull Distribution 115 4.3.3.1 Fit Data to a Weibull Distribution 116 4.3.3.2 Demonstrating Reliability using Right-censored Data Only 120 4.3.4 Normal Distribution 135 4.3.5 Lognormal Distribution 139 4.4 Model and Convergence Diagnostics 143 References 143 5 Reliability Demonstration Testing 145 5.1 Classical Zero-failure Test Plans for Substantiation Testing 146 5.2 Classical Zero-failure Test Plans for Reliability Testing 147 5.3 Bayesian Zero-failure Test Plan for Substantiation Testing 149 5.4 Bayesian Zero-failure Test Plan for Reliability Testing 161 5.5 Summary 162 References 163 6 Capability and Design for Reliability 165 6.1 Introduction 165 6.2 Monte Caro Simulations with Parameter Point Estimates 166 6.2.1 Stress-strength Interference Example 166 6.2.2 Tolerance Stack-up Example 171 6.3 Nested Monte Carlo Simulations with Bayesian Parameter Estimation 174 6.3.1 Stress-strength Interference Example 175 6.3.2 Tolerance Stack-up Example 182 6.4 Summary 186 References 186 7 System Reliability Bayesian Model 187 7.1 Introduction 187 7.2 Reliability Block Diagram 188 7.3 Fault Tree 196 7.4 Bayesian Network 197 7.4.1 A Multiple-sensor System 199 7.4.2 Dependent Failure Modes 202 7.4.3 Case Study: Aggregating Different Sources of Imperfect Data 204 7.5 Summary 214 References 214 8 Bayesian Hierarchical Model 217 8.1 Introduction 217 8.2 Bayesian Hierarchical Binomial Model 221 8.2.1 Separate One-level Bayesian Models 221 8.2.2 Bayesian Hierarchical Model 222 8.3 Bayesian Hierarchical Weibull Model 228 8.4 Summary 238 References 238 9 Regression Models 239 9.1 Linear Regression 239 9.2 Binary Logistic Regression 246 9.3 Case Study: Defibrillation Efficacy Analysis 257 9.4 Summary 277 References 278 Appendix A Guidance for Installing R, R Studio, JAGS, and rjags 279 A.1 Install R 279 A.2 Install R Studio 279 A.3 Install JAGS 280 A.4 Install Package rjags 280 A.5 Set Working Directory 280 Appendix B Commonly Used R Commands 281 B.1 How to Run R Commands 281 B.2 General Commands 281 B.3 Generate Data 282 B.4 Variable Types 283 B.5 Calculations and Operations 285 B.6 Summarize Data 286 B.7 Read and Write Data 287 B.8 Plot Data 288 B.9 Loops and Conditional Statements 290 Appendix C Probability Distributions 291 C.1 Discrete Distributions 291 C.1.1 Binomial Distribution 291 C.1.2 Poisson Distribution 291 C.2 Continuous Distributions 292 C.2.1 Beta Distribution 292 C.2.2 Exponential Distribution 292 C.2.3 Gamma Distribution 292 C.2.4 Inverse Gamma Distribution 293 C.2.5 Lognormal Distribution 293 C.2.6 Normal Distribution 293 C.2.7 Uniform Distribution 294 C.2.8 Weibull Distribution 294 Appendix D Jeffreys Prior 295 Index 299
£77.36
John Wiley & Sons Inc Compendium of Biomedical Instrumentation 3 Volume
Book SynopsisAn essential reference filled with 400 of today''s current biomedical instruments and devices Designed mainly for the active bio-medical equipment technologists involved in hands-on functions like managing these technologies by way of their usage, operation & maintenance and those engaged in advancing measurement techniques through research and development, this book covers almost the entire range of instruments and devices used for diagnosis, imaging, analysis, and therapy in the medical field. Compiling 400 instruments in alphabetical order, it provides comprehensive information on each instrument in a lucid style. Each description in Compendium of Biomedical Instrumentation covers four aspects: purpose of the instrument; principle of operation, which covers physics, engineering, electronics, and data processing; brief specifications; and major applications. Devices listed range from the accelerometer, ballistocardiograph, microscopes, lasers, and electrocardiTable of ContentsPreface xix Volume 1 1 Accelerometer 1 2 Air Bubble Detector 8 3 Alcohol Analyser 11 4 Ambulatory Blood Pressure Monitor 17 5 Ambulatory Cardiac Monitor 20 6 Ambulatory Glucose Monitor 28 7 Ambulatory Sleep Monitor 33 8 Amino Acid Analyser 37 9 Anaesthesia Machine 42 10 Anaesthesia Depth Monitor 50 11 Anorectal Manometry 55 12 Antibiotic Susceptibility Analyser 60 13 Aortic Balloon Pump 64 14 Apnoea Monitor 68 15 Argon Plasma Coagulator 73 16 Arrhythmia Monitor 77 17 Arthroscope 85 18 Atomic Absorption Spectrometer 88 19 Atomic Emission Spectrometer, Flame 94 20 Atomic Emission Spectroscopy: Microwave Plasma 98 21 Audiometer: Diagnostic 101 22 Audiometer: Evoked Response 106 23 Audiometer: Impedance (Tympanometry) 110 24 Audiometer: Pure Tone 113 25 Audiometer: Screening 116 26 Audiometer: Speech 118 27 Audiometric Calibrator 121 28 Autotransfusion Unit, Blood 126 29 Balance, Electronic 129 30 Ballistocardiograph 134 31 Bilirubinometer 138 32 Biosafety Cabinet 141 33 Bioelectrodes: ECG Electrodes 145 34 Bioelectrodes: EEG Electrodes 150 35 Bioelectrodes: EMG Electrodes 153 36 Biofeedback Instrumentation 158 37 Biotelemetry: ECG (Single Channel) 165 38 Biotelemetry: Multichannel 172 39 Bladder Volume Measuring System: Ultrasonic 177 40 Blood Cell Processor (Apheresis System) 181 41 Blood Flow Detector: Ultrasonic Doppler 184 42 Blood Gas Analyser 187 43 Blood Gas Monitor: Transcutaneous 194 44 Blood Glucose Meter 200 45 Blood Grouping Machine 204 46 Blood Pressure Measurement (Invasive Method) 208 47 Blood Pressure Measurement (Noninvasive Methods) 215 48 Blood Recovery System 222 49 Blood Rheometer 226 50 Blood Time–Temperature Indicator 229 51 Blood Viscometer 232 52 Blood Warmer 237 53 Body Fat Analyser 241 54 Bone Cutting Machine 245 55 Bone Density Measurement: Dual Energy X-ray Technique 246 56 Bone Density Measurement: Ultrasound Method 249 57 Bone Healing Stimulator: External 253 58 Bone Growth Stimulator: Implantable 259 59 Bone Healing Stimulator: Ultrasound 261 60 Brachytherapy: Intravascular 264 61 Brachytherapy Machine 267 62 Breast Biopsy System 273 63 Breast Pump 277 64 Bronchoscope 279 65 Cabinet: Warming 285 66 Camera: Spot Film 287 67 Capnograph 289 68 Carbon Monoxide Analyser 295 69 Cardiac Monitor: Bedside 300 70 Cardiac Output Meter: Fick Method 307 71 Cardiac Output Monitor: Indicator Dilution Method 311 72 Cardiac Output Method: Oesophageal Doppler 316 73 Cardiac Output Monitor: Pulse Contour Method 319 74 Cardiac Output Meter: Thermodilution Technique 323 75 Cardiotocograph 327 76 Central Gas System 335 77 Centrifugal Analyser: Automated 341 78 Centrifuge: Blood Bank 343 79 Centrifuge: Cell Washing 347 80 Centrifuge: Haematocrit 350 81 Centrifuge, Laboratory 353 82 Microcentrifuge 357 83 Centrifuge, Refrigerated 359 84 Centrifuge, Ultra (High Speed) 361 85 Cervical Cancer Screening System, Automated 366 86 Chloride Meter 369 87 Clinical Chemistry Analyser, Dry 373 88 Clinical Chemistry Analyser, Random Access 377 89 Clinical Chemistry Analyser, Semi‐automated 380 90 Coagulation Analyser 383 91 Coagulation Time Machine, Activated 388 92 Cobalt‐60 Machine for Radiotherapy 391 93 Cochlear Prostheses 397 94 Colonoscope 400 95 Colony Counter, Automated 405 96 Colorimeter, Photoelectric 408 97 Colposcope 416 98 Compression Machine, Intermittent Pneumatic 419 99 Computed Tomography 422 100 Computed Tomography, Single Photon 434 101 Continuous Flow Analyser: Automated 441 102 Continuous Passive Motion Machine (CPMM) 447 103 Continuous Positive Airway Pressure Machine 451 104 Crash Cart: Resuscitation 454 105 Critical Care Analyser 458 106 Cryostat 464 107 Cryosurgical Unit 469 108 Cryotherapy Machine 473 109 Cutaneous Blood Flow Monitor: Laser Doppler 475 110 CyberKnife 479 111 Cystoscope 484 112 Cytometer: Flow 488 113 Cytometer: Imaging 492 114 Defibrillator: External 497 115 Defibrillator: External Automated 503 116 Defibrillator: Implantable Cardioverter 507 117 Defibrillator: Pacemaker Analyser/ECG simulator 513 118 Dental Amalgamator 518 119 Dental Casting Machine 519 120 Dental Furnace 523 121 Dental Sandblaster 527 122 Differential Counter, Automated 530 123 Digital Subtraction Angiography Machine 535 124 DNA Sequencer 539 125 Dynamometer Exercise System 544 126 Echocardiograph 548 127 Electrical Safety Analyser 555 128 Electrocardiograph 563 129 Electroconvulsive Therapy Machine 571 130 Electroencephalograph 575 131 Electrogastrograph 580 132 Electrolyte Analyser 584 133 Electromyograph 589 134 Electronystagmograph 595 135 Electrooculograph 600 136 Electrophoresis Apparatus 604 137 Electrophoresis, Capillary 610 138 Electroretinograph 615 139 Electrosurgical Machine 620 140 Electrosurgical Tester/Analyser 629 141 Endoscope 635 142 Endoscopic Cyclophotocoagulator 640 143 Endoscopy Capsule (Radio Pill) 644 144 ENT Treatment Unit 647 145 Enteral Feeding Pump 650 146 Ergometer, Bicycle 653 147 Ethylene Oxide Analyser 656 148 Event Recorder: Cardiac 659 149 Exercise Stress Testing System 662 Volume 2 150 Flame Photometer 669 151 Flow Injection Based Analyser 674 152 Fluorometer 677 153 Foetal Heart Detector, Ultrasonic 682 154 Foetal Vacuum Extractor 687 155 Freezer, Blood Plasma 690 156 Freezer, Ultra‐Low Temperature 694 157 Functional Electrical Stimulator 697 158 Fundus Camera 702 159 Gait Analyser 706 160 Gamma Camera 710 161 Gamma Counter 717 162 Gamma Knife 720 163 Gas Chromatograph 725 164 Haematology Analyser 732 165 Haematology Analyser, Handheld 739 166 Haemodialysis Machine 742 167 Haemoglobin Meter 749 168 Headlight, Operating 752 169 Hearing Aid 755 170 Hearing Aid Analyser 759 171 Hearing Screening Device, Neonatal 763 172 Heart–Lung Machine 766 173 Heart Rate Monitor 772 174 Heart Valve, Prosthetic 775 175 Heat and Cold Therapy Device 783 176 Haemodynamic Monitor 787 177 High Performance Liquid Chromatograph 792 178 Hollow Fibre Dialyser 797 179 Hospital Beds 800 180 Humidifier, Home 806 181 Humidifier, Respiratory Gas 809 182 Hyperbaric Oxygenation Chamber 812 183 Hyperthermia System 817 184 Hyperthermia, Systemic 823 185 Hyperthermia, Ultrasonic 826 186 Immunoassay Analyser 831 187 Impedance Cardiograph 836 188 Impedance Spectroscopy 840 189 Incinerator, Hospital 843 190 Incubator, Anaerobic 849 191 Incubator, BOD 852 192 Incubator, CO2 854 193 Incubator, Infant 859 194 Incubator, Microbiological 862 195 Incubator, Neonatal 866 196 Inductively Coupled Plasma Optical Emission Spectrometer (ICP‐OES) 869 197 Infusion Pump Analyser 874 198 Infusion Pump, Patient Controlled Analgesia 879 199 Infusion Pump, Syringe 882 200 Infusion Pump, Volumetric 885 201 Injector, Power 888 202 Insufflator 891 203 Insulin Pump 894 204 Intracranial Pressure Monitor 899 205 Ion-Selective Analyser 903 206 Keratometer 909 207 Lactate Analyser 913 208 Laparoscope 916 209 Laryngoscope 921 210 Laser, Argon Photocoagulator 924 211 Laser, Carbon Dioxide 928 212 Laser, Diode 931 213 Laser, Excimer (Ophthalmic) 935 214 Laser, Holmium:YAG Lithotriptor 939 215 Laser, Navigating, Photocoagulator 942 216 Laser, Nd:YAG 946 217 Laser, PASCAL (Pattern Scanning Laser) 948 218 Laser, Thulium:YAG 952 219 Left Ventricular Assist Device 955 220 Lensometer 960 221 Light, Surgical 964 222 Line Isolation Monitor 968 223 Linear Accelerator Machine 971 224 Lithotripter, Extracorporeal 976 225 Lithotripter, Intracorporeal 981 226 Lyophilizer 985 227 Magnetic Resonance Imaging System 991 228 Mammography 999 229 Manikin 1006 230 Mass Spectrometer, Inductively Coupled Plasma 1009 231 Mercury Analyser 1015 232 Microbial Detection Systems 1019 233 Microbioreactor 1021 234 Microelectrodes 1025 235 Microplate Strip Washer 1031 236 Microscope 1035 237 Microscope, Atomic Force 1039 238 Microscope, Bright Field 1043 239 Microscope, Confocal 1047 240 Microscope, Dark Field 1052 241 Microscope, Dissecting 1056 242 Microscope, Fluorescence 1060 243 Microscope, Inverted 1065 244 Microscope, Near‐Field Scanning Optical 1068 245 Microscope, Operating/Surgical 1072 246 Microscope, Phase Contrast 1076 247 Microscope, Polarizing 1080 248 Microscope, Scanning Electron 1084 249 Microscope, Scanning Tunnelling 1091 250 Microscope, Transmission Electron 1096 251 Microtome 1102 252 Microtome, Cryostat 1107 253 Microtome, Laser 1110 254 Microtome, Ultra 1113 255 Microwave Diathermy Machine 1115 256 Nebulizer, Pneumatic/Jet 1119 257 Nebulizer, Ultrasonic 1122 258 Neonatal Monitoring System 1124 259 Nephelometer 1129 260 Neurological Monitor 1132 261 Neutron Activation Analyser 1136 262 Nitrogen/Protein Analyser 1140 263 Nitrous Oxide Analyser 1143 264 Oesophagoscope/Gastroscope 1145 265 Oesophagus Manometry 1150 266 Ophthalmoscope, Direct 1156 267 Ophthalmoscope, Indirect 1158 268 Optical Tweezers 1161 269 Osmometer 1165 270 Otoacoustic Emission Testing System 1168 271 Otoscope 1172 272 Oxygen Analyser 1175 Volume 3 273 Pacemaker, Cardiac External 1185 274 Pacemakers, Implantable 1190 275 Pacemakers, Rate Responsive 1194 276 Pacemaker Function Analyser 1198 277 Paraffin Dispenser 1201 278 Particle Counter 1204 279 Patient Monitoring System, Central 1210 280 Patient Warmer 1214 281 Peak Flowmeter 1217 282 Pedometer 1220 283 Peritoneal Dialysis Machine 1225 284 Personal Cascade Impactor 1228 285 pH Meter 1232 286 Phacoemulsification Machine 1240 287 Phonocardiograph 1244 288 Phototherapy Unit 1249 289 Picture Archiving and Communication Systems 1252 290 Plasma Thawing Equipment 1258 291 Platelet Aggregation Analyser 1260 292 Platelet Agitator 1264 293 Platelet Counter 1266 294 Plethysmograph 1269 295 Pneumotachometers 1275 296 Point-of-Care Analyser 1278 297 Positron Emission Tomography 1283 298 Proton Beam Radiotherapy Machine 1288 299 Pulmonary Function Analyser 1294 300 Pulse Oximeter 1299 301 Radiant Warmer, Neonatal 1303 302 Radiation Dosimeter 1307 303 Radiation Dosimeter, Electronic Personal 1310 304 Radiation Dosimeter, Geiger–Muller Counter 1314 305 Radiation Dosimeter, Ionization Chamber 1318 306 Radiation Dosimeter, Optically Stimulated Luminescence 1321 307 Radiographic Dosimeter, Photographic Film 1323 308 Radiation Dosimeter, Radiochromic Film 1325 309 Radiation Dosimeter, Scintillation Counter 1327 310 Radiation Dosimeter, Thermoluminescent 1331 311 Radiation Therapy Simulator 1335 312 Radiation Therapy CT Simulator 1339 313 Radiofrequency Ablation Machine 1343 314 Radiography Machine, Analog 1348 315 Radiography Machine, Digital 1355 316 Radiography/Fluoroscopy 1360 317 Radiography, Mobile Machine 1364 318 Radiographic Unit, Dental 1370 319 Radioimmunoassay Analyser 1374 320 Radiology Information System1377 321 Radiotherapy, Intraoperative Therapy Machine 1383 322 Radiotherapy Treatment Planning System 1388 323 Refractor, Auto 1392 324 Refrigerator, Blood Bank 1396 325 Refrigerator, Blood Bank, Ice‐Lined 1401 326 Refrigerator, Blood Bank, Solar‐Powered 1403 327 Renal Transplant Perfusion Machine 1405 328 Respiration Rate Monitor 1408 329 Robotic Surgery System 1415 330 Scale, Infant 1421 331 Scale, Patient 1423 332 Scintillation Counter 1426 333 Scintillation Counter, Liquid 1429 334 Short‐Wave Diathermy Machine 1433 335 Simulator, ECG 1438 336 Simulator, Multiparameter 1441 337 Skin Temperature‐Measuring Devices 1445 338 Slit Lamp 1450 339 Spectrofluorometer 1454 340 Spectrometer, Gamma 1459 341 Spectrometer, NMR 1462 342 Spectrophotometer, Infrared 1468 343 Spectrophotometer (UV–Visible) 1478 344 Sphygmomanometer 1487 345 Spirometer 1491 346 Stem Cell Separator, Automated 1498 347 Sterilizer, Dry heat 1503 348 Sterilizer, Gas 1506 349 Sterilizer, Plasma 1510 350 Sterilizer, Radiation 1514 351 Sterilizer, Steam 1518 352 Stethoscope 1522 353 Stethoscope, Electronic 1525 354 Stimulator, Bladder 1529 355 Stimulator, Deep Brain 1534 356 Stimulator, Peripheral Nerve 1538 357 Stimulator, Peripheral Nerve (Regional Anaesthesia) 1541 358 Stimulator, Phrenic Nerve 1545 359 Stimulator, Spinal Cord 1547 360 Stimulator, Vagus Nerve 1552 361 Suction Apparatus 1556 362 Suction Pump, Surgical 1559 363 Surgical Dermatome 1562 364 Tablet Counter 1563 365 Temperature Data Logger, Blood Bank 1567 366 Thermocycler (PCR Machine) 1570 367 Thermography, Infrared Camera 1574 368 Thoracic Aspirator 1580 369 Thyroid Uptake System 1583 370 Tissue Processor 1586 371 Tonometer, Arterial 1589 372 Tonometer, Ophthalmic 1593 373 Traction Unit 1597 374 Transcranial Blood Flow Doppler Machine 1599 375 Transcutaneous Electrical Nerve Stimulator 1607 376 Transcranial Magnetic Stimulator 1611 377 Ultrasonic Cleaner 1615 378 Ultrasonic Dental Scaler 1620 379 Ultrasonic Imaging System 1624 380 Ultrasonic Surgical Machine, Harmonic 1630 381 Ultrasonic Therapy Unit 1634 382 Ultrasound Thrombolysis System 1637 383 Urine Chemistry Analyser 1641 384 Urodynamic Measurements 1645 385 Uroflowmeter 1648 386 Uterine Aspirator 1652 387 Ventilator, Anaesthesia 1654 388 Ventilator, Continuous 1659 389 Ventilator, High Frequency 1662 390 Ventilator, ICU 1667 391 Ventilator, Lung 1672 392 Ventilator, Neonatal 1677 393 Ventilator, Transport 1680 394 Ventilator Tester 1685 395 Videoconferencing System (Telemedicine) 1688 396 Vital Signs Monitor 1694 397 Vitrectomy Machine 1701 398 Water Bath 1705 399 Wavefront Measurement Device 1707 400 X‐ray Film Processor 1711 Index 1715
£999.99
John Wiley & Sons Inc 3D IC and RF SiPs Advanced Stacking and Planar
Book SynopsisAn interdisciplinary guide to enabling technologies for 3D ICs and 5G mobility, covering packaging, design to product life and reliability assessments Features an interdisciplinary approach to the enabling technologies and hardware for 3D ICs and 5G mobility Presents statistical treatments and examples with tools that are easily accessible, such as Microsoft's Excel and Minitab Fundamental design topics such as electromagnetic design for logic and RF/passives centric circuits are explained in detail Provides chapter-wise review questions and powerpoint slides as teaching tools Table of Contents1 MM and MTM for Mobility 1 1.1 Convergence in Communications and the Future, 5G 3 1.1.1 From 1980 (1G) to 2010 (4G) 3 1.1.2 LTE-A and Rel 10 in 2010s 6 1.1.3 The Future: 5G and IoT (Targeting 2020) 8 1.2 Review of Key Products in Communication Networks 14 1.2.1 Wired Communications 14 1.2.2 Wireless Communications 21 1.3 MM and MTM, an Intro to Hardware Technology 31 1.3.1 Moore’s Law 31 1.3.2 More Than Moore 43 1.3.3 MTM Packaging Map and MM MTM Business Model 53 2 Interconnects 67 2.1 Hierarchy of Interconnection 69 2.1.1 On Chip (Level 0) Interconnections 69 2.1.2 Peripheral Pads on Semiconductor ICs (Level 0) 72 2.1.3 Al pads (Wirebond and Flip Chip) 73 2.1.4 Cu/Low K Re-Distribution Using Damascene Techniques (Flip Chip) 74 2.1.5 Au Pads (III–V) 77 2.1.6 Level 1 Interconnections: WB and FC—Why FC Interconnections are Preferred? 78 2.2 Level 1, Interconnection Gap in FC-PBGA, and Level 0.5 80 2.2.1 Wirebonds 80 2.2.2 Flip Chip Bumps with UBM 85 2.2.3 TSV and Microbumps, Cu or Au Stud Bumps (Level 0.5) 91 2.3 Changing Dynamics of Semiconductor Manufacturing 100 2.3.1 Bumping Itself is a Business 100 2.3.2 Cu/Low-K in BEOL 102 2.3.3 Wafer Fab Foundry and OSAT are Competing for Their Business Shares 102 3 State of the Art IC Packages, Modules, and Substrates 111 3.1 Single-Chip Packages (SCPs): Standardized Packages 113 3.1.1 Lead Frame Based: SO, QFP/QFN, and TAB 114 3.1.2 Organic Interposer Based: BGA/CSP and LGA 114 3.1.3 Known Good Bare Die 120 3.1.4 Single-Chip Packaging Processes 121 3.1.5 IC Testing 123 3.2 Advanced IC Substrates and Assembly 124 3.2.1 MLO Substrates for ICs 126 3.2.2 Multi-Layered Organic (MLO) for IC Packages 127 3.3 Customized Assemblies: MCP/MCMs and Modules 130 3.3.1 Multi-Chip Module (MCM) or Multi-Chip Package (MCP) 131 3.3.2 Modules 132 4 Passives Technology 139 4.1 Thick-Film Ceramic Technology (TFC) for MLC 146 4.1.1 Green Tapes 146 4.1.2 Thick-Film Fabrication 149 4.1.3 LTCC EPs, Thick-Film IPD, and LTCC-Based RF Modules 151 4.1.4 SMT (or SMD) 155 4.2 MLO Passives by Laminate Organic (LO) 156 4.2.1 MLO-Based RF Modules 156 4.2.2 Laminates 156 4.2.3 MLO Fabrication 157 4.2.4 MLO EPs and RF Modules 159 4.3 On-Chip Passives 166 4.3.1 RF Isolation (BCM4330) 166 4.3.2 Monolithic FEOL On-Chip Passives 168 4.3.3 Rs, Ls, and Cs in BEOL Layers 170 4.3.4 Goals 172 4.4 Thin-Film Multilayer (TFM) and IPD 173 4.5 Summary on Passives Fabrication Technologies: Solutions for RF-Passives Systems 191 5 Electrical Design for 5G Hardware—Digital Focus 199 5.1 Introduction to PCB 201 5.2 Signal Transmission Techniques: Singled-Ended and Differential Signals 202 5.2.1 Single-Ended and Differential 202 5.3 Co-Design Examples 216 5.3.1 Interconnection RF Models and Library 216 5.3.2 Chip-Package and Chip-Package-Board Co-Designs 219 5.4 Wide I/O Memory Using TSVs 228 5.4.1 JEDEC Memory Standards 230 5.4.2 Data Structure Using TSV-Based Wide I/O 230 6 Electrical Design for 5G Hardware—RF Focus 239 6.1 PHY, Modulated RF Carriers; a PoP Possible? 240 6.1.1 Frequency Bands and Wave Propagation Characteristics 240 6.1.2 Narrow-Band Process and CW Carrier for Digital Signals 242 6.2 Antennas 244 6.2.1 Two Often Encountered RF Passive Structures in Modern Portable Electronics: Antenna and Its Feed 244 6.2.2 Types of Antennas: Linear, Microstrip-Patch, and Multi-Element Antenna 245 6.2.3 Active-Integrated Antennas and Measurement of Antenna Performance 251 6.3 RF Functional Components 256 6.3.1 Bandpass Filters 256 6.3.2 Baluns 257 6.3.3 Switches and Duplexers 262 6.4 EMI/EMC 263 6.4.1 Sources of Interference 264 6.4.2 Diagnostic and Regulations Conformation Techniques 264 6.4.3 Containment Techniques 267 7 Product, Process Development, and Control 271 7.1 Business Processes 272 7.1.1 Strategic Management (Product and Process Development) 272 7.1.2 Design and Manufacturing; Outsourced or Not 273 7.2 History of Statistical Approach for Quality Management 273 7.2.1 Quality Guidelines and Standards 274 7.2.2 Semiconductor Process Development and Characterization 274 7.3 APQP—An Iterative Process for Product and Process Development 275 7.3.1 Translate Product Ideas Into Processes 275 7.4 FMEA, Control Plan, and Initial Process Study 276 7.4.1 RPN 276 7.4.2 Locating the Root Causes 281 7.4.3 Pre-Launch Control Plan 283 7.4.4 Initial Process Study 284 7.5 PPAP and SPC 287 7.5.1 PPAP 287 7.5.2 SPC 287 8 Product Life and Reliability Assessment 291 8.1 Product Life Prediction 292 8.1.1 Calculate MTTF from Processes and Theoretical Distributions 293 8.1.2 Practices to Obtain the Expected Product Life 296 8.1.3 Activation Energy 300 8.2 Reliability Assessment 301 8.2.1 Assessment Variables for Reliability Tests 302 8.2.2 Reliability Assessment Practices 303 8.2.3 Discussions on Weibull Analysis and Weibull Plotting 309 9 Hardware Solutions for 5G Mobility 317 9.1 5G Mobility Products and Planar Solutions 318 9.1.1 High-Density and Logic Products 319 9.1.2 RF-Passives Systems 326 9.1.3 A Summary: WLP and LPP Used for Both HD&L and RF-Passives Products 333 9.2 Advanced Interconnection and Future Business Model 336 9.2.1 Advanced Interconnection 336 9.2.2 New Business Model 341 9.3 Finale—What’s Not 343 9.3.1 New from Wafer Foundries 343 9.3.2 System and Architectural Design of Mobile Handsets 345 9.3.3 Thermo-Mechanical and Thermal Science 349 9.3.4 Sensors and IoT 349 A Failure Mechanisms and Failure Analysis 357 A.1 Failure Mechanisms, or Macroscopic Models 358 A.1.1 Silicon Oxide Breakdown 359 A.1.2 Stress-Induced Migration (SM) 360 A.1.3 Electro-Migration (EM) and Hillocks 360 A.1.4 Spiking 362 A.1.5 IMC, Purple plague (Gold-Al Intermetallics) 363 A.1.6 Fatigue and Creeping 364 A.1.7 Die Cracking 366 A.1.8 Delamination and Popcorning 366 A.1.9 Corrosion 367 A.2 Failure Analysis (FA) Techniques and FA Tools 368 A.2.1 De-Processing (or De-Capping) Techniques 368 A.2.2 Microscopic and Analytical Tools 369 B ANOVA 375 B.1 One-Way ANOVA 376 B.2 Two-Way ANOVA 377 C Gauge R&R and DOE 381 C.1 GR&R 381 C.1.1 AIAG’s Xbar/Range Method for Gauge R&R Study 381 C.1.2 Minitab 383 C.1.3 GR&R Casted in the ANOVA Format 383 C.1.4 Criteria 384 C.2 DOE 384 C.2.1 DOE Guidelines 385 C.2.2 2k Runs, Unreplicated Case 386 C.2.3 Fractional Factorial Designs, 2k-p Run, p = 1, 2,.., < k 399 D Statistics Tables 409 D.1 F Distribution 409 D.2 Poisson Table of Expected # of Occurrences at a Confidence Level (C.L.) 409 D.3 MR Percentile Table 409
£999.99
John Wiley and Sons Ltd Handbook of Software Fault Localization
Book SynopsisHandbook of Software Fault Localization A comprehensive analysis of fault localization techniques and strategies In Handbook of Software Fault Localization: Foundations and Advances, distinguished computer scientists Prof. W. Eric Wong and Prof. T.H. Tse deliver a robust treatment of up-to-date techniques, tools, and essential issues in software fault localization. The authors offer collective discussions of fault localization strategies with an emphasis on the most important features of each approach. The book also explores critical aspects of software fault localization, like multiple bugs, successful and failed test cases, coincidental correctness, faults introduced by missing code, the combination of several fault localization techniques, ties within fault localization rankings, concurrency bugs, spreadsheet fault localization, and theoretical studies on fault localization. Readers will benefit from the authors' straightforward discussions of how to aTable of ContentsEditor Biographies xv List of Contributors xvii 1 Software Fault Localization: an Overview of Research, Techniques, and Tools 1 W. Eric Wong, Ruizhi Gao, Yihao Li, Rui Abreu, Franz Wotawa, and Dongcheng li 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Traditional Fault Localization Techniques 14 1.2.1 Program Logging 14 1.2.2 Assertions 14 1.2.3 Breakpoints 14 1.2.4 Profiling 15 1.3 Advanced Fault Localization Techniques 15 1.3.1 Slicing-Based Techniques 15 1.3.2 Program Spectrum-Based Techniques 20 1.3.2.1 Notation 20 1.3.2.2 Techniques 21 1.3.2.3 Issues and Concerns 27 1.3.3 Statistics-Based Techniques 30 1.3.4 Program State-Based Techniques 32 1.3.5 Machine Learning-Based Techniques 34 1.3.6 Data Mining-Based Techniques 36 1.3.7 Model-Based Techniques 37 1.3.8 Additional Techniques 41 1.3.9 Distribution of Papers in Our Repository 45 1.4 Subject Programs 47 1.5 Evaluation Metrics 50 1.6 Software Fault Localization Tools 53 1.7 Critical Aspects 58 1.7.1 Fault Localization with Multiple Bugs 58 1.7.2 Inputs, Outputs, and Impact of Test Cases 60 1.7.3 Coincidental Correctness 63 1.7.4 Faults Introduced by Missing Code 64 1.7.5 Combination of Multiple Fault Localization Techniques 65 1.7.6 Ties Within Fault Localization Rankings 67 1.7.7 Fault Localization for Concurrency Bugs 67 1.7.8 Spreadsheet Fault Localization 68 1.7.9 Theoretical Studies 70 1.8 Conclusion 71 Notes 73 References 73 2 Traditional Techniques for Software Fault Localization 119 Yihao Li, Linghuan Hu, W. Eric Wong, Vidroha Debroy, and Dongcheng li 2.1 Program Logging 119 2.2 Assertions 121 2.3 Breakpoints 124 2.4 Profiling 125 2.5 Discussion 128 2.6 Conclusion 130 References 131 3 Slicing-Based Techniques for Software Fault Localization 135 W. Eric Wong, Hira Agrawal, and Xiangyu Zhang 3.1 Introduction 135 3.2 Static Slicing-Based Fault Localization 136 3.2.1 Introduction 136 3.2.2 Program Slicing Combined with Equivalence Analysis 137 3.2.3 Further Application 138 3.3 Dynamic Slicing-Based Fault Localization 138 3.3.1 Dynamic Slicing and Backtracking Techniques 144 3.3.2 Dynamic Slicing and Model-Based Techniques 145 3.3.3 Critical Slicing 148 3.3.3.1 Relationships Between Critical Slices (CS) and Exact Dynamic Program Slices (DPS) 149 3.3.3.2 Relationship Between Critical Slices and Executed Static Program Slices 150 3.3.3.3 Construction Cost 150 3.3.4 Multiple-Points Dynamic Slicing 151 3.3.4.1 BwS of an Erroneous Computed Value 152 3.3.4.2 FwS of Failure-Inducing Input Difference 152 3.3.4.3 BiS of a Critical Predicate 154 3.3.4.4 MPSs: Dynamic Chops 157 3.3.5 Execution Indexing 158 3.3.5.1 Concepts 159 3.3.5.2 Structural Indexing 161 3.3.6 Dual Slicing to Locate Concurrency Bugs 165 3.3.6.1 Trace Comparison 165 3.3.6.2 Dual Slicing 168 3.3.7 Comparative Causality: a Causal Inference Model Based on Dual Slicing 173 3.3.7.1 Property One: Relevance 174 3.3.7.2 Property Two: Sufficiency 175 3.3.8 Implicit Dependences to Locate Execution Omission Errors 177 3.3.9 Other Dynamic Slicing-Based Techniques 179 3.4 Execution Slicing-Based Fault Localization 179 3.4.1 Fault Localization Using Execution Dice 179 3.4.2 A Family of Fault Localization Heuristics Based on Execution Slicing 181 3.4.2.1 Heuristic I 182 3.4.2.2 Heuristic II 183 3.4.2.3 Heuristic III 185 3.4.3 Effective Fault Localization Based on Execution Slices and Inter-block Data Dependence 188 3.4.3.1 Augmenting a Bad D(1) 189 3.4.3.2 Refining a Good D(1) 190 3.4.3.3 An Incremental Debugging Strategy 191 3.4.4 Other Execution Slicing-Based Techniques in Software Fault Localization 193 3.5 Discussions 193 3.6 Conclusion 194 Notes 195 References 195 4 Spectrum-Based Techniques for Software Fault Localization 201 W. Eric Wong, Hua Jie Lee, Ruizhi Gao, and Lee Naish 4.1 Introduction 201 4.2 Background and Notation 203 4.2.1 Similarity Coefficient-Based Fault Localization 204 4.2.2 An Example of Using Similarity Coefficient to Compute Suspiciousness 205 4.3 Insights of Some Spectra-Based Metrics 210 4.4 Equivalence Metrics 212 4.4.1 Applicability of the Equivalence Relation to Other Fault Localization Techniques 217 4.4.2 Applicability Beyond Fault Localization 218 4.5 Selecting a Good Suspiciousness Function (Metric) 219 4.5.1 Cost of Using a Metric 219 4.5.2 Optimality for Programs with a Single Bug 220 4.5.3 Optimality for Programs with Deterministic Bugs 221 4.6 Using Spectrum-Based Metrics for Fault Localization 222 4.6.1 Spectrum-Based Metrics for Fault Localization 222 4.6.2 Refinement of Spectra-Based Metrics 227 4.7 Empirical Evaluation Studies of SBFL Metrics 232 4.7.1 The Construction of D ∗ 234 4.7.2 An Illustrative Example 235 4.7.3 A Case Study Using D ∗ 237 4.7.3.1 Subject Programs 237 4.7.3.2 Fault Localization Techniques Used in Comparisons 238 4.7.3.3 Evaluation Metrics and Criteria 239 4.7.3.4 Statement with Same Suspiciousness Values 240 4.7.3.5 Results 241 4.7.3.6 Effectiveness of D ∗ with Different Values of ∗ 247 4.7.3.7 D ∗ Versus Other Fault Localization Techniques 248 4.7.3.8 Programs with Multiple Bugs 251 4.7.3.9 Discussion 255 4.8 Conclusion 261 Notes 262 References 263 5 Statistics-Based Techniques for Software Fault Localization 271 Zhenyu Zhang and W. Eric Wong 5.1 Introduction 271 5.1.1 Tarantula 272 5.1.2 How It Works 272 5.2 Working with Statements 274 5.2.1 Techniques Under the Same Problem Settings 275 5.2.2 Statistical Variances 275 5.3 Working with Non-statements 283 5.3.1 Predicate: a Popular Trend 283 5.3.2 BPEL: a Sample Application 285 5.4 Purifying the Input 286 5.4.1 Coincidental Correctness Issue 286 5.4.2 Class Balance Consideration 287 5.5 Reinterpreting the Output 288 5.5.1 Revealing Fault Number 288 5.5.2 Noise Reduction 291 Notes 292 References 293 6 Machine Learning-Based Techniques for Software Fault Localization 297 W. Eric Wong 6.1 Introduction 297 6.2 BP Neural Network-Based Fault Localization 298 6.2.1 Fault Localization with a BP Neural Network 298 6.2.2 Reduce the Number of Candidate Suspicious Statements 302 6.3 RBF Neural Network-Based Fault Localization 304 6.3.1 RBF Neural Networks 304 6.3.2 Methodology 305 6.3.2.1 Fault Localization Using an RBF Neural Network 306 6.3.2.2 Training of the RBF Neural Network 307 6.3.2.3 Definition of a Weighted Bit-Comparison-Based Dissimilarity 309 6.4 C4.5 Decision Tree-Based Fault Localization 309 6.4.1 Category-Partition for Rule Induction 309 6.4.2 Rule Induction Algorithms 310 6.4.3 Statement Ranking Strategies 310 6.4.3.1 Revisiting Tarantula 310 6.4.3.2 Ranking Statements Based on C4.5 Rules 312 6.5 Applying Simulated Annealing with Statement Pruning for an SBFL Formula 314 6.6 Conclusion 317 Notes 317 References 317 7 Data Mining-Based Techniques for Software Fault Localization 321 Peggy Cellier, Mireille Ducassé, Sébastien Ferré, Olivier Ridoux, and W. Eric Wong 7.1 Introduction 321 7.2 Formal Concept Analysis and Association Rules 324 7.2.1 Formal Concept Analysis 325 7.2.2 Association Rules 327 7.3 Data Mining for Fault Localization 329 7.3.1 Failure Rules 329 7.3.2 Failure Lattice 331 7.4 The Failure Lattice for Multiple Faults 336 7.4.1 Dependencies Between Faults 336 7.4.2 Example 341 7.5 Discussion 342 7.5.1 The Structure of the Execution Traces 342 7.5.2 Union Model 343 7.5.3 Intersection Model 343 7.5.4 Nearest Neighbor 343 7.5.5 Delta Debugging 344 7.5.6 From the Trace Context to the Failure Context 344 7.5.7 The Structure of Association Rules 345 7.5.8 Multiple Faults 345 7.6 Fault Localization Using N-gram Analysis 346 7.6.1 Background 347 7.6.1.1 Execution Sequence 347 7.6.1.2 N-gram Analysis 347 7.6.1.3 Linear Execution Blocks 349 7.6.1.4 Association Rule Mining 349 7.6.2 Methodology 350 7.6.3 Conclusion 353 7.7 Fault Localization for GUI Software Using N-gram Analysis 353 7.7.1 Background 354 7.7.1.1 Representation of the GUI and Its Operations 354 7.7.1.2 Event Handler 356 7.7.1.3 N-gram 356 7.7.2 Association Rule Mining 357 7.7.3 Methodology 357 7.7.3.1 General Approach 358 7.7.3.2 N-gram Fault Localization Algorithm 358 7.8 Conclusion 360 Notes 361 References 361 8 Information Retrieval-Based Techniques for Software Fault Localization 365 Xin Xia and David Lo 8.1 Introduction 365 8.2 General IR-Based Fault Localization Process 368 8.3 Fundamental Information Retrieval Techniques for Software Fault Localization 369 8.3.1 Vector Space Model 369 8.3.2 Topic Modeling 370 8.3.3 Word Embedding 371 8.4 Evaluation Metrics 372 8.4.1 Top-k Prediction Accuracy 372 8.4.2 Mean Reciprocal Rank (MRR) 373 8.4.3 Mean Average Precision (MAP) 373 8.5 Techniques for Different Scenarios 374 8.5.1 Text of Current Bug Report Only 374 8.5.1.1 VSM Variants 374 8.5.1.2 Topic Modeling 375 8.5.2 Text and History 376 8.5.2.1 VSM Variants 376 8.5.2.2 Topic Modeling 378 8.5.2.3 Deep Learning 378 8.5.3 Text and Stack/Execution Traces 379 8.6 Empirical Studies 380 8.7 Miscellaneous 383 8.8 Conclusion 385 Notes 385 References 386 9 Model-Based Techniques for Software Fault Localization 393 Birgit Hofer, Franz Wotawa, Wolfgang Mayer, and Markus Stumptner 9.1 Introduction 393 9.2 Basic Definitions and Algorithms 395 9.2.1 Algorithms for MBD 401 9.3 Modeling for MBD 404 9.3.1 The Value-Based Model 405 9.3.2 The Dependency-Based Model 409 9.3.3 Approximation Models for Debugging 413 9.3.4 Other Modeling Approaches 416 9.4 Application Areas 417 9.5 Hybrid Approaches 418 9.6 Conclusions 419 Notes 420 References 420 10 Software Fault Localization in Spreadsheets 425 Birgit Hofer and Franz Wotawa 10.1 Motivation 425 10.2 Definition of the Spreadsheet Language 427 10.3 Cones 430 10.4 Spectrum-Based Fault Localization 431 10.5 Model-Based Spreadsheet Debugging 435 10.6 Repair Approaches 440 10.7 Checking Approaches 443 10.8 Testing 445 10.9 Conclusion 446 Notes 446 References 447 11 Theoretical Aspects of Software Fault Localization 451 Xiaoyuan Xie and W. Eric Wong 11.1 Introduction 451 11.2 A Model-Based Hybrid Analysis 452 11.2.1 The Model Program Segment 452 11.2.2 Important Findings 454 11.2.3 Discussion 454 11.3 A Set-Based Pure Theoretical Framework 455 11.3.1 Definitions and Theorems 455 11.3.2 Evaluation 457 11.3.3 The Maximality Among All Investigated Formulas 461 11.4 A Generalized Study 462 11.4.1 Spectral Coordinate for SBFL 462 11.4.2 Generalized Maximal and Greatest Formula in F 464 11.5 About the Assumptions 465 11.5.1 Omission Fault and 100% Coverage 465 11.5.2 Tie-Breaking Scheme 467 11.5.3 Multiple Faults 467 11.5.4 Some Plausible Causes for the Inconsistence Between Empirical and Theoretical Analyses 468 Notes 469 References 470 12 Software Fault Localization for Programs with Multiple Bugs 473 Ruizhi Gao, W. Eric Wong, and Rui Abreu 12.1 Introduction 473 12.2 One-Bug-at-a-Time 474 12.3 Two Techniques Proposed by Jones et al. 475 12.3.1 J1: Clustering Based on Profiles and Fault Localization Results 476 12.3.1.1 Clustering Profile-Based Behavior Models 476 12.3.1.2 Using Fault Localization to Stop Clustering 478 12.3.1.3 Using Fault Localization Clustering to Refine Clusters 479 12.3.2 J2: Clustering Based on Fault Localization Results 480 12.4 Localization of Multiple Bugs Using Algorithms from Integer Linear Programming 481 12.5 MSeer: an Advanced Fault Localization Technique for Locating Multiple Bugs in Parallel 483 12.5.1 MSeer 485 12.5.1.1 Representation of Failed Test Cases 485 12.5.1.2 Revised Kendall tau Distance 486 12.5.1.3 Clustering 488 12.5.1.4 MSeer: a Technique for Locating Multiple Bugs in Parallel 494 12.5.2 A Running Example 496 12.5.3 Case Studies 499 12.5.3.1 Subject Programs and Data Collections 499 12.5.3.2 Evaluation of Effectiveness and Efficiency 501 12.5.3.3 Results 503 12.5.4 Discussions 510 12.5.4.1 Using Different Fault Localization Techniques 510 12.5.4.2 Apply MSeer to Programs with a Single Bug 510 12.5.4.3 Distance Metrics 512 12.5.4.4 The Importance of Estimating the Number of Clusters and Assigning Initial Medoids 514 12.6 Spectrum-Based Reasoning for Fault Localization 514 12.6.1 Barinel 515 12.6.2 Results 517 12.7 Other Studies 518 12.8 Conclusion 520 Notes 521 References 522 13 Emerging Aspects of Software Fault Localization 529 T.H. Tse, David Lo, Alex Gorce, Michael Perscheid, Robert Hirschfeld, and W. Eric Wong 13.1 Introduction 529 13.2 Application of the Scientific Method to Fault Localization 530 13.2.1 Scientific Debugging 531 13.2.2 Identifying and Assigning Bug Reports to Developers 532 13.2.3 Using Debuggers in Fault Localization 534 13.2.4 Conclusion 538 13.3 Fault Localization in the Absence of Test Oracles by Semi-proving of Metamorphic Relations 538 13.3.1 Metamorphic Testing and Metamorphic Relations 539 13.3.2 The Semi-proving Methodology 541 13.3.2.1 Semi-proving by Symbolic Evaluation 541 13.3.2.2 Semi-proving as a Fault Localization Technique 542 13.3.3 The Need to Go Beyond Symbolic Evaluation 543 13.3.4 Initial Empirical Study 543 13.3.5 Detailed Illustrative Examples 544 13.3.5.1 Fault Localization Example Related to Predicate Statement 544 13.3.5.2 Fault Localization Example Related to Faulty Statement 548 13.3.5.3 Fault Localization Example Related to Missing Path 552 13.3.5.4 Fault Localization Example Related to Loop 556 13.3.6 Comparisons with Related Work 558 13.3.7 Conclusion 560 13.4 Automated Prediction of Fault Localization Effectiveness 560 13.4.1 Overview of PEFA 561 13.4.2 Model Learning 564 13.4.3 Effectiveness Prediction 564 13.4.4 Conclusion 564 13.5 Integrating Fault Localization into Automated Test Generation Tools 565 13.5.1 Localization in the Context of Automated Test Generation 566 13.5.2 Automated Test Generation Tools Supporting Localization 567 13.5.3 Antifragile Tests and Localization 568 13.5.4 Conclusion 568 Notes 569 References 569 Index 581
£85.46
John Wiley & Sons Inc A Comprehensive Guide to 5G Security
Book SynopsisThe first comprehensive guide to the design and implementation of security in 5G wireless networks and devices Security models for 3G and 4G networks based on Universal SIM cards worked very well. But they are not fully applicable to the unique security requirements of 5G networks. 5G will face additional challenges due to increased user privacy concerns, new trust and service models and requirements to support IoT and mission-critical applications. While multiple books already exist on 5G, this is the first to focus exclusively on security for the emerging 5G ecosystem. 5G networks are not only expected to be faster, but provide a backbone for many new services, such as IoT and the Industrial Internet. Those services will provide connectivity for everything from autonomous cars and UAVs to remote health monitoring through body-attached sensors, smart logistics through item tracking to remote diagnostics and preventive maintenance of equipment. Most services will be integrated with Table of ContentsThe Editors xvii About the Contributors xxi Foreword xxxiii Preface xxxv Acknowledgements xli Part I 5G Security Overview 1 1 Evolution of Cellular Systems 3Shahriar Shahabuddin, Sadiqur Rahaman, Faisal Rehman, Ijaz Ahmad, and Zaheer Khan 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Early Development 4 1.3 First Generation Cellular Systems 6 1.3.1 Advanced Mobile Phone Service 7 1.3.2 Security in 1G 7 1.4 Second Generation Cellular Systems 8 1.4.1 Global System for Mobile Communications 8 1.4.2 GSM Network Architecture 9 1.4.3 Code Division Multiple Access 10 1.4.4 Security in 2G 10 1.4.5 Security in GSM 11 1.4.5.1 IMSI 11 1.4.5.2 Ki 12 1.4.5.3 A3 Algorithm 12 1.4.5.4 A8 Algorithm 13 1.4.5.5 COMP128 14 1.4.5.6 A5 Algorithm 14 1.4.6 Security in IS]95 14 1.5 Third Generation Cellular Systems 15 1.5.1 CDMA 2000 15 1.5.2 UMTS WCDMA 15 1.5.3 UMTS Network Architecture 16 1.5.4 HSPA 17 1.5.5 Security in 3G 17 1.5.6 Security in CDMA2000 17 1.5.7 Security in UMTS 18 1.6 Cellular Systems beyond 3G 20 1.6.1 HSPA+ 20 1.6.2 Mobile WiMAX 20 1.6.3 LTE 21 1.6.3.1 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) 21 1.6.3.2 SC]FDE and SC]FDMA 21 1.6.3.3 Multi]antenna Technique 21 1.6.4 LTE Network Architecture 21 1.7 Fourth Generation Cellular Systems 22 1.7.1 Key Technologies of 4G 23 1.7.1.1 Enhanced MINO 23 1.7.1.2 Cooperative Multipoint Transmission and Reception for LTE]Advanced 23 1.7.1.3 Spectrum and Bandwidth Management 24 1.7.1.4 Carrier Aggregation 24 1.7.1.5 Relays 24 1.7.2 Network Architecture 24 1.7.3 Beyond 3G and 4G Cellular Systems Security 25 1.7.4 LTE Security Model 26 1.7.5 Security in WiMAX 26 1.8 Conclusion 27 References 28 2 5G Mobile Networks: Requirements, Enabling Technologies, and Research Activities 31Van]Giang Nguyen, Anna Brunstrom, Karl]Johan Grinnemo, and Javid Taheri 2.1 Introduction 31 2.1.1 What is 5G? 31 2.1.1.1 From a System Architecture Perspective 32 2.1.1.2 From the Spectrum Perspective 32 2.1.1.3 From a User and Customer Perspective 32 2.1.2 Typical Use Cases 32 2.2 5G Requirements 33 2.2.1 High Data Rate and Ultra Low Latency 34 2.2.2 Massive Connectivity and Seamless Mobility 35 2.2.3 Reliability and High Availability 35 2.2.4 Flexibility and Programmability 36 2.2.5 Energy, Cost and Spectrum Efficiency 36 2.2.6 Security and Privacy 36 2.3 5G Enabling Technologies 37 2.3.1 5G Radio Access Network 38 2.3.1.1 mmWave Communication 38 2.3.1.2 Massive MIMO 38 2.3.1.3 Ultra]Dense Small Cells 39 2.3.1.4 M2M and D2D Communications 40 2.3.1.5 Cloud]based Radio Access Network 42 2.3.1.6 Mobile Edge and Fog Computing 42 2.3.2 5G Mobile Core Network 44 2.3.2.1 Software Defined Networking 44 2.3.2.2 Network Function Virtualization 44 2.3.2.3 Cloud Computing 46 2.3.3 G End]to]End System 46 2.3.3.1 Network Slicing 46 2.3.3.2 Management and Orchestration 47 2.4 5G Standardization Activities 48 2.4.1 ITU Activities 48 2.4.1.1 ITU]R 49 2.4.1.2 ITU]T 49 2.4.2 3GPP Activities 49 2.4.2.1 Pre]5G Phase 49 2.4.2.2 5G Phase I 50 2.4.2.3 5G Phase II 50 2.4.3 ETSI Activities 50 2.4.4 IEEE Activities 51 2.4.5 IETF Activities 52 2.5 5G Research Communities 52 2.5.1 European 5G Related Activities 52 2.5.1.1 5G Research in EU FP7 52 2.5.1.2 5G Research in EU H2020 52 2.5.1.3 5G Research in Celtic]Plus 53 2.5.2 Asian 5G Related Activities 53 2.5.2.1 South Korea: 5G Forum 53 2.5.2.2 Japan: 5GMF Forum 54 2.5.2.3 China: IMT]2020 5G Promotion Group 54 2.5.3 American 5G Related Activities 54 2.6 Conclusion 55 2.7 Acknowledgement 55 References 55 3 Mobile Networks Security Landscape 59Ahmed Bux Abro 3.1 Introduction 59 3.2 Mobile Networks Security Landscape 59 3.2.1 Security Threats and Protection for 1G 61 3.2.2 Security Threats and Protection for 2G 61 3.2.3 Security Threats and Protection for 3G 63 3.2.4 Security Threats and Protection for 4G 63 3.2.4.1 LTE UE (User Equipment) Domain Security 64 3.2.4.2 LTE (Remote Access Network) Domain Security 65 3.2.4.3 LTE Core Network Domain Security 65 3.2.4.4 Security Threat Analysis for 4G 65 3.2.5 Security Threats and Protection for 5G 66 3.2.5.1 Next Generation Threat Landscape for 5G 68 3.2.5.2 IoT Threat Landscape 68 3.2.5.3 5G Evolved Security Model 68 3.2.5.4 5G Security Threat Analysis 69 3.3 Mobile Security Lifecycle Functions 70 3.3.1 Secure Device Management 71 3.3.2 Mobile OS and App Patch Management 71 3.3.3 Security Threat Analysis and Assessment 71 3.3.4 Security Monitoring 72 3.4 Conclusion 73 References 73 4 Design Principles for 5G Security 75Ijaz Ahmad, Madhusanka Liyanage, Shahriar Shahabuddin, Mika Ylianttila, and Andrei Gurtov 4.1 Introduction 75 4.2 Overviews of Security Recommendations and Challenges 76 4.2.1 Security Recommendations by ITU]T 77 4.2.2 Security Threats and Recommendations by NGMN 78 4.2.3 Other Security Challenges 79 4.2.3.1 Security Challenges in the Access Network 79 4.2.3.2 DoS Attacks 79 4.2.3.3 Security Challenges in the Control Layer or Core Network 80 4.3 Novel Technologies for 5G Security 81 4.3.1 5G Security Leveraging NFV 82 4.3.2 Network Security Leveraging SDN 83 4.3.3 Security Challenges in SDN 84 4.3.3.1 Application Layer 84 4.3.3.2 Controller Layer 85 4.3.3.3 Infrastructure Layer 86 4.3.4 Security Solutions for SDN 86 4.3.4.1 Application Plane Security 86 4.3.4.2 Control Plane Security 87 4.3.4.3 Data Plane Security Solutions 87 4.4 Security in SDN]based Mobile Networks 88 4.4.1 Data Link Security 88 4.4.2 Control Channels Security 89 4.4.3 Traffic Monitoring 91 4.4.4 Access Control 91 4.4.5 Network Resilience 91 4.4.6 Security Systems and Firewalls 92 4.4.7 Network Security Automation 92 4.5 Conclusions and Future Directions 94 4.6 Acknowledgement 95 References 95 5 Cyber Security Business Models in 5G 99Julius Francis Gomes, Marika Iivari, Petri Ahokangas, Lauri Isotalo, Bengt Sahlin, and Jan Melén 5.1 Introduction 99 5.2 The Context of Cyber Security Businesses 100 5.2.1 Types of Cyber Threat 101 5.2.2 The Cost of Cyber]Attacks 102 5.3 The Business Model Approach 103 5.3.1 The 4C Typology of the ICT Business Model 104 5.3.2 Business Models in the Context of Cyber Preparedness 105 5.4 The Business Case of Cyber Security in the Era of 5G 106 5.4.1 The Users and Issues of Cyber Security in 5G 108 5.4.2 Scenarios for 5G Security Provisioning 109 5.4.3 Delivering Cyber Security in 5G 110 5.5 Business Model Options in 5G Cyber Security 112 5.6 Acknowledgment 114 References 114 Part II 5G Network Security 117 6 Physical Layer Security 119Simone Soderi, Lorenzo Mucchi, Matti Hämäläinen, Alessandro Piva, and Jari Iinatti 6.1 Introduction 119 6.1.1 Physical Layer Security in 5G Networks 120 6.1.2 Related Work 121 6.1.3 Motivation 121 6.2 WBPLSec System Model 123 6.2.1 Transmitter 124 6.2.2 Jamming Receiver 126 6.2.3 Secrecy Metrics 126 6.2.4 Secrecy Capacity of WBPLSec 128 6.2.5 Secrecy Capacity of iJAM 129 6.3 Outage Probability of Secrecy Capacity of a Jamming Receiver 131 6.3.1 Simulation Scenario for Secrecy Capacity 134 6.4 WBPLSec Applied to 5G networks 136 6.5 Conclusions 138 References 139 7 5G]WLAN Security 143Satish Anamalamudi, Abdur Rashid Sangi, Mohammed Alkatheiri, Fahad T. Bin Muhaya, and Chang Liu 7.1 Chapter Overview 143 7.2 Introduction to WiFi]5G Networks Interoperability 143 7.2.1 WiFi (Wireless Local Area Network) 143 7.2.2 Interoperability of WiFi with 5G Networks 144 7.2.3 WiFi Security 144 7.3 Overview of Network Architecture for WiFi]5G Networks Interoperability 146 7.3.1 MAC Layer 147 7.3.2 Network Layer 147 7.3.3 Transport Layer 148 7.3.4 Application Layer 149 7.4 5G]WiFi Security Challenges 150 7.4.1 Security Challenges with Respect to a Large Number of Device Connectivity 151 7.4.2 Security Challenges in 5G Networks and WiFi 151 7.5 Security Consideration for Architectural Design of WiFi]5G Networks 156 7.5.1 User and Device Identity Confidentiality 156 7.5.2 Integrity 156 7.5.3 Mutual Authentication and Key Management 157 7.6 LiFi Networks 158 7.7 Introduction to LiFi]5G Networks Interoperability 159 7.8 5G]LiFi Security Challenges 160 7.8.1 Security Challenges with Respect to a Large Number of Device Connectivity 160 7.8.2 Security Challenges in 5G Networks and LiFi 160 7.9 Security Consideration for Architectural Design of LiFi]5G Networks 160 7.10 Conclusion and Future Work 161 References 161 8 Safety of 5G Network Physical Infrastructures 165Rui Travanca and João André 8.1 Introduction 165 8.2 Historical Development 168 8.2.1 Typology 168 8.2.2 Codes 170 8.2.3 Outlook 170 8.3 Structural Design Philosophy 171 8.3.1 Basis 171 8.3.2 Actions 174 8.3.3 Structural Analysis 179 8.3.4 Steel Design Verifications 180 8.3.4.1 Ultimate Limit States 180 8.3.4.2 Serviceability Limit States 181 8.4 Survey of Problems 181 8.4.1 General 181 8.4.2 Design Failures 182 8.4.3 Maintenance Failures 183 8.4.4 Vandalism or Terrorism Failures 186 8.5 Opportunities and Recommendations 188 8.6 Acknowledgement 190 References 191 9 Customer Edge Switching: A Security Framework for 5G 195Hammad Kabir, Raimo Kantola, and Jesus Llorente Santos 9.1 Introduction 195 9.2 State]of]the]art in Mobile Networks Security 197 9.2.1 Mobile Network Challenges and Principles of Security Framework 200 9.2.2 Trust Domains and Trust Processing 202 9.3 CES Security Framework 203 9.3.1 DNS to Initiate Communication 205 9.3.2 CETP Policy]based Communication 206 9.3.3 Policy Architecture 208 9.3.4 CES Security Mechanisms 209 9.3.5 Realm Gateway 210 9.3.6 RGW Security Mechanisms 211 9.3.6.1 Name Server Classification and Allocation Model 212 9.3.6.2 Preventing DNS Abuse 212 9.3.6.3 Bot]Detection Algorithm 213 9.3.6.4 TCP]Splice 213 9.4 Evaluation of CES Security 213 9.4.1 Evaluating the CETP Policy]based Communication 214 9.4.1.1 Security Testing 216 9.4.1.2 Outcomes of the Security Testing 216 9.4.2 Evaluation of RGW Security 217 9.5 Deployment in 5G Networks 222 9.5.1 Use Case 1: Mobile Broadband 224 9.5.1.1 Deployment and Operations 224 9.5.1.2 Security Benefits 224 9.5.1.3 Scalability 225 9.5.1.4 Reliability 225 9.5.2 Use Case 2: Corporate Gateway 225 9.5.2.1 Deployment and Operations 225 9.5.2.2 Security Benefits 226 9.5.2.3 Scalability 226 9.5.2.4 Reliability 226 9.5.3 Use Case 3: National CERT Centric Trust Domain 226 9.5.3.1 Deployment and Operations 226 9.5.3.2 Security Benefits 227 9.5.3.3 Scalability 227 9.5.3.4 Reliability 227 9.5.4 Use Case 4: Industrial Internet for Road Traffic and Transport 227 9.5.4.1 Deployment and Operations 227 9.5.4.2 Security Benefits 228 9.5.4.3 Scalability 228 9.5.4.4 Reliability 228 9.6 Conclusion 228 References 230 10 Software Defined Security Monitoring in 5G Networks 231Madhusanka Liyanage, Ijaz Ahmad, Jude Okwuibe, Edgardo Montes de Oca, Mai Hoang Long, Oscar Lopez Perez, and Mikel Uriarte Itzazelaia 10.1 Introduction 231 10.2 Existing Monitoring Techniques 232 10.3 Limitations on Current Monitoring Techniques 233 10.4 Use of Monitoring in 5G 234 10.5 Software]Defined Monitoring Architecture 235 10.6 Expected Advantages of Software Defined Monitoring 238 10.7 Expected Challenges in Software Defined Monitoring 240 10.8 Conclusion 242 References 243 Part III 5G Device and User Security 245 11 IoT Security 247Mehrnoosh Monshizadeh, and Vikramajeet Khatri 11.1 Introduction 247 11.2 Related Work 248 11.3 Literature Overview and Research Motivation 249 11.3.1 IoT Devices, Services and Attacks on Them 250 11.3.2 Research Motivation 253 11.4 Distributed Security Platform 254 11.4.1 Robot Data Classification 254 11.4.2 Robot Attack Classification 255 11.4.3 Robot Security Platform 256 11.4.3.1 Robot Section 257 11.4.3.2 Mobile Network Section 257 11.5 Mobile Cloud Robot Security Scenarios 259 11.5.1 Robot with SIMcard 259 11.5.2 SIMless Robot 260 11.5.3 Robot Attack 263 11.5.4 Robot Communication 263 11.6 Conclusion 263 References 265 12 User Privacy, Identity and Trust 267Tanesh Kumar, Madhusanka Liyanage, Ijaz Ahmad, An Braeken, and Mika Ylianttila 12.1 Introduction 267 12.2 Background 268 12.3 User Privacy 269 12.3.1 Data Privacy 269 12.3.2 Location Privacy 271 12.3.3 Identity Privacy 272 12.4 Identity Management 273 12.5 Trust Models 274 12.6 Discussion 277 12.7 Conclusion 278 References 279 13 5G Positioning: Security and Privacy Aspects 281Elena Simona Lohan, Anette Alén]Savikko, Liang Chen, Kimmo Järvinen, Helena Leppäkoski, Heidi Kuusniemi, and Päivi Korpisaari 13.1 Introduction 281 13.2 Outdoor versus Indoor Positioning Technologies 283 13.3 Passive versus Active Positioning 283 13.4 Brief Overview of 5G Positioning Mechanisms 285 13.5 Survey of Security Threats and Privacy Issues in 5G Positioning 291 13.5.1 Security Threats in 5G Positioning 291 13.5.1.1 Security Threats Affecting Several or All Players 291 13.5.1.2 Security Threats Affecting LISP 292 13.5.1.3 Security Threats Affecting LBSP 293 13.5.1.4 Security Threats Affecting the 5G User Device or LIC 293 13.6 Main Privacy Concerns 294 13.7 Passive versus Active Positioning Concepts 295 13.8 Physical] Layer Based Security Enhancements Mechanisms for Positioning in 5G 296 13.8.1 Reliability Monitoring and Outlier Detection Mechanisms 296 13.8.2 Detection, Location and Estimation of Interference Signals 297 13.8.3 Backup Systems 298 13.9 Enhancing Trustworthiness 299 13.10 Cryptographic Techniques for Security and Privacy of Positioning 299 13.10.1 Cryptographic Authentication in Positioning 300 13.10.2 Cryptographic Distance]Bounding 301 13.10.3 Cryptographic Techniques for Privacy]Preserving Location]based Services 303 13.11 Legislation on User Location Privacy in 5G 304 13.11.1 EU Policy and Legal Framework 304 13.11.2 Legal Aspects Related to the Processing of Location Data 306 13.11.3 Privacy Protection by Design and Default 306 13.11.4 Security Protection 307 13.11.5 A Closer Look at the e]Privacy Directive 307 13.11.6 Summary of EU Legal Instruments 308 13.11.7 International Issues 308 13.11.8 Challenges and Future Scenarios in Legal Frameworks and Policy 309 13.12 Landscape of the European and International Projects related to Secure Positioning 311 References 312 Part IV 5G Cloud and Virtual Network Security 321 14 Mobile Virtual Network Operators (MVNO) Security 323Mehrnoosh Monshizadeh and Vikramajeet Khatri 14.1 Introduction 323 14.2 Related Work 324 14.3 Cloudification of the Network Operators 325 14.4 MVNO Security 326 14.4.1 Data Security in TaaS 327 14.4.2 Hypervisor and VM Security in TaaS 328 14.4.2.1 SDN Security in TaaS 329 14.4.2.2 NFV Security in TaaS 331 14.4.2.3 OPNFV Security 332 14.4.3 Application Security in TaaS 333 14.4.4 Summary 334 14.4.5 MVNO Security Benchmark 335 14.5 TaaS Deployment Security 338 14.5.1 IaaS 338 14.5.2 PaaS 340 14.5.3 SaaS 340 14.6 Future Directions 340 14.7 Conclusion 341 References 342 15 NFV and NFV]based Security Services 347Wenjing Chu 15.1 Introduction 347 15.2 5G, NFV and Security 347 15.3 A Brief Introduction to NFV 348 15.4 NFV, SDN, and a Telco Cloud 351 15.5 Common NFV Drivers 353 15.5.1 Technology Curve 353 15.5.2 Opportunity Cost and Competitive Landscape 353 15.5.3 Horizontal Network Slicing 354 15.5.4 Multi]Tenancy 354 15.5.5 Rapid Service Delivery 354 15.5.6 XaaS Models 354 15.5.7 One Cloud 355 15.6 NFV Security: Challenges and Opportunities 355 15.6.1 VNF Security Lifecycle and Trust 355 15.6.2 VNF Security in Operation 358 15.6.3 Multi]Tenancy and XaaS 359 15.6.4 OPNFV and Openstack: Open Source Projects for NFV 360 15.7 NFV]based Security Services 364 15.7.1 NFV]based Network Security 365 15.7.1.1 Virtual Security Appliances 365 15.7.1.2 Distributed Network Security Services 366 15.7.1.3 Network Security as a Service 366 15.7.2 Policy]based Security Services 366 15.7.2.1 Group]based Policy 367 15.7.2.2 Openstack Congress 368 15.7.3 Machine Learning for NFV]based Security Services 369 15.8 Conclusions 370 References 370 16 Cloud and MEC Security 373Jude Okwuibe, Madhusanka Liyanage, Ijaz Ahmed, and Mika Ylianttila 16.1 Introduction 373 16.2 Cloud Computing in 5G Networks 374 16.2.1 Overview and History of Cloud Computing 375 16.2.2 Cloud Computing Architecture 376 16.2.3 Cloud Deployment Models 377 16.2.4 Cloud Service Models 378 16.2.5 5G Cloud Computing Architecture 379 16.2.6 Use Cases/Scenarios of Cloud Computing in 5G 380 16.3 MEC in 5G Networks 381 16.3.1 Overview of MEC Computing 381 16.3.2 MEC in 5G 383 16.3.3 Use Cases of MEC Computing in 5G 384 16.4 Security Challenges in 5G Cloud 385 16.4.1 Virtualization Security 385 16.4.2 Cyber]Physical System (CPS) Security 386 16.4.3 Secure and Private Data Computation 386 16.4.4 Cloud Intrusion 387 16.4.5 Access Control 387 16.5 Security Challenges in 5G MEC 388 16.5.1 Denial of Service (DoS) Attack 389 16.5.2 Man]in]the]Middle (MitM) 389 16.5.3 Inconsistent Security Policies 389 16.5.4 VM Manipulation 390 16.5.5 Privacy Leakage 390 16.6 Security Architectures for 5G Cloud and MEC 391 16.6.1 Centralized Security Architectures 391 16.6.2 SDN]based Cloud Security Systems 392 16.7 5GMEC, Cloud Security Research and Standardizations 392 16.8 Conclusions 394 References 394 17 Regulatory Impact on 5G Security and Privacy 399Jukka Salo and Madhusanka Liyanage 17.1 Introduction 399 17.2 Regulatory Objectives for Security and Privacy 401 17.2.1 Generic Objectives 401 17.3 Legal Framework for Security and Privacy 402 17.3.1 General Framework 402 17.3.2 Legal Framework for Security and Privacy in Cloud Computing 403 17.3.3 Legal Framework for Security and Privacy in Software Defined Networking and Network Function Virtualization 405 17.4 Security and Privacy Issues in New 5G Technologies 405 17.4.1 Security and Privacy Issues in Cloud Computing 405 17.4.2 Security and Privacy Issues in Network Functions Virtualization 407 17.4.3 Security and Privacy Issues in Software Defined Networking (SDN) 409 17.4.4 Summary of Security and Privacy Issues in the Context of Technologies under Study (Clouds, NFV, SDN) 410 17.5 Relevance Assessment of Security and Privacy Issues for Regulation 411 17.6 Analysis of Potential Regulatory Approaches 412 17.7 Summary of Issues and Impact of New Technologies on Security and Privacy Regulation 413 References 417 Index
£102.56
John Wiley & Sons Inc LithiumSulfur Batteries
Book SynopsisA guide to lithium sulfur batteries that explores their materials, electrochemical mechanisms and modelling and includes recent scientific developments Lithium Sulfur Batteries (Li-S) offers a comprehensive examination of Li-S batteries from the viewpoint of the materials used in their construction, the underlying electrochemical mechanisms and how this translates into the characteristics of Li-S batteries. The authors noted experts in the field outline the approaches and techniques required to model Li-S batteries. Lithium Sulfur Batteries reviews the application of Li-S batteries for commercial use and explores many broader issues including the development of battery management systems to control the unique characteristics of Li-S batteries. The authors include information onsulfur cathodes, electrolytes and other components used in making Li-S batteries and examine the role of lithium sulfide, the shuttle mechanism and its effects, and degradaTable of ContentsPreface xiii Part I Materials 1 1 Electrochemical Theory and Physics 3Geraint Minton 1.1 Overview of a LiS cell 3 1.2 The Development of the Cell Voltage 5 1.2.1 Using the Electrochemical Potential 7 1.2.2 Electrochemical Reactions 10 1.2.3 The Electric Double Layer 13 1.2.4 Reaction Equilibrium 15 1.2.5 A Finite Electrolyte 17 1.2.6 The Need for a Second Electrode 17 1.3 Allowing a Current to Flow 19 1.3.1 The Reaction Overpotential 20 1.3.2 The Transport Overpotential 21 1.3.3 General Comments on the Overpotentials 22 1.4 Additional Processes Which Define the Behavior of a LiS Cell 22 1.4.1 Multiple Electrochemical Reactions at One Surface 22 1.4.2 Chemical Reactions 23 1.4.3 Species Solubility and Indirect Reaction Effects 25 1.4.4 Transport Limitations in the Cathode 25 1.4.5 The Active Surface Area 26 1.4.6 Precipitate Accumulation 27 1.4.7 Electrolyte Viscosity, Conductivity, and Species Transport 27 1.4.8 Side Reactions and SEI Formation at the Anode 28 1.4.9 Anode Morphological Changes 29 1.4.10 Polysulfide Shuttle 29 1.5 Summary 30 References 30 2 Sulfur Cathodes 33Holger Althues, Susanne Dörfler, Sören Thieme, Patrick Strubel and Stefan Kaskel 2.1 Cathode Design Criteria 33 2.1.1 Overview of Cathode Components and Composition 33 2.1.2 Cathode Design: Role of Electrolyte in Sulfur Cathode Chemistry 34 2.1.3 Cathode Design: Impact on Energy Density on Cell Level 35 2.1.4 Cathode Design: Impact on Cycle Life and Self-discharge 36 2.1.5 Cathode Design: Impact on Rate Capability 37 2.2 Cathode Materials 37 2.2.1 Properties of Sulfur 37 2.2.2 Porous and Nanostructured Carbons as Conductive Cathode Scaffolds 39 2.2.2.1 Graphite-Like Carbons 39 2.2.2.2 Synthesis of Graphite-like Carbons 39 2.2.2.3 Carbon Black 40 2.2.2.4 Activated Carbons 41 2.2.2.5 Carbide-Derived Carbon 42 2.2.2.6 Hard-Template-Assisted Carbon Synthesis 42 2.2.2.7 Carbon Surface Chemistry 43 2.2.3 Carbon/Sulfur Composite Cathodes 43 2.2.3.1 Microporous Carbons 44 2.2.3.2 Mesoporous Carbons 45 2.2.3.3 Macroporous Carbons and Nanotube–based Cathode Systems 46 2.2.3.4 Hierarchical Mesoporous Carbons 47 2.2.3.5 Hierarchical Microporous Carbons 49 2.2.3.6 Hollow Carbon Spheres 50 2.2.3.7 Graphene 51 2.2.4 Retention of LiPS by Surface Modifications and Coating 51 2.2.4.1 Metal Oxides as Adsorbents for Lithium Polysulfides 56 2.3 Cathode Processing 57 2.3.1 Methods for C/S Composite Preparation 57 2.3.2 Wet (Organic, Aqueous) and Dry Coating for Cathode Production 58 2.3.3 Alternative Cathode Support Concepts (Carbon Current Collectors, Binder-free Electrodes) 59 2.3.4 Processing Perspective for Carbons, Binders, and Additives 59 2.4 Conclusions 59 References 61 3 Electrolyte for Lithium–Sulfur Batteries 71Marzieh Barghamadi, Mustafa Musameh, Thomas Rüther, Anand I. Bhatt, Anthony F. Hollenkamp and Adam S. Best 3.1 The Case for Better Batteries 71 3.2 Li–S Battery: Origins and Principles 72 3.3 Solubility of Species and Electrochemistry 74 3.4 Liquid Electrolyte Solutions 75 3.5 Modified Liquid Electrolyte Solutions 91 3.5.1 Variation in Electrolyte Salt Concentration 91 3.5.2 Mixed Organic–Ionic Liquid Electrolyte Solutions 91 3.5.3 Ionic Liquid Electrolyte Solutions 93 3.6 Solid and Solidified Electrolyte Configurations 96 3.6.1 Polymer Electrolytes 96 3.6.1.1 Absorbed Liquid/Gelled Electrolyte 96 3.6.1.2 Solid Polymer Electrolytes 98 3.6.2 Non-polymer Solid Electrolytes 100 3.7 Challenges of the Cathode and Solvent for Device Engineering 102 3.7.1 The Cathode Loading Challenge 102 3.7.2 Cathode Wetting Challenge 104 3.8 Concluding Remarks and Outlook 108 References 111 4 Anode–Electrolyte Interface 121Mark Wild 4.1 Introduction 121 4.2 SEI Formation 121 4.3 Anode Morphology 122 4.4 Polysulfide Shuttle 123 4.5 Electrolyte Additives for Stable SEI Formation 123 4.6 Barrier Layers on the Anode 125 4.7 A Systemic Approach 126 References 126 Part II Mechanisms 129 Reference 131 5 Molecular Level Understanding of the Interactions Between Reaction Intermediates of Li–S Energy Storage Systems and Ether Solvents 133Rajeev S. Assary and Larry A. Curtiss 5.1 Introduction 133 5.2 Computational Details 135 5.3 Results and Discussions 135 5.3.1 Reactivity of Li–S Intermediates with Dimethoxy Ethane (DME) 136 5.3.2 Kinetic Stability of Ethers in the Presence of Lithium Polysulfide 138 5.3.3 Linear Fluorinated Ethers 140 5.4 Summary and Conclusions 144 Acknowledgments 144 References 144 6 Lithium Sulfide 147Sylwia Walu´s 6.1 Introduction 147 6.2 Li2S as the End Discharge Product 148 6.2.1 General 148 6.2.2 Discharge Product: Li2S or Li2S2/Li2S? 151 6.2.3 A Survey of Experimental andTheoretical Findings Involving Li2S and Li2S2 Formation and Proposed Reduction Pathways 153 6.2.4 Mechanistic Insight into Li2S/Li2S2 Nucleation and Growth 157 6.2.5 Strategies to Limit Li2S Precipitation and Enhance the Capacity 160 6.2.6 Charge Mechanism and its Difficulties 161 6.3 Li2S-Based Cathodes: Toward a Li Ion System 164 6.3.1 General 164 6.3.2 Initial Activation of Li2S – Mechanism of First Charge 165 6.3.3 Recent Developments in Li2S Cathodes for Improved Performances 171 6.4 Summary 176 References 176 7 Degradation in Lithium–Sulfur Batteries 185Rajlakshmi Purkayastha 7.1 Introduction 185 7.2 Degradation Processes Within a Lithium–Sulfur Cell 190 7.2.1 Degradation at Cathode 190 7.2.2 Degradation at Anode 194 7.2.3 Degradation in Electrolyte 197 7.2.4 Degradation Due to Operating Conditions: Temperature, C-Rates, and Pressure 200 7.2.5 Degradation Due to Geometry: Scale-Up and Topology 205 7.3 Capacity Fade Models 209 7.3.1 Dendrite Models 211 7.3.2 Equivalent Circuit Network Models 213 7.4 Methods of Detecting and Measuring Degradation 214 7.4.1 Incremental Capacity Analysis 215 7.4.2 Differential Thermal Voltammetry 215 7.4.3 Electrochemical Impedance Spectroscopy 215 7.4.4 Resistance Curves 216 7.4.5 Macroscopic Indicators 217 7.5 Methods for Countering Degradation 218 7.6 Future Direction 221 References 222 Part III Modeling 227 8 Lithium–Sulfur Model Development 229Teng Zhang, Monica Marinescu and Gregory J. Offer 8.1 Introduction 229 8.2 Zero-Dimensional Model 231 8.2.1 Model Formulation 231 8.2.1.1 Electrochemical Reactions 231 8.2.1.2 Shuttle and Precipitation 232 8.2.1.3 Time Evolution of Species 233 8.2.1.4 Model Implementation 233 8.2.2 Basic Charge/Discharge Behaviors 233 8.3 Modeling Voltage Loss in Li–S Cells 236 8.3.1 Electrolyte Resistance 237 8.3.2 Anode Potential 238 8.3.3 Surface Passivation 239 8.3.4 Transport Limitation 240 8.4 Higher Dimensional Models 242 8.4.1 One-Dimensional Models 242 8.4.2 Multi-Scale Models 244 8.5 Summary 245 References 246 9 Battery Management Systems – State Estimation for Lithium–Sulfur Batteries 249Daniel J. Auger, Abbas Fotouhi, Karsten Propp and Stefano Longo 9.1 Motivation 249 9.1.1 Capacity 249 9.1.2 State of Charge (SoC) 251 9.1.3 State of Health (SoH) 251 9.1.4 Limitations of Existing Battery State Estimation Techniques 252 9.1.4.1 SoC Estimation from “Coulomb Counting” 252 9.1.4.2 SoC Estimation from Open-Circuit Voltage (OCV) 253 9.1.5 Direction of Current Work 253 9.2 Experimental Environment for Li–S Algorithm Development 254 9.2.1 Pulse Discharge Tests 255 9.2.2 Driving Cycle Tests 255 9.3 State Estimation Techniques from Control Theory 256 9.3.1 Electrochemical Models 257 9.3.2 Equivalent Circuit Network (ECN) Models 258 9.3.3 Kalman Filters and Their Derivatives 259 9.4 State Estimation Techniques from Computer Science 261 9.4.1 ANFIS as a Modeling Tool 261 9.4.2 Human Knowledge and Fuzzy Inference Systems (FIS) 263 9.4.3 Adaptive Neuro-Fuzzy Inference Systems 266 9.4.4 State-of-Charge Estimation Using ANFIS 268 9.5 Conclusions and Further Directions 269 Acknowledgments 270 References 270 Part IV Application 273 10 Commercial Markets for Li–S 275Mark Crittenden 10.1 Technology Strengths Meet Market Needs 275 10.1.1 Weight 275 10.1.2 Safety 276 10.1.3 Cost 276 10.1.4 Temperature Tolerance 276 10.1.5 Shipment and Storage 277 10.1.6 Power Characteristics 277 10.1.7 Environmentally Friendly Technology (Clean Tech) 278 10.1.8 Pressure Tolerance 278 10.1.9 Control 278 10.2 Electric Aircraft 278 10.3 Satellites 280 10.4 Cars 280 10.5 Buses 282 10.6 Trucks 283 10.7 Electric Scooter and Electric Bikes 284 10.8 Marine 285 10.9 Energy Storage 285 10.10 Low-Temperature Applications 286 10.11 Defense 286 10.12 Looking Ahead 286 10.13 Conclusion 287 11 Battery Engineering 289Gregory J. Offer 11.1 Mechanical Considerations 289 11.2 Thermal and Electrical Considerations 289 References 292 12 Case Study 293Paul Brooks 12.1 Introduction 293 12.2 A Potted History of Eternal Solar Flight 293 12.3 Why Has It Been So Difficult? 295 12.4 Objectives of HALE UAV 297 12.4.1 Stay Above the Cloud 298 12.4.2 Stay Above the Wind 298 12.4.3 Stay in the Sun 299 12.4.4 Year-Round Markets 300 12.4.5 Seasonal Markets 303 12.4.6 How Valuable Are These Markets and What Does That Mean for the Battery? 303 12.5 Worked Example – HALE UAV 303 12.6 Cells, Batteries, and Real Life 305 12.6.1 Cycle Life, Charge, and Discharge Rates 305 12.6.2 Payload 306 12.6.3 Avionics 306 12.6.4 Temperature 306 12.6.5 End-of-Life Performance 306 12.6.6 Protection 306 12.6.7 Balancing – Useful Capacity 307 12.6.8 Summary of Real-World Issues 307 12.7 A Quick Aside on Regenerative Fuel Cells 308 12.8 So What Do We Need from Our Battery Suppliers? 309 12.9 The Challenges for Battery Developers 310 12.10 The Answer to the Title 310 12.11 Summary 310 Acknowledgments 311 References 311 Index 313
£113.36
John Wiley & Sons Inc Pattern Recognition
Book SynopsisA new approach to the issue of data quality in pattern recognition Detailing foundational concepts before introducing more complex methodologies and algorithms, this book is a self-contained manual for advanced data analysis and data mining. Top-down organization presents detailed applications only after methodological issues have been mastered, and step-by-step instructions help ensure successful implementation of new processes. By positioning data quality as a factor to be dealt with rather than overcome, the framework provided serves as a valuable, versatile tool in the analysis arsenal. For decades, practical need has inspired intense theoretical and applied research into pattern recognition for numerous and diverse applications. Throughout, the limiting factor and perpetual problem has been dataits sheer diversity, abundance, and variable quality presents the central challenge to pattern recognition innovation. Pattern Recognition: A Quality of Data PersTable of ContentsPREFACE ix PART 1 FUNDAMENTALS 1 CHAPTER 1 PATTERN RECOGNITION: FEATURE SPACE CONSTRUCTION 3 1.1 Concepts 3 1.2 From Patterns to Features 8 1.3 Features Scaling 17 1.4 Evaluation and Selection of Features 23 1.5 Conclusions 47 Appendix 1.A 48 Appendix 1.B 50 References 50 CHAPTER 2 PATTERN RECOGNITION: CLASSIFIERS 53 2.1 Concepts 53 2.2 Nearest Neighbors Classification Method 55 2.3 Support Vector Machines Classification Algorithm 57 2.4 Decision Trees in Classification Problems 65 2.5 Ensemble Classifiers 78 2.6 Bayes Classifiers 82 2.7 Conclusions 97 References 97 CHAPTER 3 CLASSIFICATION WITH REJECTION PROBLEM FORMULATION AND AN OVERVIEW 101 3.1 Concepts 102 3.2 The Concept of Rejecting Architectures 107 3.3 Native Patterns-Based Rejection 112 3.4 Rejection Option in the Dataset of Native Patterns: A Case Study 118 3.5 Conclusions 129 References 130 CHAPTER 4 EVALUATING PATTERN RECOGNITION PROBLEM 133 4.1 Evaluating Recognition with Rejection: Basic Concepts 133 4.2 Classification with Rejection with No Foreign Patterns 145 4.3 Classification with Rejection: Local Characterization 149 4.4 Conclusions 156 References 156 CHAPTER 5 RECOGNITION WITH REJECTION: EMPIRICAL ANALYSIS 159 5.1 Experimental Results 160 5.2 Geometrical Approach 175 5.3 Conclusions 191 References 192 PART 2 ADVANCED TOPICS: A FRAMEWORK OF GRANULAR COMPUTING 195 CHAPTER 6 CONCEPTS AND NOTIONS OF INFORMATION GRANULES 197 6.1 Information Granularity and Granular Computing 197 6.2 Formal Platforms of Information Granularity 201 6.3 Intervals and Calculus of Intervals 205 6.4 Calculus of Fuzzy Sets 208 6.5 Characterization of Information Granules: Coverage and Specificity 216 6.6 Matching Information Granules 219 6.7 Conclusions 220 References 221 CHAPTER 7 INFORMATION GRANULES: FUNDAMENTAL CONSTRUCTS 223 7.1 The Principle of Justifiable Granularity 223 7.2 Information Granularity as a Design Asset 230 7.3 Single-Step and Multistep Prediction of Temporal Data in Time Series Models 235 7.4 Development of Granular Models of Higher Type 236 7.5 Classification with Granular Patterns 241 7.6 Conclusions 245 References 246 CHAPTER 8 CLUSTERING 247 8.1 Fuzzy C-Means Clustering Method 247 8.2 k-Means Clustering Algorithm 252 8.3 Augmented Fuzzy Clustering with Clusters and Variables Weighting 253 8.4 Knowledge-Based Clustering 254 8.5 Quality of Clustering Results 254 8.6 Information Granules and Interpretation of Clustering Results 256 8.7 Hierarchical Clustering 258 8.8 Information Granules in Privacy Problem: A Concept of Microaggregation 261 8.9 Development of Information Granules of Higher Type 262 8.10 Experimental Studies 264 8.11 Conclusions 272 References 273 CHAPTER 9 QUALITY OF DATA: IMPUTATION AND DATA BALANCING 275 9.1 Data Imputation: Underlying Concepts and Key Problems 275 9.2 Selected Categories of Imputation Methods 276 9.3 Imputation with the Use of Information Granules 278 9.4 Granular Imputation with the Principle of Justifiable Granularity 279 9.5 Granular Imputation with Fuzzy Clustering 283 9.6 Data Imputation in System Modeling 285 9.7 Imbalanced Data and their Granular Characterization 286 9.8 Conclusions 291 References 291 INDEX 293
£97.16
John Wiley & Sons Inc Hierarchical Protection for Smart Grids
Book SynopsisA systematic view of hierarchical protection for smart grids, with solutions to tradition protection problems and complicated operation modes of modern power systems Systematically investigates traditional protection problems from the bird's eye view of hierarchical protection Focuses on multiple variable network structures and complicated operation modes Offers comprehensive countermeasures on improving protection performance based on up-to-date researchTable of ContentsAbout the Author ix Foreword xi Preface xiii Introduction xv 1 Basic Theories of Power System Relay Protection 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Function of Relay Protection 1 1.3 Basic Requirements of Relay Protection 3 1.3.1 Reliability 3 1.3.2 Selectivity 4 1.3.3 Speed 4 1.3.4 Sensitivity 5 1.4 Basic Principles of Relay Protection 6 1.4.1 Over-Current Protection 6 1.4.2 Directional Current Protection 6 1.4.3 Distance Protection 7 1.5 Hierarchical Relay Protection 9 1.5.1 Local Area Protection 10 1.5.2 Substation Area Protection 11 1.5.3 Wide Area Protection 12 1.5.4 Constitution Mode of Hierarchical Relay Protection 13 1.6 Summary 15 References 15 2 Local Area Conventional Protection 17 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Transformer Protection 18 2.2.1 Adaptive Scheme of Discrimination between Internal Faults and Inrush Currents of Transformer Using Mathematical Morphology 18 2.2.2 Algorithm to Discriminate Internal Fault Current and Inrush Current Utilizing Variation Feature of Fundamental Current Amplitude 30 2.2.3 Identifying Transformer Inrush Current Based on Normalized Grille Curve (NGC) 39 2.2.4 Adaptive Method to Identify CT Saturation Using Grille Fractal 50 2.2.5 Algorithm for Discrimination Between Inrush Currents and Internal Faults Based on Equivalent Instantaneous Leakage Inductance 57 2.2.6 A Two-Terminal Network-Based Method for Discrimination between Internal Faults and Inrush Currents 70 2.3 Transmission Line Protection 82 2.3.1 Line Protection Scheme for Single-Phase-to-Ground Faults Based on Voltage Phase Comparison 83 2.3.2 Adaptive Distance Protection Scheme Based on the Voltage Drop Equation 99 2.3.3 Location Method for Inter-Line and Grounded Faults of Double-Circuit Transmission Lines Based on Distributed Parameters 117 2.3.4 Adaptive Overload Identification Method Based on Complex Phasor Plane 134 2.3.5 Novel Fault Phase Selection Scheme Utilizing Fault Phase Selection Factors 148 2.4 Summary 172 References 172 3 Local Area Protection for Renewable Energy 175 3.1 Introduction 175 3.2 Fault Transient Characteristics of Renewable Energy Sources 176 3.2.1 Mathematical Model and LVRT Characteristics of DFIG 177 3.2.2 DFIG Fault Transient Characteristics When the Crowbar Protection Is Not Put into Operation 178 3.2.3 DFIG Fault Transient Characteristics When the Crowbar Protection Is Put into Operation 211 3.3 Local Area Protection for Centralized Renewable Energy 230 3.3.1 Connection Form of a Wind Farm and its Protection Configuration 231 3.3.2 Adaptive Distance Protection Scheme for Wind Farm Collector Lines 233 3.3.3 Differential Protection Scheme for Wind Farm Outgoing Transmission Line 239 3.4 Local Area Protection for Distributed Renewable Energy 248 3.4.1 Adaptive Protection Approach for Distribution Network Containing Distributed Generation 248 3.4.2 Islanding Detection Method 255 3.5 Summary 269 References 270 4 Topology Analysis 273 4.1 Introduction 273 4.2 Topology Analysis for Inner Substation 273 4.2.1 Characteristic Analysis of the Main Electrical Connection 274 4.2.2 Topology Analysis Method Based on Main Electrical Wiring Characteristics 275 4.2.3 Scheme Verification 278 4.3 Topology Analysis for Inter-substation 284 4.3.1 Static Topology Analysis for Power Network 285 4.3.2 Topology Update for Power Network 287 4.3.3 Scheme Verification 291 4.4 False Topology Identification 294 4.4.1 Road-Loop Equation 294 4.4.2 Analysis of the Impacts of Topology Error and Undesirable Data on Branch Current 296 4.4.3 Topology Error Identification Method Based on Road-loop Equation 300 4.4.4 Scheme Verification 301 4.5 Summary 315 References 316 5 Substation Area Protection 317 5.1 Introduction 317 5.2 Substation Area Protection Based on Electrical Information 317 5.2.1 Substation Area Regionalization 318 5.2.2 Typical Fault Cases 323 5.2.3 Scheme Performance Analysis 326 5.3 Substation Area Protection Based on Operating Signals 327 5.3.1 Setting Principle of Adaptive Current Protection 327 5.3.2 Supporting Degree Calculation Method 330 5.3.3 Substation Area Current Protection Algorithm 334 5.3.4 Scheme Verification 338 5.4 Summary 346 References 346 6 Wide Area Protection 347 6.1 Introduction 347 6.2 Wide Area Protection Using Electrical Information 347 6.2.1 Wide-Area Protection Using Fault Power Source Information 348 6.2.2 Wide-Area Protection Using Fault Network Information 358 6.2.3 Wide-Area Protection Suitable for Multiple Fault Identification 369 6.3 Wide Area Protection Using Operating Signals 375 6.3.1 Wide-Area Protection Based on Distance Protection Operational Signal 376 6.3.2 Wide-Area Protection Based on Current Protection Operational Signal 393 6.3.3 Wide-Area Protection Based on Virtual Impedance of Fault Component 406 6.4 Wide Area Tripping Strategy 419 6.4.1 Tripping Strategy Based on Directional Weighting 419 6.4.2 Simulation Verification 428 6.5 Summary 432 References 433 Appendices 435 Index 439
£108.86
John Wiley & Sons Inc Understanding Lasers
Book SynopsisThe expanded fourth edition of the book that offers an essential introduction to laser technology and the newest developments in the field The revised and updated fourth edition of Understanding Lasers offers an essential guide and introduction that explores how lasers work, what they do, and how they are applied in the real world. The authora Fellow of The Optical Societyreviews the key concepts of physics and optics that are essential for understanding lasers and explains how lasers operate. The book also contains information on the optical accessories used with lasers. Written in non-technical terms, the book gives an overview of the wide-variety laser types and configurations. Understanding Lasers covers fiber, solid-state, excimer, helium-neon, carbon dioxide, free-electron lasers, and more. In addition, the book also explains concepts such as the difference between laser oscillation and amplification, the importance of laser gain, and tunableTable of ContentsPreface xiii CHAPTER 1 Introduction and Overview 1 1.1 Lasers, Optics, and Photonics 1 1.2 Understanding the Laser 3 1.3 What Is a Laser? 4 1.4 Laser Materials and Types 8 1.5 Optical Properties of Laser Light 10 1.6 How Lasers Are Used? 14 1.7 What Have We Learned? 17 CHAPTER 2 Physical Basics 21 2.1 Electromagnetic Waves and Photons 21 2.2 Quantum and Classical Physics 29 2.3 Interactions of Light and Matter 39 2.4 Basic Optics and Simple Lenses 47 2.5 Fiber Optics 51 2.6 What Have We Learned? 54 CHAPTER 3 How Lasers Work 59 3.1 Building a Laser 59 3.2 Producing a Population Inversion 60 3.3 Resonant Cavities 66 3.4 Laser Beams and Resonance 73 3.5 Wavelength Selection and Tuning 81 3.6 Laser Excitation and Efficiency 85 3.7 What Have We Learned? 89 CHAPTER 4 Laser Characteristics 95 4.1 Coherence 95 4.2 Laser Wavelengths 98 4.3 Properties of Laser Beams 103 4.4 Laser Power 108 4.5 Laser Efficiency 110 4.6 Pulse Characteristics 115 4.7 Polarization 120 4.8 What Have We Learned? 121 CHAPTER 5 Optics, Laser Accessories, and Measurements 127 5.1 Classical Optical Devices 127 5.2 Optical Materials 136 5.3 Optical Coatings and Filters 141 5.4 Beam Delivery, Direction, and Propagation 145 5.5 Mounting and Positioning Equipment 148 5.6 Nonlinear Optics 149 5.7 Beam Modulation and Output Control 156 5.8 Measurements in Optics 159 5.9 What Have We Learned? 164 CHAPTER 6 Laser Types, Features, and Enhancements 169 6.1 Perspectives on Laser Types 169 6.2 Laser Media 171 6.3 Pumping and Energy Storage 177 6.4 Laser Pulse Characteristics 182 6.5 Wavelength Conversion 195 6.6 Laser Oscillators and Optical Amplifiers 201 6.7 Wavelength Options 207 6.8 Laser-Like Light Sources 209 6.9 What Have We Learned? 211 CHAPTER 7 Gas Lasers 217 7.1 The Gas-Laser Family 217 7.2 Gas-Laser Basics 218 7.3 Helium–Neon Lasers 225 7.4 Argon- and Krypton-Ion Lasers 229 7.5 Metal-Vapor Lasers 232 7.6 Carbon Dioxide Lasers 235 7.7 Excimer Lasers 240 7.8 Nitrogen Lasers 243 7.9 Chemical Lasers 243 7.10 Other Gas Lasers 246 7.11 What Have We Learned? 247 CHAPTER 8 Solid-State Lasers 253 8.1 What Is a Solid-State Laser? 253 8.2 Solid-State Laser Materials 258 8.3 Solid-State Laser Configurations 265 8.4 Major Solid-State Laser Materials 271 8.5 Optically Pumped Semiconductor Lasers 284 8.6 Broadband and Tunable Solid-State Lasers 288 8.7 Pulsed Solid-State Lasers 294 8.8 What Have We Learned? 295 CHAPTER 9 Fiber Lasers and Amplifiers 301 9.1 What Are Fiber Lasers? 301 9.2 Optical Fiber Structures 306 9.3 Fiber Laser Design and Efficiency 310 9.4 Rare-Earth-Doped Fiber Lasers 318 9.5 Rare-Earth-Doped Fiber Amplifiers 328 9.6 Raman Fiber Lasers and Amplifiers 332 9.7 What Have We Learned? 335 CHAPTER 10 Diode and Other Semiconductor Lasers 341 10.1 Types of Semiconductor Lasers 341 10.2 Development of Diode Lasers 342 10.3 Semiconductor Basics 344 10.4 Comparing LED and Diode-Laser Emission 353 10.5 Confining Light and Current 359 10.6 Edge-Emitting Diode Lasers 370 10.7 Surface-Emitting Diode Lasers 375 10.8 Optical Properties of Diode Lasers 379 10.9 Diode-Laser Materials and Wavelengths 381 10.10 Quantum Cascade Lasers and Related Types 390 10.11 What Have We Learned? 393 CHAPTER 11 Other Lasers and Laser-Like Sources 399 11.1 Tunable Dye Lasers 399 11.2 Optical Parametric Sources 404 11.3 Supercontinuum Sources 408 11.4 Frequency Combs 408 11.5 Extreme Ultraviolet Sources 410 11.6 Free-Electron Lasers 416 11.7 What Have We Learned? 420 CHAPTER 12 Low-Power Laser Applications 425 12.1 Advantages of Laser Light 426 12.2 Reading with Lasers 433 12.3 Optical Disks and Data Storage 437 12.4 Laser Printing 440 12.5 Lasers in Fiber-Optic Communications 442 12.6 Laser Measurement 447 12.7 Laser Light Shows, Pointers, and Projection Displays 453 12.8 Low-Power Defense Applications 456 12.9 Sensing and Spectroscopy 459 12.10 Holography 464 12.11 Other Low-Power Applications 468 12.12 What Have We Learned? 469 CHAPTER 13 High-Power Laser Applications 475 13.1 High- Versus Low-Power Laser Applications 475 13.2 Attractions of High-Power Lasers 476 13.3 Important Considerations and Trends 477 13.4 Materials Working 481 13.5 Additive Manufacturing and Three-Dimensional Printing 489 13.6 Semiconductor Electronics Fabrication 491 13.7 Laser Medical Treatment 493 13.8 Photochemistry and Isotope Separation 501 13.9 Laser-Driven Nuclear Fusion 503 13.10 High-Energy Laser Weapons 505 13.11 What Have We Learned? 510 CHAPTER 14 Lasers in Research 515 14.1 Lasers Open New Opportunities 515 14.2 Laser Spectroscopy 516 14.3 Manipulating Tiny Objects 521 14.4 Atom Lasers and Bose–Einstein Condensates 522 14.5 Detection of Gravitational Waves 524 14.6 Laser Guide Stars for Astronomy 525 14.7 Slow Light 526 14.8 Nanoscale Lasers 527 14.9 Strange Lasers 529 14.10 Extreme Power Ultrashort Pulse Lasers 530 14.11 X-Ray Free-Electron Lasers 535 14.12 Other Emerging Research 536 14.13 What Have We Learned? 538 Answers to Quiz Questions 543 Appendix A: Laser Safety 547 Appendix B: Handy Numbers and Formulas 553 Appendix C: Resources and Suggested Readings 557 Glossary 561 Index 575
£77.36
John Wiley & Sons Inc Metalorganic Vapor Phase Epitaxy MOVPE
Book SynopsisSystematically discusses the growth method, material properties, and applications for key semiconductor materials MOVPE is a chemical vapor deposition technique that produces single or polycrystalline thin films. As one of the key epitaxial growth technologies, it produces layers that form the basis of many optoelectronic components including mobile phone components (GaAs), semiconductor lasers and LEDs (III-Vs, nitrides), optical communications (oxides), infrared detectors, photovoltaics (II-IV materials), etc. Featuring contributions by an international group of academics and industrialists, this book looks at the fundamentals of MOVPE and the key areas of equipment/safety, precursor chemicals, and growth monitoring. It covers the most important materials from III-V and II-VI compounds to quantum dots and nanowires, including sulfides and selenides and oxides/ceramics. Sections in every chapter of Metalorganic Vapor Phase Epitaxy (MOVPE): Growth, Materials Table of ContentsList of Contributors xv Foreword xvii Series Preface xix Preface xxi Safety and Environment Disclaimer xxiii 1 Introduction to Metalorganic Vapor Phase Epitaxy 1S.J.C. Irvine and P. Capper 1.1 Historical Background of MOVPE 1 1.2 Basic Reaction Mechanisms 4 1.3 Precursors 8 1.4 Types of Reactor Cell 9 1.5 Introduction to Applications of MOVPE 11 1.5.1 AlN for UV Emitters 11 1.5.2 GaAs/AlGaAs VCSELS 11 1.5.3 Multijunction Solar Cells 12 1.5.4 GaAs and InP Transistors for High‐Frequency Devices 13 1.5.5 Infrared Detectors 14 1.5.6 Photovoltaic and Thermophotovoltaic Devices 14 1.6 Health and Safety Considerations in MOVPE 15 1.7 Conclusions 16 References 16 2 Fundamental Aspects of MOVPE 19G.B. Stringfellow 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Thermodynamics 20 2.2.1 Thermodynamics of MOVPE Growth 20 2.2.2 Solid Composition 24 2.2.3 Phase Separation 29 2.2.4 Ordering 31 2.3 Kinetics 35 2.3.1 Mass Transport 35 2.3.2 Precursor Pyrolysis 36 2.3.3 Control of Solid Composition 37 2.4 Surface Processes 40 2.4.1 Surface Reconstruction 41 2.4.2 Atomic‐Level Surface Processes 42 2.4.3 Effects of Surface Processes on Materials Properties 44 2.4.4 Surfactants 46 2.5 Specific Systems 52 2.5.1 AlGaInP 52 2.5.2 Group III Nitrides 53 2.5.3 Novel Alloys 56 2.6 Summary 59 References 60 3 Column III: Phosphides, Arsenides, and Antimonides 71H. Hardtdegen and M. Mikulics 3.1 Introduction 71 3.2 Precursors for Column III Phosphides, Arsenides, and Antimonides 73 3.3 GaAs‐Based Materials 74 3.3.1 (AlGa)As/GaAs Properties and Deposition 74 3.3.2 GaInP, (AlGa)InP/GaAs Properties and Deposition 79 3.4 InP‐Based Materials 82 3.4.1 InP Properties and Deposition 82 3.4.2 AlInAs/GaInAs/AlGaInAs Properties and Deposition 83 3.4.3 AlInAs/GaInAs/InP Heterostructures 84 3.4.4 InxGa1–xAsyP1–y Properties and Deposition 84 3.5 Column III Antimonides Properties and Deposition 86 3.5.1 Deposition of InSb, GaSb, and AlSb 87 3.5.2 Deposition of Ternary Column III Alloys (AlGa)Sb and (GaIn)Sb 89 3.5.3 Deposition of Ternary Column V Alloys In(AsSb), GaAsSb 89 3.5.4 Deposition of Quaternary Alloys 90 3.5.5 Epitaxy of Electronic Device Structures 90 3.5.6 Epitaxy of Optoelectronic Device Structures 95 3.6 In Situ Optical Characterization/Growth Control 100 3.7 Conclusions 100 References 101 4 Nitride Semiconductors 109A. Dadgar and M. Weyers 4.1 Introduction 109 4.2 Properties of III‐Nitrides 110 4.3 Challenges in the Growth of III‐Nitrides 111 4.3.1 Lattice and Thermal Mismatch 111 4.3.2 Ternary Alloys: Miscibility and Compositional Homogeneity 113 4.3.3 Gas‐Phase Prereactions 115 4.3.4 Doping of III‐Nitrides 117 4.4 Substrates 120 4.4.1 Heteroepitaxy on Foreign Substrates 122 4.4.2 GaN Growth on Sapphire 125 4.4.3 III‐N Growth on SiC 126 4.4.4 GaN Growth on Silicon 127 4.5 MOVPE Growth Technology 130 4.5.1 Precursors 130 4.5.2 Reactors and In Situ Monitoring 130 4.6 Economic Importance 136 4.6.1 Optoelectronic Devices 137 4.6.2 Electronic Devices 138 4.7 Conclusions 138 References 138 5 Metamorphic Growth and Multijunction III‐V Solar Cells 149N.H. Karam, C.M. Fetzer, X.‐Q. Liu, M.A. Steiner, and K.L. Schulte 5.1 Introduction to MOVPE for Multijunction Solar Cells 149 5.1.1 III‐V PV Solar Cell Opportunities and Applications 149 5.1.2 Metamorphic Multijunction Solar Cells 151 5.1.3 Reactor Technology for Metamorphic Epitaxy 154 5.2 Upright Metamorphic Multijunction (UMM) Solar Cells 154 5.2.1 Introduction and History of Upright Metamorphic Multijunctions 154 5.2.2 MOVPE Growth Considerations of UMM 156 5.2.3 Growth and Device Results 158 5.2.4 Challenges and Future Outlook 162 5.3 Inverted Metamorphic Multijunction (IMM) Solar Cells 162 5.3.1 Introduction and History of Inverted Metamorphic Multijunctions 162 5.3.2 MOVPE Growth Considerations of IMM 164 5.3.3 Growth and Device Results 167 5.3.4 Challenges and Future Outlook 169 5.4 Conclusions 169 References 170 6 Quantum Dots 175E. Hulicius, A. Hospodková, and M. Zíková 6.1 General Introduction to the Topic 175 6.1.1 Definition and History 175 6.1.2 Paradigm of Quantum Dots 176 6.1.3 QD Types 176 6.2 AIIIBV Materials and Structures 178 6.2.1 QDs Embedded in the Structure 178 6.2.2 Semiconductor Materials for Embedded QDs 180 6.3 Growth Procedures 181 6.3.1 Comparison of MBE‐ and MOVPE‐Grown QDs 181 6.3.2 Growth Parameters 182 6.3.3 QD Surrounding Layers 185 6.4 In Situ Measurements 193 6.4.1 Reflectance Anisotropy Spectroscopy of QD Growth 193 6.4.2 Other Supporting In Situ Measurements 197 6.5 Structure Characterization 198 6.5.1 Optical: Photo‐, Magnetophoto‐, Electro‐luminescence, and Spin Detection 198 6.5.2 Microscopies – AFM, TEM, XSTM, BEEM/BEES 200 6.5.3 Electrical: Photocurrent, Capacitance Measurements 202 6.6 Applications 203 6.6.1 QD Lasers, Optical Amplifiers, and LEDs 204 6.6.2 QD Detectors, FETs, Photovoltaics, and Memories 205 6.7 Summary 208 6.8 Future Perspectives 208 Acknowledgment 209 References 209 7 III‐V Nanowires and Related Nanostructures: From Nitrides to Antimonides 217H.J. Joyce 7.1 Introduction to Nanowires and Related Nanostructures 217 7.2 Geometric and Crystallographic Properties of III‐V Nanowires 219 7.2.1 Crystal Phase 219 7.2.2 Growth Direction, Morphology, and Side‐Facets 220 7.3 Particle‐Assisted MOVPE of Nanowires 222 7.3.1 The Phase of the Particle 222 7.3.2 The Role of the Particle 224 7.3.3 Axial and Radial Growth Modes 226 7.3.4 Self‐Assisted Growth 228 7.4 Selective‐Area MOVPE of Nanowires and Nanostructures 228 7.4.1 The Role of the Mask 229 7.4.2 Axial and Radial Growth Modes 230 7.5 Alternative Techniques for MOVPE of Nanowires 231 7.6 Novel Applications of Nanowires 231 7.7 Concluding Remarks 233 References 234 8 Monolithic III/V integration on (001) Si substrate 241B. Kunert and K. Volz 8.1 Introduction 241 8.2 III/V‐Si Interface 243 8.2.1 Si Surfaces 243 8.2.2 Interface Formation in the Presence of Impurities and MO Precursors 247 8.2.3 Atomic III/V on Si Interface Structure 249 8.2.4 Antiphase Domains 251 8.2.5 III/V Growth on Si(001) 252 8.3 Heteroepitaxy of Bulk Layers on Si 255 8.3.1 Lattice‐Matched Growth on Si 257 8.3.2 Metamorphic Growth on Blanket Si 258 8.3.3 Selective‐Area Growth (SAG) on Si 264 8.4 Conclusions 282 References 282 9 MOVPE Growth of Cadmium Mercury Telluride and Applications 293C.D. Maxey, P. Capper, and I.M. Baker 9.1 Requirement for Epitaxy 293 9.2 History 294 9.3 Substrate Choices 295 9.3.1 Orientation 296 9.3.2 Substrate Material 296 9.4 Reactor Design 297 9.4.1 Process Abatement Systems 298 9.5 Process Parameters 299 9.6 Metalorganic Sources 299 9.7 Uniformity 300 9.8 Reproducibility 302 9.9 Doping 302 9.10 Defects 304 9.11 Annealing 307 9.12 In Situ Monitoring 308 9.13 Background for Applications of MOVPE MCT 308 9.13.1 Introduction to Infrared Imaging and Atmospheric Windows 308 9.13.2 MCT Infrared Detector Market in the Modern Era 309 9.14 Manufacturing Technology for MOVPE Photodiode Arrays 311 9.14.1 Mesa Heterojunction Devices (MHJ) 311 9.14.2 Wafer‐Scale Processing 312 9.15 Advanced MCT Technologies 312 9.15.1 Small‐Pixel Technology 313 9.15.2 Higher Operating Temperature (HOT) Device Structures 313 9.15.3 Two‐Color Array Technology 314 9.15.4 Nonequilibrium Device Structures 316 9.16 MOVPE MCT for Scientific Applications 316 9.16.1 Linear‐Mode Avalanche Photodiode Arrays (LmAPDs) in MOVPE 316 9.17 Conclusions and Future Trends for MOVPE MCT Arrays 320 Definitions 321 References 322 10 Cadmium Telluride and Related II‐VI Materials 325G. Kartopu and S.J.C. Irvine 10.1 Introduction and Historical Background 325 10.2 CdTe Homoepitaxy 327 10.3 CdTe Heteroepitaxy 327 10.3.1 InSb 327 10.3.2 Sapphire 328 10.3.3 GaAs 329 10.3.4 Silicon 330 10.4 Low‐Temperature Growth and Alternative Precursors 330 10.5 Photoassisted MOVPE 332 10.6 Plasma‐Assisted MOVPE 333 10.7 Polycrystalline MOCVD 333 10.8 In Situ Monitoring of CdTe 334 10.8.1 Mechanisms for Laser Reflectance (LR) Monitoring 335 10.9 MOCVD of CdTe for Planar Solar Cells 337 10.9.1 CdS and CdZnS Window Layers 338 10.9.2 CdTe Absorber Layer 338 10.9.3 CdCl2 Treatment Layer 342 10.9.4 Photovoltaic Planar Devices 343 10.10 Core‐Shell Nanowire Photovoltaic Devices 345 10.11 Inline MOCVD for Scaling of CdTe 347 10.12 MOCVD of CdTe for Radiation Detectors 350 References 351 11 ZnO and Related Materials 355V. Muñoz‐Sanjosé and S.J.C. Irvine 11.1 Introduction 355 11.2 Sources for the MOCVD Growth of ZnO and Related Materials 356 11.2.1 Metalorganic Zinc Precursors 356 11.2.2 Metalorganic Cadmium Precursors 360 11.2.3 Metalorganic Magnesium Precursors 360 11.2.4 Precursors for Oxygen 361 11.2.5 Precursors for Doping 363 11.3 Substrates for the MOCVD Growth of ZnO and Related Materials 364 11.3.1 ZnO Single Crystals and ZnO Templates as Substrates 365 11.3.2 Sapphire (Al2O3) 367 11.3.3 Silicon 369 11.3.4 Glass Substrates 372 11.4 Some Techniques for the MOCVD Growth of ZnO and Related Materials 373 11.4.1 Atmospheric and Low‐Pressure Conditions in Conventional MOCVD Systems 374 11.4.2 MOCVD‐Assisted Processes 376 11.5 Crystal Growth of ZnO and Related Materials 380 11.5.1 Crystal Growth by MOCVD of ZnO Layers 380 11.5.2 Crystal Growth of ZnO Nanostructures 393 11.5.3 Crystal Growth of ZnO‐Related Materials 398 11.5.4 Doping of ZnO and Related Materials 400 11.6 Conclusions 405 Acknowledgments 406 References 406 12 Epitaxial Systems for III‐V and III‐Nitride MOVPE 423W. Lundin and R. Talalaev 12.1 Introduction 423 12.2 Typical Engineering Solutions Inside MOVPE Tools 424 12.2.1 Gas‐Blending System 424 12.2.2 Exhaust System 433 12.2.3 Reactors 435 12.3 Reactors for MOVPE of III‐V Materials 438 12.3.1 General Features of III‐V MOVPE 438 12.3.2 From Simple Horizontal Flow to Planetary Reactors 439 12.3.3 Close‐Coupled Showerhead (CCS) Reactors 445 12.3.4 Rotating‐Disk Reactors 447 12.4 Reactors for MOVPE of III‐N Materials 451 12.4.1 Principal Differences between MOVPE of Classical III‐Vs and III‐Ns 451 12.4.2 Rotating‐Disk Reactors 454 12.4.3 Planetary Reactors 455 12.4.4 CCS Reactors 458 12.4.5 Horizontal Flow Reactors for III‐N MOVPE 459 12.5 Twenty‐Five Years of Commercially Available III‐N MOVPE Reactor Evolution 462 References 464 13 Ultrapure Metal‐Organic Precursors for MOVPE 467D.V. Shenai‐Khatkhate 13.1 Introduction 467 13.1.1 MOVPE Precursor Classes and Impurities 468 13.2 Stringent Requirements for Suitable MOVPE Precursors 472 13.3 Synthesis and Purification Strategies for Ultrapure MOVPE Precursors 472 13.3.1 Synthetic Strategies for Ultrapure MOVPE Precursors 472 13.3.2 Purification Strategies for MOVPE Precursors 476 13.4 MOVPE Precursors for III‐V Compound Semiconductors 483 13.4.1 Group III MOVPE Precursors 483 13.4.2 Group V MOVPE Precursors 488 13.5 MOVPE Precursors for II‐VI Compound Semiconductors 493 13.5.1 Group II MOVPE Precursors 493 13.5.2 Group VI MOVPE Precursors 496 13.6 MOVPE Dopants for Compound Semiconductors 499 13.7 Environment, Health, and Safety (EHS) Aspects of MOVPE Precursors 500 13.7.1 General Aspects and Considerations 500 13.7.2 Employee and Environment Exposure Aspects 501 13.7.3 Employee and Workplace Exposure Limits 502 13.8 Conclusions and Future Trends 502 Acknowledgments 503 References 503 14 Future Aspects of MOCVD Technology for Epitaxial Growth of Semiconductors 507T. Detchprohm, J.‐H. Ryou, X. Li, and R.D. Dupuis 14.1 Introduction – Looking Back 507 14.2 Future Equipment Development 510 14.2.1 Production MOCVD 510 14.2.2 R&D MOCVD 511 14.2.3 MOCVD for Ultrawide‐Bandgap III‐Nitrides 512 14.2.4 MOCVD for Emerging Materials 513 14.2.5 Democratization of MOCVD 514 14.3 Future Applications for MOCVD Research in Semiconductor Materials 515 14.3.1 Heteroepitaxy 515 14.3.2 Nanostructural Materials 527 14.3.3 Poly, Amorphous, and Other Materials 532 14.4 Past, Present, and Future Commercial Applications 535 14.4.1 LEDs 535 14.4.2 Lasers 536 14.4.3 OEICs 536 14.4.4 High‐Speed Electronics 536 14.4.5 High‐Power Electronics 537 14.4.6 Solar Cells 537 14.4.7 Detectors 538 14.5 Summary and Conclusions 538 Acknowledgments 539 References 539 Index 549
£118.76
John Wiley & Sons Inc Digital Services in the 21st Century
Book SynopsisTelecommunication Services provides aholistic approach to understand telecommunications systems by addressing the emergence and domination of new digital services, consumer and economic dynamics, and the creation of content by service providers. Includes services, underlying technologies, and internal capabilities for social network advertising Covers market dynamics that determine the successes and failures of service offerings Discusses the impact of smartphones (iPhone launch) on the telecommunications and mobile device industry Table of ContentsForeword xiVinton G. Cerf Preface xiii Acknowledgments xv List of Contributors xvii 1. The Evolving Voice Services: From Circuit Switching to Voice-Over LTE/FTTH) 1 1.1 Customer Need: Remote Communication 1 1.2 FTTH Voice 2 1.3 Voice-Over LTE (VoLTE) 2 1.4 Voice-Over WiFi 4 1.5 High-Definition (HD) Voice 5 1.6 Over-the-Top Substitutes 5 2. Internet Services: From Broadband to Ultrabroadband 9 2.1 Customer Need: Connectivity and Social Inclusion 10 2.2 Fixed Lines: Deploying Fiber Closer to Customer Premises: xDSL, Cable, FTTH 11 2.3 Mobile: 4G LTE/LTE-Advanced 19 2.4 WiFi AC (Gigabit) 23 2.5 Universal Access 23 3. Convergence: Bundling Fixed Line and Mobile Services 31 3.1 Customer Need: One-Stop Shop 31 3.2 Fixed Line and Mobile Service Bundles 31 3.3 Integrated Operators 32 4. Devices: Smartphones 37 4.1 Customer Need: Mobility 37 4.2 Vendors 38 4.3 Operating System Duopoly 39 4.4 Hardware Specifications 40 5. The Evolving Pay TV 51Francisco Saez and Joaquín M. Lopez Muñoz 5.1 Customer Need: Entertainment 51 5.2 Content Wars 53 5.3 Aggregation versus Diversity 56 5.4 The Role of Advertising 57 5.5 Technology: Satellite, Cable, and IPTV 58 5.6 Pay TV Technicall Key Components 58 5.7 Evolution of Interactive Pay TV Technologies 60 5.8 Video Definition 64 6. Enterprise: From Machine-to-Machine Connectivity Toward Internet of Things 69 6.1 Customer Need: Remote Automation 70 6.2 Basic Connectivity and Managed Connectivity 71 6.3 Low-Power Wide Area: LTE-MTC and Alternatives 77 6.4 Applications: Toward Internet of Things 86 7. IT: Cloud 103Stefan Wesner 7.1 Global Trends Driving the Cloud Evolution 104 7.2 Virtualization as Enabling Technology 105 7.3 The Layered Cloud Model 106 7.4 Advanced Cloud Models 111 7.5 Future Cloud Models 113 7.6 Conclusion and Summary 115 8. Emerging Markets: Mobile Money for the Unbanked 117 8.1 Customer Need: Remote Payments 117 8.2 Large Unbanked Population in Emerging Markets 118 8.3 Very High Penetration of Mobile Based on Feature Phones 129 8.4 Services: Remittances and Payments 137 9. Value-Added Consumer Services 143Jesus Llamazares Alberola 9.1 Introduction 143 9.2 Disruption is the New “Karma” 143 9.3 Adjacent Industries Joining Multilayered Value Chain 145 9.4 Telco’s Role and Challenges in the New Paradigm 146 9.5 But What do we Understand by VAS Today? 148 9.6 So What’s the Future for VAS and, Thus, for Telcos? 152 10. Mobile Virtual Network Operators/Second Brands 155Jaime Bustillo 10.1 From Oligopoly to Marketplace 156 10.2 MVNO Ecosystem: End Customer Facing or MVNOs 157 10.3 MVNO Ecosystem: Technology Enablers, MVNE, and MVNA 160 11. Digital Home 163 11.1 Introduction to Home Automation 163 11.2 Evolution to Digital Home 165 11.3 Home Automation: Control Network 170 11.4 Digital Home Networks 179 12. Videoconference and Telework 185 12.1 Customer Need: Teletransport 185 12.2 Videoconference 186 12.3 Telework 195 Index 205
£89.96
John Wiley & Sons Inc OnCamera Coach
Book SynopsisThe invaluable handbook for acing your on-camera appearance On-Camera Coach is your personal coach for becoming great on camera. From Skype interviews and virtual conferences to shareholder presentations and television appearances, this book shows you how to master the art of on-camera presentation to deliver your message clearly, effectively, and with confidence. Fear of public speaking is common, but even the most seasoned speakers freeze in front of a single lensbeing on camera demands an entirely new set of skills above and beyond the usual presentation to an audience you can actually see. It requires special attention to the way you move, the way you speak, and even the way you dress. This book provides the guidance and tools you need to ace it every time. Video is powerful, and it is everywhere; corporate YouTube channels, webinars, virtual meetings, TedTalks, and more are increasingly turning the lens on those who typically remain behind the scenesTable of ContentsWiley & SAS Business Series ii Preface xvii Acknowledgments xix Section One The Inescapable Reality—We All Have to Communicate through a Camera 1 Chapter 1 Why You Need to Read This Book 3 The Power and Pervasiveness of Video 5 The Decline of the Professional Spokesperson 6 The Global Communication Tool of Choice 7 Hiring by Skype 8 The Perils of Video 9 How Reading This Book Can Improve Your On-Camera Performance 9 What You Will Need 10 Topics to Be Discussed 10 Chapter Takeaways 11 Notes 11 Chapter 2 Why the Camera Changes Everything 13 My “Aha!” Moment 16 A Camera Changes Everything 17 No Immediate Feedback 17 Your Own Worst Critic 18 Recorded for Posterity 19 Unfamiliar Territory 20 The Archenemy of Performance Success: You 21 The Key to On-Camera Success: Authenticity 22 Chapter Takeaways 24 Section Two The MVPs of Performance Success 25 Chapter 3 M—Mental Mind-set: The Prep before the Performance 27 Reaching the Real Audience 28 Visualize the Viewer 30 Video Chat: Now You See Me, Now You Don’t 30 Embrace Your Nervousness 32 Passion Play 33 Beware of Brain Cramps 33 The Bottom Line: It’s Not about You 35 Chapter Takeaways 38 Note 39 Chapter 4 V—Vocal Variety: Pacing and Pausing with Purpose 41 The Musicality of Your Delivery—What’s Your Range? 42 What Is Vocal Variety? 42 Natural versus On-Camera Inflection 43 Setting Your Pace with the Viewer in Mind 44 Finishing Your Thoughts 45 Using the Power of the Pause 45 Pause for You 45 Filler Words as Placeholders 47 Pause for Them 47 The Lowdown on Uptalk 49 The Most Common Uptalk Trouble Spot 50 Chapter Takeaways 54 Note 54 Chapter 5 P—Physical Factors: On-Camera Movement with Meaning 55 On-Camera Gesturing: An Out-of-Body Experience 56 Getting Familiar with Frame Size 58 Gestures for a Tight Shot 58 Gestures for a Medium Shot 58 Gestures for a Wide Shot 59 Gestures as a Retention Tool 60 The Role of Off-Camera Movement 61 Posture Pointers 61 Standing While on Camera 62 The Metronome Effect 62 Going for a Walk 62 Sitting While on Camera 63 Crossed Legs 64 Leaning In or Out 64 Step In to Start 65 Making Eye Contact When You Can’t See Your Audience 66 Look Away 66 Performance Pitfalls: Eye Contact Errors 67 Vary Your Angle 68 Look Up 68 Chapter Takeaways 72 Notes 72 Section Three Ready to Wear . . . or Not 73 Chapter 6 Looking the Part—Wardrobe 101 75 Match Audience Expectations 77 Boring Is Best 78 Spin the Color Wheel 78 Special Consideration: Green-Screen Shoots 79 Solids: A Solid Choice 80 Putting on the Pounds 82 Dress Right for the Mic 82 Pack Placement 83 Microphone Placement 83 Jewelry Jukebox and Light Show 84 Your Fifth Appendage: A Smartphone 85 Additional Considerations for Men 85 Sock Style 86 The Uniform Look 87 To Button or Not to Button? 87 Chapter Takeaways 88 Notes 88 Chapter 7 Hair and Makeup 89 Hair Hassles 91 On-Camera Makeup Musts for Women 92 What You Need in Your Kit 93 Moisturizer 93 Foundation 93 Powder 94 Eye Makeup 94 Cheeks 94 Lip Color 95 Makeup for Men 95 Glasses or No Glasses 96 Chapter Takeaways 97 Section Four Best Practices for Creating Your On-Camera Message 99 Chapter 8 Organizing for the Ear 101 The Rule of Three 102 Applying the Rule of Three On Camera 103 Rule of Three via Skype 104 Your Core Message 105 The Rule of Three Expanded 106 Repetition, Repetition, Repetition 107 Chapter Takeaways 108 Note 108 Chapter 9 Writing for the Spoken Word 109 The Challenges of Reading Written Prose Aloud 110 Why the Whisper Test Won’t Work 111 Writing Tip 1: Keep It Short 111 Writing Tip 2: Don’t Fear the Grammar Police 112 Writing Tip 3: See Spot . . . Be Bored 113 Exercises for Writing the Way You Speak 113 Chapter Takeaways 116 Note 117 Section Five How to Read without Sounding Like You Are 119 Chapter 10 Marking Your Script 121 Step One: Smooth Out the Script 123 Step Two: Add Phonetics Where Appropriate 123 Step Three: Mark with Meaning 125 New vs. Old 126 The Name Stress Principle 128 How to Mark Your Copy for Emphasis 129 Emphasis Obstacles 130 Beware of Connotations 130 Too Much Stress 131 Step Four: Place Your Pauses 131 The Short Pause 132 The Power Pause 132 Marking Your Pauses 134 Pause Practice Example 134 Pause Pitfalls 135 It All Comes Down to This 136 Chapter Takeaways 137 Script Marking Exercises Answer Key 138 Notes 140 Chapter 11 Tackling the Teleprompter 141 Lessons Learned from Michael Bay’s Implosion 143 Lesson 1: Know Your Content 143 Lesson 2: Know Your Script 143 Lesson 3: Stay in the Moment 144 Teleprompter-Friendly Copy: Best Practices 144 Read Your Script in the Prompter before Your Performance 145 Effective Visual Cues in Teleprompter Copy 146 Options for Marking Emphasis 146 Options for Marking Pauses 147 Visual Cues Are Guides, Not Absolutes 149 The Role of the Teleprompter Operator 149 A Second Set of Eyes 150 Adjusting Font Size 150 Following the Leader 150 Editing on the Fly 151 No Mind Reading 151 Adjusting the Read Line 152 Prompter Practice Made Possible 152 The Proliferation of Prompter Software 153 Control the Scroll 153 Watch Yourself 154 Lost in the Teleprompter 154 Chapter Takeaways 155 Note 155 Section Six The Most Common On-Camera Performance Scenarios 157 Chapter 12 Presenting Directly to the Camera in a Studio Setting 159 Considerations for Corporate Video 161 A Lesson from TV News 161 Does Length Matter? 162 How Much Face Time Is Too Much? 163 Preparing for the Shoot 164 Creating Your Content 164 Identifying Your Viewer 164 Writing the Way You Speak 165 Marking for Meaning 165 Practice, Practice, Practice 166 Looking the Part 167 Microphone Matters 167 Hair Issues 168 Getting Rid of Your Fifth Appendage 168 Orienting Yourself to the Studio 169 Meet the Crew 169 The Floor Director 169 The Audio Technician 170 The Camera Operator 171 The Teleprompter Operator 171 The Crew’s Mission 171 Give Yourself the Once-Over 172 Getting Familiar with Your Performance Space 172 The Crew’s Final Prep 173 Pulling Off a Great Performance 173 Stay Focused Despite Distractions 174 The Most Dangerous Part of Your Performance 176 The Runaway Train Ramble 176 Mentally Moving On 177 Stopping the Performance before the Real End 177 Reviewing Your Performance 178 Chapter Takeaways 178 Chapter 13 Videoconferencing and Interviews via Video Chat 181 Changes in Where and How You Work 182 Hiring by Skype 184 Travel Cost Savings 185 Fewer Scheduling Headaches 185 Why You Want to Turn on Your Webcam 186 Best Practices for VC 187 Technical Considerations 187 Setting Considerations 189 Performance Considerations 191 Recording a Videoconference 193 Chapter Takeaways 197 Notes 198 Chapter 14 Webcasts—Best Practices for Panelists and Moderators 199 Why a Webcast Is Easier to Master 200 Best Practices for Panelists 202 Prepare Your Points 202 Plan Your Wardrobe 203 Take Advantage of Rehearsal Time 203 Focus on the Action 204 Where You Should Look 205 When Someone Asks You a Question 205 When Presenting Uninterrupted to Viewers 205 When Others Are Speaking 206 Opting Out of Using a Teleprompter 207 Handling the Unexpected Question 208 Best Practices for Moderators 208 Directing the Conversation 209 Preparing to Be a Moderator 209 Encouraging the Conversation 210 Being the Ultimate Editor 211 Staying Hydrated 212 Chapter Takeaways 213 Notes 213 Chapter 15 Broadcast Interview Basics 215 Before the TV Interview 216 Find Out the Focus 217 Simplify Your Talking Points 218 Seek to Speak in Sound Bites 219 Practice with a Peer 219 During the TV Interview 220 Establishing a Friendly Rapport 220 Checking Yourself in the Mirror 220 Realizing When the Camera Is On 221 Orally Editing Your Sound Bite 221 Controlling the Controllables 222 Pause to Ponder 222 Press Your Own Reset Button 222 Keep Your Cool 223 Answer Every Question as Best You Can 223 After the TV Interview 224 Interviews by Satellite 225 Introducing the IFB 226 Managing the Monitor 226 Waiting for the All-Clear 227 Chapter Takeaways 229 Notes 230 Conclusion: Embrace Communicating through the Camera 231 About the Author 233 Index 235
£22.40
John Wiley & Sons Inc Numerical Methods for Solving Partial
Book SynopsisA comprehensive guide to numerical methods for simulating physical-chemical systems This book offers a systematic, highly accessible presentation of numerical methods used to simulate the behavior of physical-chemical systems. Unlike most books on the subject, it focuses on methodology rather than specific applications. Written for students and professionals across an array of scientific and engineering disciplines and with varying levels of experience with applied mathematics, it provides comprehensive descriptions of numerical methods without requiring an advanced mathematical background. Based on its author's more than forty years of experience teaching numerical methods to engineering students, Numerical Methods for Solving Partial Differential Equations presents the fundamentals of all of the commonly used numerical methods for solving differential equations at a level appropriate for advanced undergraduates and first-year graduate students in sciencTable of ContentsPreface vii 1 Interpolation 1 1.1 Purpose 1 1.2 Definitions 1 1.3 Example 2 1.4 Weirstraus Approximation Theorem 3 1.5 Lagrange Interpolation 3 1.5.1 Example 6 1.6 Compare P2 (θ) and f (θ) 8 1.7 Error of Approximation 9 1.8 Multiple Elements 14 1.8.1 Example 17 1.9 Hermite Polynomials 19 1.10 Error in Approximation by Hermites 22 1.11 ChapterSummary 23 1.12 Problems 24 2 Numerical Differentiation 31 2.1 General Theory 31 2.2 Two-Point Difference Formulae 32 2.2.1 Forward Difference Formula 33 2.2.2 Backward Difference Formula 33 2.2.3 Example 34 2.2.4 Error of the Approximation 34 2.3 Two-Point Formulae from Taylor Series 36 2.4 Three-point Difference Formulae 38 2.4.1 First-Order Derivative Difference Formulae 39 2.4.2 Second-Order Derivatives 40 2.5 Chapter Summary 44 2.6 Problems 44 3 Numerical Integration 53 3.1 Newton-Cotes Quadrature Formula 53 3.1.1 Lagrange Interpolation 53 3.1.2 Trapezoidal Rule 54 3.1.3 Simpson’s Rule 55 3.1.4 General Form 56 3.1.5 Example using Simpson’s Rule 56 3.1.6 Gauss Legendre Quadrature 57 3.2 Chapter Summary 60 3.3 Problems 61 4 Initial Value Problems 65 4.1 Euler Forward Integration Method Example 66 4.2 Convergence 67 4.3 Consistency 70 4.4 Stability 71 4.4.1 Example of Stability 72 4.5 Lax Equivalence Theorem 72 4.6 Runge−Kutta Type Formulae 72 4.6.1 GeneralForm 72 4.6.2 Runge−Kutta First-Order Form (Euler’s Method) 73 4.6.3 Runge−Kutta Second-Order Form 73 4.7 ChapterSummary 76 4.8 Problems 76 5 Weighted Residuals Methods 81 5.1 Finite Volume or Subdomain Method 82 5.1.1 Example 84 5.1.2 Finite Difference Interpretation of the Finite Volume Method 91 5.2 Galerkin Method for First Order Equations 92 5.2.1 Finite-Difference Interpretation of the Galerkin Approximation 99 5.3 Galerkin Method for Second-Order Equations 99 5.3.1 Finite Difference Interpretation of Second-Order Galerkin Method 107 5.4 Finite Volume Method for Second-Order Equations 108 5.4.1 Example of Finite Volume Solution of a Second-Order Equation 112 5.4.2 Finite Difference Representation of the Finite-Volume Method for Second-Order Equations 118 5.5 CollocationMethod 119 5.5.1 CollocationMethod forFirst-OrderEquations 119 5.5.2 Collocation Method for Second-Order Equations 122 5.6 ChapterSummary 128 5.7 Problems 128 6 Initial Boundary-Value Problems 133 6.1 Introduction 133 6.2 Two Dimensional Polynomial Approximations 133 6.2.1 Example of a Two Dimensional Polynomial Approximation 134 6.3 Finite Difference Approximation 135 6.3.1 First-Order Accurate Finite Difference Calculation 137 6.3.2 Example of Second Order Accurate Finite Difference Approximation in Space 140 6.4 Stability of Finite Difference Approximations 143 6.4.1 Example of Stability 146 6.4.2 Example Simulation 149 6.5 Galerkin Finite Element Approximations in Time 151 6.5.1 Strategy One: Forward Difference Approximation 153 6.5.2 Strategy Two: Backward Difference Approximation 154 6.6 Chapter Summary 155 6.7 Problems 155 7 Finite Difference Methods in Two Space 161 7.1 Example Problem 166 7.2 Chapter Summary 168 7.3 Problems 168 8 Finite Element Methods in Two Space 173 8.1 Finite Element Approximations over Rectangles 173 8.2 Finite Element Approximations over Triangles 186 8.2.1 Formulation of Triangular Basis Functions 188 8.2.2 Example Problem of Finite Element Approximation over Triangles 191 8.2.3 Second Type or Neumann Boundary-Value Problem 198 8.3 Isoparametric Finite Element Approximation 202 8.3.1 Natural Coordinate Systems 202 8.3.2 Basis Functions 208 8.3.3 Calculation of the Jacobian 209 8.3.4 Example of Isoparametric Formulation 213 8.4 Chapter Summary 220 8.5 Problems 220 9 Finite Volume Approximation in Two Space 229 9.1 Finite Volume Formulation 229 9.2 Finite Volume Example Problem 1 235 9.2.1 Problem Definition 235 9.2.2 Weighted Residual Formulation 236 9.2.3 Element Coefficient Matrices 237 9.2.4 Evaluation of the Line Integral 238 9.2.5 Evaluation of the Area Integral 245 9.2.6 Global Matrix Assembly 249 9.3 Finite Volume Example Problem Two 250 9.3.1 Problem Definition 250 9.3.2 Weighted Residual Formulation 251 9.3.3 Element Coefficient Matrices 252 9.3.4 Evaluation of the Source Term 253 9.4 Chapter Summary 254 9.5 Problems 254 10 Initial Boundary-Value Problems 261 10.1 Mass Lumping 263 10.2 Chapter Summary 264 10.3 Problems 264 11 Boundary-Value Problems in Three Space 267 11.1 Finite Difference Approximations 267 11.2 Finite Element Approximations 268 11.3 Chapter Summary 273 12 Nomenclature 277 Index 281
£96.26
John Wiley & Sons Inc Lignocellulosic Biomass Production and Industrial
Book SynopsisThis book covers the utilization of lignocellulosic biomass for biofuel production as well as other industrial applications such as in biotechnology, paper and pulp, chemical and bioplastics. Lignocellulosic materials such as agricultural residues (e.g., wheat straw, sugarcane bagasse, corn stover), forest products (hardwood and softwood), and crops such as switchgrass and salix, are becoming a potent source for generating valuable products. Lignocellulosic Biomass Production and Industrial Applications describes the utilization of lignocellulosic biomass for various applications. Although there have been numerous reports on lignocellulosic biomass for biofuel application, there have been very few other applications reported for lignocellulosic biomass-based biotechnology, chemicals and polymers. This book covers both application areas. Besides describing the various types of biofuel production, such as bioethanol, biobutanol, biodiesel and biogas from lignocellulosic biomass, itTable of ContentsPreface xv 1 Valorization of Lignocellulosic Materials to Polyhydroxyalkanoates (PHAs) 1 Arpan Das 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Lignocellulose: An Abundant Carbon Source for PHA Production 5 1.3 Lignocellulosic Pretreatment Techniques 8 v vi Contents 1.4 Hydrolysis of Lingocellulose 14 1.5 Lignocellulose Biomass as Substrate for PHA Production 16 1.6 Conclusion 19 References 19 2 Biological Gaseous Energy Recovery from Lignocellulosic Biomass 27 Shantonu Roy 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 Simple Sugars as Feedstock 28 2.3 Complex Substrates as Feedstock 32 2.4 Biomass Feedstock 32 2.5 Waste as Feedstock 36 2.6 Industrial Wastewater 38 2.7 Conclusion 40 References 41 3 Alkali Treatment to Improve Physical, Mechanical and Chemical Properties of Lignocellulosic Natural Fibers for Use in Various Applications 47 Suvendu Manna, Prosenjit Saha, Sukanya Chudhury and Sabu Thomas 3.1 Introduction 48 Contents vii 3.3 Application of the Alkali-Steam-Treated Fibers 55 3.4 Summary 59 References 60 4 Biodiesel Production from Lignocellulosic Biomass Using Oleaginous Microbes: A Review 65 S.P. Jeevan Kumar, Lohit K. Srinivas Gujjala, Archana Dash, Bitasta Talukdar and Rintu Banerjee 4.1 Introduction 66 4.2 Lignocellulosics Distribution, Availability and Diversity 67 4.3 Prospective Oleaginous Microbes for Lipid Production 70 LCB Utilization 73 Co-Utilization of Substrate 74 4.4 Technical Know-How for Biodiesel Production from LCBs 76 4.5 Fermentation 78 4.6 Transesterification for Biodiesel Production 80 viii Contents 4.7 Characteristics of Fatty Acid Methyl Esters 83 4.8 Conclusion 83 References 84 5 Biopulping of Lignocellulose 93 Arijit Jana, Debashish Ghosh, Diptarka Dasgupta, Pradeep Kumar Das Mohapatra and Keshab Chandra Mondal 5.1 Introduction 93 5.2 Composition of Lignocellulosic Biomass 95 5.3 Pulping and its Various Processes 97 5.4 Biopulping – Process Overview 98 5.5 Advantages and Disadvantages of Biopulping 104 5.6 Future Prospects 105 Acknowledgment 105 References 106 6 Second Generation Bioethanol Production from Residual Biomass of the Rice Processing Industry 111 Luciana Luft, Juliana R. F. da Silva, Raquel C. Kuhn and Marcio A. Mazutti 6.1 Introduction 112 6.2 Residual Biomass 112 6.3 Rice and Processing 113 6.4 Pretreatment Techniques 115 121 6.5 Hydrolysis 124 6.6 Fermentation 125 6.7 Bioethanol Production 127 6.8 Concluding Remarks 127 Acknowledgments 128 References 128 7 Microbial Enzymes and Lignocellulosic Fuel Production 135 Avanthi Althuri, Anjani Devi Chintagunta, Knawang Chhunji Sherpa, Rajiv Chandra Rajak, Debajyoti Kundu, Jagriti Singh, Akanksha Rastogi and Rintu Banerjee 7.1 Introduction 136 Biofuel Production 136 7.2 Lignocellulosic Biomass as Sustainable Alternative for Fuel Production 137 7.2.1 Constituents of Lignocelluloses: Cellulose, Hemicellulose, Lignin and Other Biomolecules 138 7.3 Enzymes and Their Sources for Biofuel Generation 139 7.4 Microbial Enzymes towards Lignocellulosic Biomass Degradation 142 x Contents 7.5 Applications in Biofuel Production 159 7.6 Conclusion 162 References 163 8 Sugarcane: A Potential Agricultural Crop for Bioeconomy through Biorefinery 171 Knawang Chhunji Sherpa, Rajiv Chandra Rajak and Rintu Banerjee 8.1 Introduction 171 8.2 Present Status of Sugarcane Production and its Availability 173 8.3 Morphology of Sugarcane 174 8.4 Factors Involved in Sugarcane Production 175 8.5 Major Limitations of Sugarcane Production 185 8.6 An Overview of Biotechnological Developments for Sugarcane Improvement 186 8.7 By-Products of Sugarcane Processing 188 8.7.1 Bagasse 188 8.7.2 Molasses 189 8.7.3 Vinasse 189 8.8 Applications of Sugarcane for Biorefinery Concept 189 Contents xi 8.9 Utilization of Sugarcane Residue for Bioethanol Production 190 8.10 Conclusions 192 References 192 9 Lignocellulosic Biomass Availability Map: A GIS-Based Approach for Assessing Production Statistics of Lignocellulosics and its Application in Biorefinery 197 Sanjeev Kumar, G. Lohit Kumar Srinivas and Rintu Banerjee 9.1 Introduction 198 9.2 Geographical Information System (GIS) 199 9.3 Application of GIS in Mapping Lignocellulosic Biomass 202 9.4 Biofuels from Lignocellulosics 209 9.5 Conclusion 211 References 212 10 Lignocellulosic Biomass Utilization for the Production of Sustainable Chemicals and Polymers 215 Mukherjee Gunjan, Dhiman Gourav and Akhtar Nadeem 10.1 Introduction 216 10.2 Lignocellulosic Biomass 216 10.3 Pretreatment Strategies 219 Pulsed Electric Field 219 10.4 Value-Added Chemicals from Lignocellulosic Biomass 224 xii Contents 10.5 Sustainable Polymers from Lignocellulosic Biomass 228 (HMF)- and 2,5-Furandicarboxylic Acid (FDCA)-Based Polymers 229 Platform-Based Polymers 229 Platform-Based Polymers 231 Derived Polymers 234 10.6 Potential Challenges for a Sustainable Biorefinery 234 10.7 Environmental Effects of Biorefineries 235 10.8 Future Perspectives of Biorefineries and Their Products 236 10.9 Conclusion 236 References 237 Contents xiii 11 Utilization of Lignocellulosic Biomass for Biobutanol Production: A Review 247 Anand Prakash, Vinay Sharma, Deepak Kumar, Arindam Kuila and Arun Kumar Sharma 11.1 Introduction 247 11.2 Bioconversion of Lignocellulosic Biomass to Biobutanol 248 11.3 Composition of Lignocellulosic Biomass 248 11.4 Structure of Lignocellulosic Biomass 248 11.5 Biobutanol Production from Lignocellulosic Biomass 249 11.6 Conclusion 258 References 258 12 Application of Lignocellulosic Biomass in the Paper Industry 265 Mainak Mukhopadhyay and Debalina Bhattacharya 12.1 Introduction 265 12.2 Major Raw Materials Used in the Paper Industry 266 12.6 Conclusion 275 References 276
£152.06
John Wiley & Sons Inc Wireless Power Transfer for Electric Vehicles and
Book SynopsisFrom mobile, cable-free re-charging of electric vehicles, smart phones and laptops to collecting solar electricity from orbiting solar farms, wireless power transfer (WPT) technologies offer consumers and society enormous benefits.Table of ContentsPreface vii Part I Introduction 1 Introduction toMobile Power Electronics 3 2 Introduction toWireless Power Transfer (WPT) 19 3 Introduction to Electric Vehicles (EVs) 43 Part II Theories for Inductive Power Transfer (IPT) 4 Coupled Coil Model 53 5 Gyrator Circuit Model 67 6 MagneticMirror Model 99 7 General Unified Dynamic Phasor 129 Part III Dynamic Charging for Road-Powered Electric Vehicles (RPEVs) 8 Introduction to Dynamic Charging 155 9 History of RPEVs 161 10 Narrow-Width Single-Phase Power Rail (I-type) 209 11 Narrow-Width Dual-Phase Power Rail (I-type) 235 12 Ultra-Slim Power Rail (S-type) 251 13 Controller Design of Dynamic Chargers 273 14 Compensation Circuit 287 15 Electromagnetic Field (EMF) Cancel 313 16 Large Tolerance Design 337 17 Power Rail Segmentation and Deployment 357 Part IV Static Charging for Pure EVs and Plug-in Hybrid EVs 18 Introduction to Static Charging 379 19 Asymmetric Coils for Large Tolerance EV Chargers 399 20 DQ Coils for Large Tolerance EV Chargers 425 21 Capacitive Power Transfer for EV Chargers Coupler 435 22 Foreign Object Detection 457 Part V Mobile Applications for Phones and Robots 23 Review of Coupled Magnetic Resonance System(CMRS) 473 24 Mid-Range IPT by Dipole Coils 491 25 Long-Range IPT by Dipole Coils 513 26 Free-Space OmnidirectionalMobile Chargers 529 27 Two-Dimensional Omnidirectional IPT for Robots 563 Part VI Special Applications ofWireless Power 28 Magnetic Field Focusing 579 29 Wireless Nuclear Instrumentation 587 30 The Future ofWireless Power 607 Index 613
£89.06
John Wiley & Sons Inc Computational Methods in Electromagnetic
Book SynopsisOffers a comprehensive overview of the recent advances in the area of computational electromagnetics Computational Method in Electromagnetic Compatibility offers a review of the most recent advances in computational electromagnetics. The authorsnoted experts in the fieldexamine similar problems by taking different approaches related to antenna theory models and transmission line methods. They discuss various solution methods related to boundary integral equation techniques and finite difference techniques. The topics covered are related to realistic antenna systems including antennas for air traffic control or ground penetrating radar antennas; grounding systems (such as grounding systems for wind turbines); biomedical applications of electromagnetic fields (such as transcranial magnetic stimulation); and much more. The text features a number of illustrative computational examples and a reference list at the end of each chapter. The book is grounded in a rigorous theoretical approacTable of ContentsPreface xiii Part I Electromagnetic Field Coupling to ThinWire Configurations of Arbitrary Shape 1 1 Computational Electromagnetics – Introductory Aspects 3 1.1 The Character of Physical Models Representing Natural Phenomena 3 1.1.1 Scientific Method, a Definition, History, Development ... ? 3 1.1.2 Physical Model and the MathematicalMethod to Solve the Problem –The Essence of Scientific Theories 4 1.1.3 Philosophical Aspects Behind Scientific Theories 7 1.1.4 On the Character of Physical Models 8 1.2 Maxwell’s Equations 9 1.2.1 Original Form of Maxwell’s Equations 9 1.2.2 Modern Form of Maxwell’s Equations 10 1.2.3 From the Corner of Philosophy of Science 12 1.2.4 FDTD Solution of Maxwell’s Equations 13 1.2.5 Computational Examples 16 1.3 The ElectromagneticWave Equations 19 1.4 Conservation Laws in the Electromagnetic Field 20 1.5 Density of Quantity of Movement in the Electromagnetic Field 22 1.6 Electromagnetic Potentials 25 1.7 Solution of theWave Equation and Radiation Arrow of Time 25 1.8 Complex Phasor Form of Equations in Electromagnetics 27 1.8.1 The Generalized Symmetric Form of Maxwell’s Equations 27 1.8.2 Complex Phasor Form of ElectromagneticWave Equations 29 1.8.3 Poynting Theorem for Complex Phasors 29 References 31 2 Antenna Theory versus Transmission Line Approximation – General Considerations 33 2.1 A Note on EMC ComputationalModels 33 2.1.1 Classification of EMC Models 34 2.1.2 Summary Remarks on EMC Modeling 34 2.2 Generalized Telegrapher’s Equations for the Field Coupling to Finite LengthWires 35 2.2.1 Frequency Domain Analysis for StraightWires above a Lossy Ground 36 2.2.1.1 Integral Equation for PECWire of Finite Length above a Lossy Ground 37 2.2.1.2 Integral Equation for a Lossy Conductor above a Lossy Ground 39 2.2.1.3 Generalized Telegraphers Equations for PECWires 39 2.2.1.4 Generalized Telegraphers Equations for Lossy Conductors 42 2.2.1.5 Numerical Solution of Integral Equations 43 2.2.1.6 Simulation Results 46 2.2.1.7 Simulation Results and Comparison with TLTheory 46 2.2.2 Frequency Domain Analysis for StraightWires Buried in a Lossy Ground 51 2.2.2.1 Integral Equation for Lossy Conductor Buried in a Lossy Ground 51 2.2.2.2 Generalized Telegraphers Equations for Buried LossyWires 54 2.2.2.3 Computational Examples 56 2.2.3 Time Domain Analysis for StraightWires above a Lossy Ground 61 2.2.3.1 Space–Time Integro-Differential Equation for PECWire above a Lossy Ground 61 2.2.3.2 Space–Time Integro-Differential Equation for Lossy Conductors 65 2.2.3.3 Generalized Telegraphers Equations for PECWires 66 2.2.3.4 Generalized Telegrapher’s Equations for Lossy Conductors 70 2.2.4 Time Domain Analysis for StraightWires Buried in a Lossy Ground 74 2.2.4.1 Space–Time Integro-Differential Equation for PECWire below a Lossy Ground 74 2.2.4.2 Space–Time Integro-Differential Equation for Lossy Conductors 79 2.2.4.3 Generalized Telegrapher’s Equations for BuriedWires 80 2.2.4.4 Computational Results: BuriedWire Scatterer 82 2.2.4.5 Computational Results: Horizontal Grounding Electrode 84 2.3 Single HorizontalWire in the Presence of a Lossy Half-Space: Comparison of Analytical Solution, Numerical Solution, and Transmission Line Approximation 86 2.3.1 Wire above a Perfect Ground 88 2.3.2 Wire above an Imperfect Ground 89 2.3.3 Wire Buried in a Lossy Ground 89 2.3.4 Analytical Solution 90 2.3.5 Boundary Element Procedure 92 2.3.6 The Transmission Line Model 93 2.3.7 Modified Transmission Line Model 94 2.3.8 Computational Examples 95 2.3.8.1 Wire above a PEC Ground 95 2.3.8.2 Wire above a Lossy Ground 95 2.3.8.3 Wire Buried in a Lossy Ground 103 2.3.9 Field Transmitted in a Lower Lossy Half-Space 103 2.3.10 Numerical Results 110 2.4 Single VerticalWire in the Presence of a Lossy Half-Space: Comparison of Analytical Solution, Numerical Solution, and Transmission Line Approximation 114 2.4.1 Numerical Solution 117 2.4.2 Analytical Solution 119 2.4.3 Computational Examples 121 2.4.3.1 Transmitting Antenna 122 2.4.3.2 Receiving Antenna 122 2.5 Magnetic Current Loop Excitation of ThinWires 132 2.5.1 Delta Gap and Magnetic Frill 134 2.5.2 Magnetic Current Loop 135 2.5.3 Numerical Solution 136 2.5.4 Numerical Results 139 References 146 3 Electromagnetic Field Coupling to OverheadWires 153 3.1 Frequency Domain Models and Methods 154 3.1.1 Antenna Theory Approach: Set of Coupled Pocklington’s Equations 154 3.1.2 Numerical Solution 160 3.1.3 Transmission Line Approximation: Telegrapher’s Equations in the Frequency Domain 162 3.1.4 Computational Examples 162 3.2 Time Domain Models and Methods 167 3.2.1 The Antenna Theory Model 167 3.2.2 The Numerical Solution 175 3.2.3 The Transmission Line Model 181 3.2.4 The Solution of Transmission Line Equations via FDTD 182 3.2.5 Numerical Results 184 3.3 Applications to Antenna Systems 187 3.3.1 Helix Antennas 187 3.3.2 Log-Periodic Dipole Arrays 190 3.3.3 GPR Dipole Antennas 198 References 202 4 Electromagnetic Field Coupling to BuriedWires 205 4.1 Frequency Domain Modeling 205 4.1.1 Antenna Theory Approach: Set of Coupled Pocklington’s Equations for ArbitraryWire Configurations 206 4.1.2 Antenna Theory Approach: Numerical Solution 210 4.1.3 Transmission Line Approximation: 212 4.1.4 Computational Examples 213 4.2 Time Domain Modeling 216 4.2.1 Antenna Theory Approach 216 4.2.2 Transmission Line Model 219 4.2.3 Computational Examples 223 References 223 5 Lightning Electromagnetics 225 5.1 AntennaModel of Lightning Channel 225 5.1.1 Integral Equation Formulation 226 5.1.2 Computational Examples 228 5.2 Vertical AntennaModel of a Lightning Rod 230 5.2.1 Integral Equation Formulation 234 5.2.2 Computational Examples 236 5.3 AntennaModel of aWind Turbine Exposed to Lightning Strike 237 5.3.1 Integral Equation Formulation for Multiple OverheadWires 240 5.3.2 Numerical Solution of Integral Equation Set for Overhead Wires 241 5.3.3 Computational Example: Transient Response of aWT Lightning Strike 242 References 247 6 Transient Analysis of Grounding Systems 253 6.1 Frequency Domain Analysis of Horizontal Grounding Electrode 254 6.1.1 Integral Equation Formulation/Reflection Coefficient Approach 254 6.1.2 Numerical Solution 257 6.1.3 Integral Equation Formulation/Sommerfeld Integral Approach 258 6.1.4 Analytical Solution 260 6.1.5 Modified Transmission Line Method (TLM) Approach 261 6.1.6 Computational Examples 261 6.1.7 Application of Magnetic Current Loop (MCL) Source model to Horizontal Grounding Electrode 284 6.2 Frequency Domain Analysis of Vertical Grounding Electrode 288 6.2.1 Integral Equation Formulation/Reflection Coefficient Approach 288 6.2.2 Numerical Solution 290 6.2.3 Analytical Solution 291 6.2.4 Examples 292 6.3 Frequency Domain Analysis of Complex Grounding Systems 297 6.3.1 Antenna Theory Approach: Set of Homogeneous Pocklington’s Integro-Differential Equations for Grounding Systems 298 6.3.2 Antenna Theory Approach: Numerical Solution 300 6.3.3 Modified Transmission Line Method Approach 301 6.3.4 Finite Difference Solution of the Potential Differential Equation for Transient Induced Voltage 301 6.3.5 Computational Examples: Grounding Grids and Rings 304 6.3.6 Computational Examples: Grounding Systems forWTs 311 6.4 Time Domain Analysis of Horizontal Grounding Electrodes 320 6.4.1 Homogeneous Integral Equation Formulation in the Time Domain 321 6.4.2 Numerical Solution Procedure for Pocklington’s Equation 322 6.4.3 Numerical Results for Grounding Electrode 323 6.4.4 Analytical Solution of Pocklington’s Equation 323 6.4.5 Transmission Line Model 324 6.4.6 FDTD Solution of Telegrapher’s Equations 325 6.4.7 The Leakage Current 326 6.4.8 Computational Examples for the Horizontal Grounding Electrode 328 References 331 Part II Advanced Models in Bioelectromagnetics 337 7 Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields – General Aspects 339 7.1 Dosimetry 340 7.1.1 Low Frequency Exposures 341 7.1.2 High Frequency Exposures 342 7.2 Coupling Mechanisms 342 7.2.1 Coupling to LF Electric Fields 343 7.2.2 Coupling to LF Magnetic Fields 343 7.2.3 Absorption of Energy from Electromagnetic Radiation 343 7.2.4 Indirect Coupling Mechanisms 344 7.3 Biological Effects 344 7.3.1 Effects of ELF Fields 345 7.3.2 Effects of HF Radiation 345 7.4 Safety Guidelines and Exposure Limits 348 7.5 Some Remarks 351 References 351 8 Modeling of Human Exposure to Static and Low Frequency Fields 353 8.1 Exposure to Static Fields 354 8.1.1 Finite Element Solution 356 8.1.2 Boundary Element Solution 357 8.1.3 Numerical Results 360 8.2 Exposure to Low Frequency (LF) Fields 361 8.2.1 Numerical Results 362 References 363 9 Modeling of Human Exposure to High Frequency (HF) Electromagnetic Fields 365 9.1 Internal Electromagnetic Field DosimetryMethods 366 9.1.1 Solution by the Hybrid Finite Element/Boundary Element Approach 366 9.1.2 Numerical Results for the Human Eye Exposure 368 9.1.3 Solution by the Method of Moments 372 9.1.4 Computational Example for the Brain Exposure 380 9.2 Thermal Dosimetry Procedures 381 9.2.1 Finite Element Solution of Bio-Heat Transfer Equation 381 9.2.2 Numerical Results 382 References 383 10 Biomedical Applications of Electromagnetic Fields 387 10.1 Modeling of Induced Fields due to Transcranial Magnetic Stimulation (TMS) Treatment 388 10.1.1 Numerical Results 391 10.2 Modeling of Nerve Fiber Excitation 392 10.2.1 Passive Nerve Fiber 396 10.2.2 Numerical Results for Passive Nerve Fiber 397 10.2.3 Active Nerve Fiber 397 10.2.4 Numerical Results for Active Nerve Fiber 401 References 403 Index 407
£102.55
John Wiley & Sons Inc Provisioning Recovery and InOperation Planning in
Book SynopsisExplains the importance of Elastic Optical Networks (EONs) and how they can be implemented by the world's carriers This book discusses Elastic Optical Networks (EONs) from an operational perspective. It presents algorithms that are suitable for real-time operation and includes experimental results to further demonstrate the feasibility of the approaches discussed. It covers practical issues such as provisioning, protection, and defragmentation. It also presents provisioning and recovery in single layer elastic optical networks (EON). The authors review algorithms for provisioning point-to-point, anycast, and multicast connections, as well as transfer-based connections for datacenter interconnection. They also include algorithms for recovery connections from failures in the optical layer and in-operation planning algorithms for EONs. Provisioning, Recovery and In-operation Planning in Elastic Optical Network also examines multi-layer scenarios. It covers vTable of ContentsList of Contributors xiii 1 Motivation 1 1.1 Motivation 1 1.2 Book Outline 8 1.3 Book Itineraries 11 Acknowledgment 12 Part I Introduction 13 2 Background 15 2.1 Introduction to Graph Theory 16 2.2 Introduction to Optimization 20 2.3 ILP Models and Heuristics for Routing Problems 22 2.3.1 ILP Formulations 22 2.3.2 Heuristics 25 2.3.3 Meta]Heuristics 27 2.4 Introduction to the Optical Technology 30 2.4.1 From Opaque to Transparent Optical Networks 31 2.4.2 Single]Layer and Multilayer Networks 32 2.4.3 EON Key Technologies 33 2.5 Network Life Cycle 35 2.5.1 Connection Provisioning 36 2.5.2 Connection Recovery 37 2.6 Conclusions 40 3 The Routing and Spectrum Allocation Problem 43 3.1 Introduction 44 3.2 The RSA Problem 45 3.2.1 Basic Offline Problem Statement 45 3.2.2 Notation 46 3.3 ILP Formulations Based On Slice Assignment 47 3.3.1 Starting Slice Assignment RSA (SSA]RSA) Formulation 47 3.3.2 Slice Assignment RSA (SA]RSA) Formulation 48 3.4 ILP Formulations Based On Slot Assignment 49 3.4.1 Slot Precomputation 49 3.4.2 Slot Assignment RSA (CA]RSA) Formulation 50 3.5 Evaluation of the ILP Formulations 51 3.5.1 Model Size Analysis 51 3.5.2 Performance Comparison 52 3.5.3 Evaluation in Real Scenarios 54 3.6 The RMSA Problem 56 3.6.1 Notation Extensions 56 3.6.2 Basic Offline Problem 56 3.6.3 Topology Design Problem as an RMSA Problem 57 3.7 Conclusions 60 4 Architectures for Provisioning and In]operation Planning 61 4.1 Introduction 62 4.2 Architectures for Dynamic Network Operation 64 4.2.1 Static versus Dynamic Network Operation 64 4.2.2 Migration toward In]operation Network Planning 65 4.2.3 Required Functionalities 67 4.2.4 The Front]end/Back]end PCE Architecture 68 4.3 In]operation Planning: Use Cases 73 4.3.1 VNT Reconfiguration after a Failure 73 4.3.2 Reoptimization 76 4.4 Toward Cloud]Ready Transport Networks 78 4.5 Conclusions 84 Part II Provisioning in Single Layer Networks 85 5 Dynamic Provisioning of p2p Demands 87 5.1 Introduction 88 5.2 Provisioning in Transparent Networks 90 5.2.1 Problem Statement 90 5.2.2 Dynamic RSA Algorithm 90 5.2.3 Dynamic RMSA Algorithm 91 5.2.4 Bulk RSA Algorithm 92 5.2.5 Illustrative Results 93 5.3 Provisioning in Translucent Networks 99 5.4 Dynamic Spectrum Allocation Adaption 102 5.4.1 Spectrum Allocation Policies 103 5.4.2 Problem Statement 104 5.4.3 Spectrum Adaption Algorithms 105 5.4.4 Illustrative Results 106 5.5 Conclusions 110 6 Transfer]based Datacenter Interconnection 113 6.1 Introduction 114 6.2 Application Service Orchestrator 116 6.2.1 Models for Transfer]based Connections 117 6.2.2 Illustrative Results 121 6.3 Routing and Scheduled Spectrum Allocation 124 6.3.1 Managing Transfer]based Connections 124 6.3.2 The RSSA Problem 126 6.3.3 ILP Formulation 127 6.3.4 Algorithms to Manage Transfer]based Requests 130 6.3.5 Illustrative Results 132 6.4 Conclusions 138 7 Provisioning Multicast and Anycast Demands 141 7.1 Introduction 142 7.2 Multicast Provisioning 143 7.2.1 P2MP]RSA Problem Statement 145 7.2.2 ILP Formulation 145 7.2.3 Heuristic Algorithm 148 7.2.4 Illustrative Numerical Results 150 7.2.5 Proposed Workflows and Protocol Issues 152 7.2.6 Experimental Assessment 154 7.3 Anycast Provisioning 156 7.3.1 Optical Anycast (AC_RSA) Problem Statement 157 7.3.2 Exact Algorithm for the AC_RSA Problem 157 7.3.3 Illustrative Numerical Results 158 7.3.4 Proposed Workflow 159 7.3.5 Experimental Assessment 161 7.4 Conclusions 162 Part III Recovery and In]operation Planning in Single Layer Networks 163 8 Spectrum Defragmentation 165 8.1 Introduction 166 8.2 Spectrum Reallocation and Spectrum Shifting 168 8.3 Spectrum Reallocation: The SPRESSO Problem 170 8.3.1 Problem Statement 170 8.3.2 ILP Formulation 170 8.3.3 Heuristic Algorithm 172 8.4 Spectrum Shifting: The SPRING Problem 178 8.4.1 Problem Statement 178 8.4.2 ILP Formulation 178 8.4.3 Heuristic Algorithm 179 8.5 Performance Evaluation 180 8.5.1 SPRESSO Heuristics Tuning 180 8.5.2 Heuristics versus the ILP Model 182 8.5.3 Performance of the SPRESSO Algorithm 182 8.6 Experimental Assessment 184 8.6.1 Proposed Workflow and Algorithm 184 8.6.2 PCEP Issues 186 8.6.3 Experiments 188 8.7 Conclusions 191 9 Restoration in the Optical Layer 193 9.1 Introduction 194 9.2 Bitrate Squeezing and Multipath Restoration 195 9.2.1 The BATIDO Problem 197 9.2.2 ILP Formulation 197 9.2.3 Heuristic Algorithm 200 9.2.4 Numerical Results 202 9.3 Modulation Format]Aware Restoration 207 9.3.1 The MF]Restoration Problem 210 9.3.2 Algorithm for MF]Restoration 211 9.3.3 Protocol Extensions and Proposed Workflows 213 9.3.4 Experimental Assessment 216 9.4 Recovering Anycast Connections 216 9.4.1 ILP Formulations and Algorithm 217 9.4.2 Proposed Workflow 220 9.4.3 Validation 221 9.5 Conclusions 223 10 After]Failure]Repair Optimization 225 10.1 Introduction 226 10.2 The AFRO Problem 228 10.2.1 Problem Statement 230 10.2.2 Optimization Algorithm 230 10.2.3 ILP Formulation 231 10.2.4 Heuristic Algorithm 233 10.2.5 Disruption Considerations 234 10.2.6 Performance Evaluation 236 10.3 Restoration and AFRO with Multiple Paths 240 10.3.1 Problem Statement 242 10.3.2 MILP Formulation 242 10.3.3 Heuristic Algorithm 244 10.3.4 MP]AFRO Performance Evaluation 245 10.4 Experimental Validation 246 10.4.1 Proposed Reoptimization Workflow 246 10.4.2 Experimental Assessment 249 10.5 Conclusions 252 Part IV Multilayer Networks 255 11 Virtual Network Topology Design and Reconfiguration 257 11.1 Introduction 258 11.2 VNT Design and Reconfiguration Options 259 11.3 Static VNT Design 262 11.3.1 The VNT Design Problem 262 11.3.2 MILP Formulation 262 11.4 VNT Reconfiguration Based on Traffic Measures 264 11.4.1 The VENTURE Problem 264 11.4.2 ILP Formulation 265 11.4.3 Heuristic Algorithm 267 11.4.4 Proposed Workflow 272 11.5 Results 273 11.5.1 Simulation Results 273 11.5.2 Experimental Assessment 275 11.6 Conclusions 278 12 Recovery in Multilayer Networks 279 12.1 Introduction 280 12.2 Path Restoration in GMPLS]Controlled Networks 281 12.2.1 The DYNAMO Problem 285 12.2.2 MP Formulation 285 12.2.3 Heuristic Algorithm 290 12.2.4 DYNAMO Numerical Results 290 12.2.5 PCE Architecture 297 12.2.6 Experimental Results 299 12.3 Survivable VNT for DC Synchronization 302 12.3.1 Mathematical Formulations and Algorithms 304 12.3.2 Workflows and Protocol Extensions 309 12.3.3 Experimental Assessment 310 12.4 Conclusions 312 Part V Future Trends 313 13 High Capacity Optical Networks Based on Space Division Multiplexing 315 13.1 Introduction 316 13.2 SDM Fibers 319 13.2.1 Uncoupled/Weakly Coupled Spatial Dimensions 320 13.2.2 Strongly Coupled Spatial Dimensions 320 13.2.3 Subgroups of Strongly Coupled Spatial Dimensions 321 13.3 SDM Switching Paradigms 322 13.4 Resource Allocation in SDM Networks 325 13.5 Impact of Traffic Profile on the Performance of Spatial Sp]Ch Switching in SDM Networks 332 13.5.1 Illustrative Results 333 13.6 Impact of Spatial and Spectral Granularity on the Performance of SDM Networks Based on Spatial Sp]Ch Switching 336 13.6.1 Illustrative Results 338 13.7 Conclusions 342 14 Dynamic Connectivity Services in Support of Future Mobile Networks 345 14.1 Introduction 346 14.2 C]RAN Requirements and CVN Support 348 14.2.1 C]RAN Architecture Model 349 14.2.2 Backhaul Requirements in C]RAN 349 14.2.3 CVN Reconfiguration 351 14.3 The CUVINET Problem 354 14.3.1 Problem Statement 354 14.3.2 MILP Formulation 355 14.3.3 Heuristic Algorithm 359 14.4 Illustrative Numerical Results 361 14.4.1 Network Scenario 361 14.4.2 Heuristic Algorithm Validation 362 14.4.3 Approaches to Support CVNs 362 14.4.4 Performance Evaluation 363 14.5 Conclusions 367 15 Toward Cognitive In]operation Planning 369 15.1 Introduction 370 15.2 Data Analytics for Failure Localization 371 15.2.1 Algorithm for Failure Identification/Localization 372 15.2.2 Experiments and Results 375 15.2.3 Generic Modules to Implement the OAA Loop 377 15.3 Data Analytics to Model Origin–Destination Traffic 378 15.3.1 Generic Modules for VNT Reconfiguration Based on Traffic Modeling 378 15.3.2 Machine Learning Procedure for Traffic Estimation 380 15.3.3 Use Case I: Anomaly Detection 383 15.3.4 Use Case II: VNT Reconfiguration Triggered by Anomaly Detection 390 15.4 Adding Cognition to the ABNO Architecture 393 15.5 Conclusions 395 List of Acronyms 397 References 403 Index 419
£93.56
John Wiley & Sons Inc Bandwidth Efficient Coding
Book SynopsisThis book addresses coding, a new solution to the major challenge of communicating more bits of information in the same radio spectrum.Table of ContentsPreface ix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Electrical Communication, 2 1.2 Modulation, 4 1.3 Time and Bandwidth, 9 1.4 Coding Versus Modulation, 13 1.5 A Tour of the Book, 14 1.6 Conclusions, 15 2 Communication Theory Foundation 17 2.1 Signal Space, 18 2.2 Optimal Detection, 24 2.3 Pulse Aliasing, 35 2.4 Signal Phases and Channel Models, 37 2.5 Error Events, 43 2.6 Conclusions, 50 3 Gaussian Channel Capacity 58 3.1 Classical Channel Capacity, 59 3.2 Capacity for an Error Rate and Spectrum, 64 3.3 Linear Modulation Capacity, 68 3.4 Conclusions, 72 4 Faster than Nyquist Signaling 79 4.1 Classical FTN, 80 4.2 Reduced ISI-BCJR Algorithms, 87 4.3 Good Convolutional Codes, 101 4.4 Iterative Decoding Results, 110 4.5 Conclusions, 114 5 Multicarrier FTN 127 5.1 Classical Multicarrier FTN, 128 5.2 Distances, 134 5.3 Alternative Methods and Implementations, 138 5.4 Conclusions, 143 6 Coded Modulation Performance 145 6.1 Set-Partition Coding, 146 6.2 Continuous Phase Modulation, 153 6.3 Conclusions for Coded Modulation; Highlights, 161 7 Optimal Modulation Pulses 163 7.1 Slepian’s Problem, 164 7.2 Said’s Optimum Distance Pulses, 177 7.3 Conclusions, 185 Index 190
£101.66
John Wiley & Sons Inc Introduction to AC Machine Design
Book SynopsisThe only book on the market that emphasizes machine design beyond the basic principles of AC and DC machine behavior AC electrical machine design is a key skill set for developing competitive electric motors and generators for applications in industry, aerospace, and defense.Table of ContentsPreface and Acknowledgments xiii List of Principal Symbols xv About the Author xxiii Chapter 1 Magnetic Circuits 1 1.1 Biot–Savart Law 1 1.2 The Magnetic Field B 2 1.3 Example—Computation of Flux Density B 3 1.4 The Magnetic Vector Potential A 5 1.5 Example—Calculation of Magnetic Field from the Magnetic Vector Potential 6 1.6 Concept of Magnetic Flux 7 1.7 The Electric Field E 9 1.8 Ampere’s Law 10 1.9 Magnetic Field Intensity H 12 1.10 Boundary Conditions for B and H 15 1.11 Faraday’s Law 17 1.12 Induced Electric Field Due to Motion 18 1.13 Permeance, Reluctance, and the Magnetic Circuit 19 1.14 Example—Square Toroid 23 1.15 Multiple Circuit Paths 23 1.16 General Expression for Reluctance 24 1.17 Inductance 27 1.18 Example—Internal Inductance of a Wire Segment 28 1.19 Magnetic Field Energy 29 1.20 The Problem of Units 31 1.21 Magnetic Paths Wholly in Iron 33 1.22 Magnetic Materials 35 1.23 Example—Transformer Structure 37 1.24 Magnetic Circuits with Air Gaps 40 1.25 Example—Magnetic Structure with Saturation 42 1.26 Example—Calculation for Series–Parallel Iron Paths 43 1.27 Multiple Winding Magnetic Circuits 44 1.28 Magnetic Circuits Applied to Electrical Machines 46 1.29 Effect of Excitation Coil Placement 48 1.30 Conclusion 50 Reference 50 Chapter 2 The MMF and Field Distribution of an AC Winding 51 2.1 MMF and Field Distribution of a Full-Pitch Winding for a Two Pole Machine 51 2.2 Fractional Pitch Winding for a Two-Pole Machine 54 2.3 Distributed Windings 56 2.4 Concentric Windings 62 2.5 Effect of Slot Openings 64 2.6 Fractional Slot Windings 67 2.7 Winding Skew 70 2.8 Pole Pairs and Circuits Greater than One 73 2.9 MMF Distribution for Three-Phase Windings 73 2.10 Concept of an Equivalent Two-Phase Machine 76 2.11 Conclusion 77 References 77 Chapter 3 Main Flux Path Calculations Using Magnetic Circuits 79 3.1 The Main Magnetic Circuit of an Induction Machine 79 3.2 The Effective Gap and Carter’s Coefficient 80 3.3 The Effective Length 84 3.4 Calculation of Tooth Reluctance 86 3.5 Example 1—Tooth MMF Drop 89 3.6 Calculation of Core Reluctance 94 3.7 Example 2—MMF Drop Over Main Magnetic Circuit 102 3.8 Magnetic Equivalent Circuit 111 3.9 Flux Distribution in Highly Saturated Machines 112 3.10 Calculation of Magnetizing Reactance 116 3.11 Example 3—Calculation of Magnetizing Inductance 120 3.12 Conclusion 123 References 124 Chapter 4 Use of Magnetic Circuits in Leakage Reactance Calculations 125 4.1 Components of Leakage Flux in Induction Machines 125 4.2 Specific Permeance 127 4.3 Slot Leakage Permeance Calculations 129 4.4 Slot Leakage Inductance of a Single-Layer Winding 134 4.5 Slot Leakage Permeance of Two-Layer Windings 135 4.6 Slot Leakage Inductances of a Double-Cage Winding 137 4.7 Slot Leakage Inductance of a Double-Layer Winding 139 4.8 End-Winding Leakage Inductance 144 4.8.1 Method of Images 144 4.8.2 End-Winding Leakage Inductance of Random-Wound Coils 147 4.8.3 End-Winding Leakage Inductance of a Coil with Stator Iron Treated as a Perfect Conductor 148 4.8.4 End-Winding Leakage Inductance of a Coil with Stator Iron Treated as Air 150 4.8.5 End-Winding Leakage Inductance per Phase 153 4.8.6 End-Winding Leakage of Form-Wound Coils 153 4.8.7 Squirrel-Cage End-Winding Inductance 155 4.9 Stator Harmonic or Belt Leakage 156 4.10 Zigzag Leakage Inductance 159 4.11 Example 4—Calculation of Leakage Inductances 164 4.12 Effective Resistance and Inductance Per Phase of Squirrel-Cage Rotor 171 4.13 Fundamental Component of Rotor Air Gap MMF 175 4.14 Rotor Harmonic Leakage Inductance 177 4.15 Calculation of Mutual Inductances 181 4.16 Example 5—Calculation of Rotor Leakage Inductance Per Phase 186 4.17 Skew Leakage Inductance 187 4.18 Example 6—Calculation of Skew Leakage Effects 189 4.19 Conclusion 190 References 190 Chapter 5 Calculation of Induction Machine Losses 193 5.1 Introduction 193 5.2 Eddy Current Effects in Conductors 194 5.3 Calculation of Stator Resistance 203 5.4 Example 7—Calculation of Stator and Rotor Resistance 205 5.5 Rotor Parameters of Irregularly Shaped Bars 212 5.6 Categories of Electrical Steels 216 5.7 Core Losses Due to Fundamental Flux Component 217 5.8 Stray Load and No-Load Losses 222 5.9 Calculation of Surface Iron Losses Due to Stator Slotting 228 5.10 Calculation of Tooth Pulsation Iron Losses 237 5.11 Friction and Windage Losses 244 5.12 Example 8—Calculation of Iron Loss Resistances 244 5.13 Conclusion 250 References 250 Chapter 6 Principles of Design 251 6.1 Design Factors 251 6.2 Standards for Machine Construction 252 6.3 Main Design Features 255 6.4 The D2L Output Coefficient 258 6.4.1 Essen’s Rule 259 6.4.2 Magnetic Shear Stress 261 6.4.3 The Aspect Ratio 265 6.4.4 Base Impedance 268 6.5 The D3L Output Coefficient 269 6.6 Power Loss Density 277 6.7 The D2.5L Sizing Equation 277 6.8 Choice of Magnetic Loading 278 6.8.1 Maximum Flux Density in Iron 279 6.8.2 Magnetizing Current 280 6.9 Choice of Electric Loading 281 6.9.1 Voltage Rating 281 6.9.2 Current Density Constraints 282 6.9.3 Representative Values of Current Density 285 6.10 Practical Considerations Concerning Stator Construction 287 6.10.1 Random Wound vs. Formed Coil Windings 288 6.10.2 Delta vs. Wye Connection 289 6.10.3 Lamination Insulation 290 6.10.4 Selection of Stator Slot Number 290 6.10.5 Choice of Dimensions of Active Material for NEMA Designs 291 6.10.6 Selection of Wire Size 292 6.10.7 Selection of Air Gap 293 6.11 Rotor Construction 293 6.11.1 Slot Combinations to Avoid 294 6.11.2 Rotor Heating During Starting or Under Stalled Conditions 294 6.12 The Design Process 295 6.13 Effect of Machine Performance by a Change in Dimension 299 6.14 Conclusion 302 References 302 Chapter 7 Thermal Design 305 7.1 The Thermal Problem 305 7.2 Temperature Limits and Maximum Temperature Rise 306 7.3 Heat Conduction 307 7.3.1 Simple Heat Conduction Through a Rectangular Plate 308 7.3.2 Heat Conduction Through a Cylinder 309 7.3.3 Heat Conduction with Simple Internal Heat Generation 311 7.3.4 Example 9—Stator Winding Heating 313 7.3.5 One-Dimensional Conductive Heat Flow with Distributed Internal Heat Generation 314 7.3.6 Two- and Three-Dimensional Conductive Heat Flow with Internal Distributed Heat Generation 316 7.3.7 Application of Two-Dimensional Heat Flow to Stator Teeth 317 7.3.8 Radial Heat Flow Over Solid Cylinder with Internal Heat Generation 318 7.3.9 Heat Flow Over Cylindrical Shell with Internal Distributed Heat Generation 320 7.4 Heat Convection on Plane Surfaces 325 7.5 Heat Flow Across the Air Gap 327 7.6 Heat Transfer by Radiation 328 7.7 Cooling Methods and Systems 329 7.7.1 Surface Cooling by Air 329 7.7.2 Internal Cooling 329 7.7.3 Cooling in a Circulatory System 329 7.7.4 Cooling with Liquids 330 7.7.5 Direct Gas Cooling 330 7.7.6 Gas as a Cooling Medium 331 7.7.7 Liquids as a Cooling Medium 332 7.8 Thermal Equivalent Circuit 333 7.9 Example 10—Heat Distribution of 250 HP Induction Machine 338 7.9.1 Heat Inputs 339 7.9.2 Thermal Resistances 342 7.10 Transient Heat Flow 353 7.10.1 Externally Generated Heat 353 7.10.2 Internally Generated Heat—Stalled Operation 354 7.10.3 Thermal Instability 356 7.11 Conclusion 357 References 357 Chapter 8 Permanent Magnet Machines 359 8.1 Magnet Characteristics 359 8.2 Hysteresis 362 8.3 Permanent Magnet Materials 364 8.4 Determination of Magnet Operating Point 366 8.5 Sinusoidally FED Surface PM Motor 369 8.6 Flux Density Constraints 373 8.7 Current Density Constraints 376 8.8 Choice of Aspect Ratio 377 8.9 Eddy Current Iron Losses 377 8.9.1 Eddy Current Tooth Iron Losses 378 8.9.2 Eddy Current Yoke Iron Losses 379 8.10 Equivalent Circuit Parameters 380 8.10.1 Magnetizing Inductance 381 8.10.2 Current Source 382 8.10.3 Eddy Current Iron Loss Resistance 382 8.10.4 Alternate Equivalent Circuit 383 8.11 Temperature Constraints and Cooling Capability 383 8.12 Magnet Protection 384 8.12.1 Magnet Protection for Maximum Steady-State Current 384 8.12.2 Magnet Protection for Transient Conditions 386 8.13 Design for Flux Weakening 387 8.14 PM Motor with Inset Magnets 389 8.14.1 Short-Circuit Protection 392 8.14.2 Flux Weakening 392 8.15 Cogging Torque 393 8.16 Ripple Torque 394 8.17 Design Using Ferrite Magnets 394 8.18 Permanent Machines with Buried Magnets 395 8.18.1 PM Machines with Buried Circumferential Magnets 396 8.19 Conclusion 399 Acknowledgment 400 References 400 Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Design of Synchronous Machines 401 9.1 Calculation of Useful Flux Per Pole 401 9.2 Calculation of Direct and Quadrature Axis Magnetizing Inductance 402 9.3 Determination of Field Magnetizing Inductance 411 9.4 Determination of d-Axis Mutual Inductances 418 9.5 Calculation of Rotor Pole Leakage Permeances 420 9.6 Stator Leakage Inductances of a Salient Pole Synchronous Machine 424 9.6.1 Zigzag or Tooth-Top Leakage Inductance of Salient Pole Machines 424 9.7 The Amortisseur Winding Parameters 428 9.8 Mutual and Magnetizing Inductances of the Amortisseur Winding 435 9.9 Direct Axis Equivalent Circuit 435 9.10 Referral of Rotor Parameters to the Stator 438 9.11 Quadrature Axis Circuit 441 9.12 Power and Torque Expressions 446 9.13 Magnetic Shear Stress 449 9.14 Field Current Profile 451 9.15 Conclusion 453 References 453 Chapter 10 Finite-Element Solution of Magnetic Circuits 455 10.1 Formulation of the Two-Dimensional Magnetic Field Problem 455 10.2 Significance of the Vector Potential 458 10.3 The Variational Method 459 10.4 Nonlinear Functional and Conditions for Minimization 460 10.5 Description of the Finite-Element Method 465 10.6 Magnetic Induction and Reluctivity in the Triangle Element 467 10.7 Functional Minimization 468 10.8 Formulation of the Stiffness Matrix Equation 472 10.9 Consideration of Boundary Conditions 474 10.10 Step-By-Step Procedure for Solving the Finite-Element Problem 476 10.11 Finite-Element Modeling of Permanent Magnets 482 10.12 Conclusion 485 10.A Appendix 486 References 487 Appendix A Computation of Bar Current 489 Appendix B FEM Example 493 Index 505
£106.16
John Wiley & Sons Inc Power System Dynamics and Stability
Book SynopsisClassic power system dynamics text now with phasor measurement and simulation toolbox This new edition addresses the needs of dynamic modeling and simulation relevant to power system planning, design, and operation, including a systematic derivation of synchronous machine dynamic models together with speed and voltage control subsystems. Reduced-order modeling based on integral manifolds is used as a firm basis for understanding the derivations and limitations of lower-order dynamic models. Following these developments, multi-machine model interconnected through the transmission network is formulated and simulated using numerical simulation methods. Energy function methods are discussed for direct evaluation of stability. Small-signal analysis is used for determining the electromechanical modes and mode-shapes, and for power system stabilizer design. Time-synchronized high-sampling-rate phasor measurement units (PMUs) to monitor power system disturbances have beTable of ContentsPreface xiii About the Companion Website xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Background 1 1.2 Physical Structures 2 1.3 Time-Scale Structures 3 1.4 Political Structures 4 1.5 The Phenomena of Interest 5 1.6 New Chapters Added to this Edition 5 2 Electromagnetic Transients 7 2.1 The Fastest Transients 7 2.2 Transmission Line Models 7 2.3 Solution Methods 12 2.4 Problems 17 3 Synchronous Machine Modeling 19 3.1 Conventions and Notation 19 3.2 Three-Damper-Winding Model 20 3.3 Transformations and Scaling 21 3.4 The Linear Magnetic Circuit 29 3.5 The Nonlinear Magnetic Circuit 35 3.6 Single-Machine Steady State 40 3.7 Operational Impedances and Test Data 44 3.8 Problems 49 4 Synchronous Machine Control Models 53 4.1 Voltage and Speed Control Overview 53 4.2 Exciter Models 53 4.3 Voltage Regulator Models 58 4.4 Turbine Models 62 4.4.1 Hydroturbines 62 4.4.2 Steam Turbines 64 4.5 Speed Governor Models 67 4.6 Problems 70 5 Single-Machine Dynamic Models 71 5.1 Terminal Constraints 71 5.2 The Multi-Time-Scale Model 74 5.3 Elimination of Stator/Network Transients 76 5.4 The Two-Axis Model 81 5.5 The One-Axis (Flux-Decay) Model 83 5.6 The Classical Model 84 5.7 Damping Torques 86 5.8 Single-Machine Infinite-Bus System 90 5.9 Synchronous Machine Saturation 94 5.10 Problems 100 6 Multimachine Dynamic Models 101 6.1 The Synchronously Rotating Reference Frame 101 6.2 Network and R-L Load Constraints 103 6.3 Elimination of Stator/Network Transients 105 6.3.1 Generalization of Network and Load Dynamic Models 110 6.3.2 The Special Case of “Impedance Loads” 112 6.4 Multimachine Two-Axis Model 113 6.4.1 The Special Case of “Impedance Loads” 115 6.5 Multimachine Flux–Decay Model 116 6.5.1 The Special Case of “Impedance Loads” 117 6.6 Multimachine Classical Model 118 6.6.1 The Special Case of “Impedance Loads” 119 6.7 Multimachine Damping Torques 120 6.8 Multimachine Models with Saturation 121 6.8.1 The Multimachine Two-Axis Model with Synchronous Machine Saturation 123 6.8.2 The Multimachine Flux-Decay Model with Synchronous Machine Saturation 124 6.9 Frequency During Transients 126 6.10 Angle References and an Infinite Bus 127 6.11 Automatic Generation Control (AGC) 129 7 Multimachine Simulation 135 7.1 Differential-Algebraic Model 135 7.1.1 Generator Buses 136 7.1.2 Load Buses 137 7.2 Stator Algebraic Equations 138 7.2.1 Polar Form 138 7.2.2 Rectangular Form 138 7.2.3 Alternate Form of Stator Algebraic Equations 139 7.3 Network Equations 140 7.3.1 Power-Balance Form 140 7.3.2 Real Power Equations 141 7.3.3 Reactive Power Equations 141 7.3.4 Current-Balance Form 142 7.4 Industry Model 149 7.5 Simplification of the Two-Axis Model 153 7.5.1 Simplification #1 (Neglecting Transient Saliency in the Synchronous Machine) 153 7.5.2 Simplification #2 (Constant Impedance Load in the Transmission System) 154 7.6 Initial Conditions (Full Model) 158 7.6.1 Load-Flow Formulation 158 7.6.2 Standard Load Flow 159 7.6.3 Initial Conditions for Dynamic Analysis 160 7.6.4 Angle Reference, Infinite Bus, and COI Reference 165 7.7 Numerical Solution: Power-Balance Form 165 7.7.1 SI Method 165 7.7.2 Review of Newton’s Method 165 7.7.3 Numerical Solution Using SI Method 166 7.7.4 Disturbance Simulation 167 7.7.5 PE Method 168 7.8 Numerical Solution: Current-Balance Form 168 7.8.1 Some Practical Details 170 7.8.2 Prediction 171 7.9 Reduced-Order Multimachine Models 171 7.9.1 Flux-Decay Model 171 7.9.2 Generator Equations 172 7.9.3 Stator Equations 172 7.9.4 Network Equations 172 7.9.5 Initial Conditions 172 7.9.6 Structure-Preserving Classical Model 173 7.9.7 Internal-Node Model 177 7.10 Initial Conditions 179 7.11 Conclusion 180 7.12 Problems 180 8 Small-Signal Stability 183 8.1 Background 183 8.2 Basic Linearization Technique 184 8.2.1 Linearization of Model A 185 8.2.2 Differential Equations 185 8.2.3 Stator Algebraic Equations 186 8.2.4 Network Equations 186 8.2.5 Linearization of Model B 193 8.2.6 Differential Equations 194 8.2.7 Stator Algebraic Equations 194 8.2.8 Network Equations 194 8.3 Participation Factors 194 8.4 Studies on Parametric Effects 198 8.4.1 Effect of Loading 198 8.4.2 Effect of KA 200 8.4.3 Effect of Type of Load 201 8.4.4 Hopf Bifurcation 203 8.5 Electromechanical Oscillatory Modes 205 8.5.1 Eigenvalues of A and A𝜔 207 8.6 Power System Stabilizers 209 8.6.1 Basic Approach 209 8.6.2 Derivation of K1 − K6 Constants 209 8.6.3 Linearization 211 8.6.4 Synchronizing and Damping Torques 215 8.6.5 Damping of Electromechanical Modes 215 8.6.6 Torque-Angle Loop 219 8.6.7 Synchronizing Torque 221 8.6.8 Damping Torque 221 8.6.9 Power System Stabilizer Design 221 8.6.10 Frequency-Domain Approach 222 8.6.11 Design Procedure Using the Frequency-Domain Method 223 8.7 Conclusion 227 8.8 Problems 227 9 Energy Function Methods 233 9.1 Background 233 9.2 Physical and Mathematical Aspects of the Problem 233 9.3 Lyapunov’s Method 236 9.4 Modeling Issues 237 9.5 Energy Function Formulation 238 9.6 Potential Energy Boundary Surface (PEBS) 241 9.6.1 Single-Machine Infinite-Bus System 241 9.6.2 Energy Function for a Single-Machine Infinite-Bus System 244 9.6.3 Equal-Area Criterion and the Energy Function 247 9.6.4 Multimachine PEBS 249 9.6.5 Initialization of VPE(𝜃) and its Use in PEBS Method 252 9.7 The Boundary Controlling u.e.p (BCU) Method 254 9.7.1 Algorithm 256 9.8 Structure-Preserving Energy Functions 259 9.9 Conclusion 260 9.10 Problems 260 10 Synchronized PhasorMeasurement 263 10.1 Background 263 10.2 Phasor Computation 264 10.2.1 Nominal Frequency Phasors 264 10.2.2 Off-Nominal Frequency Phasors 265 10.2.3 Post Processing 269 10.2.4 Positive-Sequence Signals 271 10.2.5 Frequency Estimation 272 10.2.6 Phasor Data Accuracy 274 10.2.7 PMU Simulator 275 10.3 Phasor Data Communication 276 10.4 Power System Frequency Response 277 10.5 Power System Disturbance Propagation 280 10.5.1 Disturbance Triggering 285 10.6 Power System Disturbance Signatures 285 10.6.1 Generator or Load Trip 286 10.6.2 Oscillations 287 10.6.3 Fault and Line Switching 288 10.6.4 Shunt Capacitor or Reactor Switching 289 10.6.5 Voltage Collapse 289 10.7 Phasor State Estimation 289 10.8 Modal Analyses of Oscillations 293 10.9 Energy Function Analysis 296 10.10 Control Design Using PMU Data 299 10.11 Conclusions and Remarks 301 10.12 Problems 302 11 Power SystemToolbox 305 11.1 Background 305 11.2 Power Flow Computation 306 11.2.1 Data Requirement 306 11.2.2 Power Flow Formulation and Solution 308 11.2.3 Nonconvergent Power Flow 311 11.3 Dynamic Simulation 311 11.3.1 Dynamic Models and Per-Unit Parameter Values 312 11.3.2 Initialization 313 11.3.3 Network Solution 314 11.3.4 Integration Methods 316 11.3.5 Disturbance Specifications 317 11.4 Linear Analysis 321 11.5 Conclusions and Remarks 324 11.6 Problems 324 A IntegralManifolds for Model Reduction 327 A.1 Manifolds and Integral Manifolds 327 A.2 Integral Manifolds for Linear Systems 328 A.3 Integral Manifolds for Nonlinear Systems 336 Bibliography 341 Index 353
£88.16
John Wiley & Sons Inc Transportation and Power Grid in Smart Cities
Book SynopsisWith the increasing worldwide trend in population migration into urban centers, we are beginning to see the emergence of the kinds of mega-cities which were once the stuff of science fiction. It is clear to most urban planners and developers that accommodating the needs of the tens of millions of inhabitants of those megalopolises in an orderly and uninterrupted manner will require the seamless integration of and real-time monitoring and response services for public utilities and transportation systems. Part speculative look into the future of the world's urban centers, part technical blueprint, this visionary book helps lay the groundwork for the communication networks and services on which tomorrow's smart cities will run. Written by a uniquely well-qualified author team, this book provides detailed insights into the technical requirements for the wireless sensor and actuator networks required to make smart cities a reality.Table of ContentsList of Contributors xxi Preface xxvii SECTION I Communication Technologies for Smart Cities 1 1 Energy-Harvesting Cognitive Radios in Smart Cities 3Mustafa Ozger, Oktay Cetinkaya and Ozgur B. Akan 1.1 Introduction 3 1.1.1 Cognitive Radio 5 1.1.2 Cognitive Radio Sensor Networks 5 1.1.3 Energy Harvesting and Energy-Harvesting Sensor Networks 6 1.2 Motivations for Using Energy-Harvesting Cognitive Radios in Smart Cities 6 1.2.1 Motivations for Spectrum-Aware Communications 7 1.2.2 Motivations for Self-Sustaining Communications 7 1.3 Challenges Posed by Energy-Harvesting Cognitive Radios in Smart Cities 8 1.4 Energy-Harvesting Cognitive Internet of Things 9 1.4.1 Definition 9 1.4.2 Energy-Harvesting Methods in IoT 10 1.4.3 System Architecture 12 1.4.4 Integration of Energy-Harvesting Cognitive Radios with the Internet 13 1.5 A General Framework for EH-CRs in the Smart City 14 1.5.1 Operation Overview 14 1.5.2 Node Architecture 15 1.5.3 Network Architecture 16 1.5.4 Application Areas 17 1.6 Conclusion 18 References 18 2 LTE-D2D Communication for Power Distribution Grid: Resource Allocation for Time-Critical Applications 21Leonardo D. Oliveira, Taufik Abrao and Ekram Hossain 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 Communication Technologies for Power Distribution Grid 22 2.2.1 An Overview of Smart Grid Architecture 22 2.2.2 Communication Technologies for SG Applications Outside Substations 24 2.2.3 Communication Networks for SG 26 2.3 Overview of Communication Protocols Used in Power Distribution Networks 27 2.3.1 Modbus 27 2.3.2 IEC 60870 29 2.3.3 DNP3 31 2.3.4 IEC 61850 32 2.3.5 SCADA Protocols for Smart Grid: Existing State-of-the-Art 35 2.4 Power Distribution System: Distributed Automation Applications and Requirements 36 2.4.1 Distributed Automation Applications 36 2.4.1.1 Voltage/Var Control (VVC) 37 2.4.1.2 Fault Detection, Isolation, and Restoration (FDCIR) 38 2.4.2 Requirements for Distributed Automation Applications 39 2.5 Analysis of Data Flow in Power Distribution Grid 40 2.5.1 Model for Power Distribution Grid 40 2.5.2 IEC 61850 Traffic Model 42 2.5.2.1 Cyclic Data Flow 42 2.5.2.2 Stochastic Data Flow 45 2.5.2.3 Burst Data Flow 46 2.6 LTE-D2D for DA: Resource Allocation for Time-Critical Applications 47 2.6.1 Overview of LTE 47 2.6.2 IEC 61850 Protocols over LTE 48 2.6.2.1 Mapping MMS over LTE 49 2.6.2.2 Mapping GOOSE over LTE 50 2.6.3 Resource Allocation in uplink LTE-D2D for DA Applications 50 2.6.3.1 Problem Formulation 51 2.6.3.2 Scheduler Design 54 2.6.3.3 Numerical Evaluation 55 2.7 Conclusion 60 References 61 3 5G and Cellular Networks in the Smart Grid 69Jimmy Jessen Nielsen, Ljupco Jorguseski, Haibin Zhang, Hervé Ganem, Ziming Zhu and Petar Popovski 3.1 Introduction 69 3.1.1 Massive MTC 70 3.1.2 Mission-Critical MTC 70 3.1.3 Secure Mission-Critical MTC 71 3.2 From Power Grid to Smart Grid 71 3.3 Smart Grid Communication Requirements 74 3.3.1 Traffic Models and Requirements 74 3.4 Unlicensed Spectrum and Non-3GPP Technologies for the Support of Smart Grid 76 3.4.1 IEEE 802.11ah 76 3.4.2 Sigfox’s Ultra-Narrow Band (UNB) Approach 79 3.4.3 LoRaTM Chirp Spread Spectrum Approach 80 3.5 Cellular and 3GPP Technologies for the Support of Smart Grid 82 3.5.1 Limits of 3GPP Technologies up to Release 11 82 3.5.2 Recent Enhancements of 3GPP Technologies for IoT Applications (Releases 12–13) 83 3.5.2.1 LTE Cat-0 and Cat-M1 devices 84 3.5.2.2 Narrow-Band Internet of Things (NB-IoT) and Cat-NB1 Devices 85 3.5.3 Performance of Cellular LTE Systems for Smart Grids 86 3.5.4 LTE Access Reservation Protocol Limitations 87 3.5.4.1 LTE Access Procedure 87 3.5.4.2 Connection Establishment 90 3.5.4.3 Numerical Evaluation of LTE Random Access Bottlenecks 91 3.5.5 What Can We Expect from 5G? 93 3.6 End-to-End Security in Smart Grid Communications 94 3.6.1 Network Access Security 95 3.6.2 Transport Level Security 96 3.6.3 Application Level Security 96 3.6.4 End-to-End Security 96 3.6.5 Access Control 97 3.7 Conclusions and Summary 99 References 100 4 Machine-to-Machine Communications in the Smart City—a Smart Grid Perspective 103Ravil Bikmetov, M. Yasin Akhtar Raja and KhurramKazi 4.1 Introduction 103 4.2 Architecture and Characteristics of Smart Grids for Smart Cities 105 4.2.1 Definition of a Smart Grid and Its Conceptual Model 106 4.2.2 Standardization Approach in Smart Grids 112 4.2.3 Smart Grid Interoperability Reference Model (SGIRM) 113 4.2.4 Smart Grid Architecture Model 114 4.2.5 Energy Sources in the Smart Grid 115 4.2.6 Energy Consumers in a Smart Grid 117 4.2.7 Energy Service Providers in the Smart Grid 119 4.3 Intelligent Machine-to-Machine Communications in Smart Grids 120 4.3.1 Reference Architecture of Machine-to-Machine Interactions 120 4.3.2 Communication Media and Protocols 121 4.3.3 Layered Structure of Machine-to-Machine Communications 126 4.4 Optimization Algorithms for Energy Production, Distribution, and Consumption 132 4.5 Machine Learning Techniques in Efficient Energy Services and Management 134 4.6 Future Perspectives 135 4.7 Appendix 136 References 138 5 5G and D2D Communications at the Service of Smart Cities 147Muhammad Usman,Muhammad Rizwan Asghar and Fabrizio Granelli 5.1 Introduction 147 5.2 Literature Review 150 5.3 Smart City Scenarios 153 5.3.1 Public Health 154 5.3.2 Transportation and Environment 155 5.3.3 Energy Efficiency 157 5.3.4 Smart Grid 157 5.3.5 Water Management 158 5.3.6 Disaster Response and Emergency Services 159 5.3.7 Public Safety and Security 159 5.4 Discussion 160 5.4.1 Multiple Radio Access Technologies (Multi-RAT) 160 5.4.2 Virtualization 160 5.4.3 Distributed/Edge Computing 161 5.4.4 D2D Communication 161 5.4.5 Big Data 162 5.4.6 Security and Privacy 163 5.5 Conclusion 163 References 163 SECTION II Emerging Communication Networks for Smart Cities 171 6 Software Defined Networking and Virtualization for Smart Grid 173Hakki C. Cankaya 6.1 Introduction 173 6.2 Current Status of Power Grid and Smart Grid Modernization 174 6.2.1 Smart Grid 174 6.3 Network Softwarerization in Smart Grids 177 6.3.1 Software Defined Networking (SDN) as Next-Generation Software-Centric Approach to Telecommunications Networks 177 6.3.2 Adaptation of SDN for Smart Grid and City 179 6.3.3 Opportunities for SDN in Smart Grid 179 6.4 Virtualization for Networks and Functions 183 6.4.1 Network Virtualization 183 6.4.2 Network Function Virtualization 184 6.5 Use Cases of SDN/NFV in the Smart Grid 185 6.6 Challenges and Issues with SDN/NFV-Based Smart Grid 187 6.7 Conclusion 187 References 188 7 GHetNet: A Framework Validating Green Mobile Femtocells in Smart-Grids 191Fadi Al-Turjman 7.1 Introduction 191 7.2 RelatedWork 192 7.2.1 Static Validation Techniques 194 7.2.2 Dynamic Validation Techniques 195 7.3 System Models 197 7.3.1 Markov Model 199 7.3.2 Service-Rate Model 199 7.3.3 Communication Model 200 7.4 The Green HetNet (GHetNet) Framework 201 7.5 A Case Study: E-Mobility for Smart Grids 206 7.5.1 Performance metrics and parameters 207 7.5.2 Simulation Setups and Baselines 208 7.5.3 Results and Discussion 208 7.5.3.1 The Impact of Velocity on FBS Performance 209 7.5.3.2 The Impact of the Grid Load on Energy Consumption 211 7.6 Conclusion 213 References 213 8 Communication Architectures and Technologies for Advanced Smart Grid Services 217Francois Lemercier, Guillaume Habault, Georgios Z. Papadopoulos, Patrick Maille, NicolasMontavont and Periklis Chatzimisios 8.1 Introduction 217 8.2 The Smart Grid Communication Architecture and Infrastructure 219 8.2.1 DSO-Based Communications 220 8.2.1.1 The Existing AMI Organization 220 8.2.1.2 Communication Technologies used in the AMI 222 8.2.1.3 AMI Limitations 223 8.2.2 Internet-Based Architectures 224 8.2.2.1 IP-Based Architecture Limitations 225 8.2.3 Next-Generation Smart Grid Architecture 225 8.2.3.1 Technical Issues for Next-Generation Smart Grids 227 8.2.3.2 Handing Back the Keys to the User: Energy Management Should Be Separated from the Smart Meter 227 8.2.3.3 To Build an Open Market, Use an Open Network 228 8.2.3.4 Multi-Level Aggregation 228 8.2.3.5 Security Concerns 229 8.2.3.6 Ongoing Research Efforts 229 8.3 Routing Information in the Smart Grid 231 8.3.1 Routing Family of Protocols 231 8.3.1.1 Proactive Routing Protocol 232 8.3.1.2 Topology Management under RPL 232 8.3.1.3 Routing Table Maintenance under RPL 233 8.3.1.4 Routing Strategy: Metrics and Constraints 234 8.3.1.5 Path Computation under RPL 234 8.3.1.6 Summary of the RPL DODAG construction 235 8.3.1.7 Reactive Routing Protocol 236 8.3.1.8 Topology Management under AODV 237 8.3.2 Reactive Routing Protocol in a Constrained Network 238 8.3.2.1 Performance Evaluation 239 8.3.2.2 Summary on Routing Protocols 241 8.4 Conclusion 242 References 243 9 Wireless Sensor Networks in Smart Cities: Applications of Channel Bonding to Meet Data Communication Requirements 247Syed Hashim Raza Bukhari, Sajid Siraj andMubashir Husain Rehmani 9.1 Introduction, Basics, and Motivation 247 9.2 WSNs in Smart Cities 248 9.2.1 WSNs in Underground Transportation 249 9.2.2 WSNs in Smart Cab Services 249 9.2.3 WSNs in Waste Management Systems 249 9.2.4 WSNs in Atmosphere Health Monitoring 249 9.2.5 WSNs in Smart Grids 252 9.2.6 WSNs in Weather Forecasting 252 9.2.7 WSNs in Home Automation 252 9.2.8 WSNs in Structural Health Monitoring 252 9.3 Channel Bonding 253 9.3.1 Channel Bonding Schemes in Traditional Networks 253 9.3.2 Channel Bonding Schemes in Wireless Sensor Networks 254 9.3.3 Channel Bonding Schemes in Cognitive Radio Networks 255 9.3.4 Channel Bonding for Cognitive Radio Sensor Networks 257 9.4 Applications of Channel Bonding in CRSN-Based Smart Cities 258 9.4.1 CRSNs in Smart Health Care 258 9.4.2 CRSNs in M2M Communications 258 9.4.3 CRSNs Multiple Concurrent Deployments in Smart Cities 259 9.4.4 CRSNs in Smart Home Applications 259 9.4.5 CRSNs Smart Environment Control 259 9.4.6 CRSNs-Based IoT 259 9.5 Issues and Challenges Regarding the Implementation of Channel Bonding in Smart Cities 259 9.5.1 Privacy of Citizens 260 9.5.2 Energy Conservation 260 9.5.3 Data Storage and Aggregation 260 9.5.4 Geographic Awareness and Adaptation 260 9.5.5 Interference and Spectrum Issues 260 9.6 Conclusion 261 References 261 10 A Prediction Module for Smart City IoT Platforms 269Sema F. Oktug, Yusuf Yaslan and Halil Gulacar 10.1 Introduction 269 10.2 IoT Platforms for Smart Cities 271 10.2.1 ARM Mbed 271 10.2.2 Cumulocity 271 10.2.3 DeviceHive 273 10.2.4 Digi 273 10.2.5 Digital Service Cloud 274 10.2.6 FiWare 274 10.2.7 Global Sensor Networks (GSN) 274 10.2.8 IoTgo 274 10.2.9 Kaa 275 10.2.10 Nimbits 275 10.2.11 RealTime.io 275 10.2.12 SensorCloud 275 10.2.13 SiteWhere 276 10.2.14 TempoIQ 276 10.2.15 Thinger.io 276 10.2.16 Thingsquare 276 10.2.17 ThingWorx 277 10.2.18 VITAL 277 10.2.19 Xively 277 10.3 Prediction Module Developed 277 10.3.1 The VITAL IoT Platform 278 10.3.2 VITAL Prediction Module 278 10.4 AUse Case Employing the Traffic Sensors in Istanbul 281 10.4.1 Prediction Techniques Employed 282 10.4.1.1 Data Preprocessing 284 10.4.1.2 Feature Vectors 284 10.4.2 Results 285 10.4.2.1 Regression Results 286 10.5 Conclusion 288 Acknowledgment 288 References 289 SECTION III Renewable Energy Resources and Microgrid in Smart Cities 291 11 Integration of Renewable Energy Resources in the Smart Grid: Opportunities and Challenges 293Mohammad UpalMahfuz, Ahmed O. Nasif,MdMaruf Hossain andMd. Abdur Rahman 11.1 Introduction 293 11.2 The Smart Grid Paradigm 294 11.2.1 The Smart Grid Concept 294 11.2.2 System Components of the SG 296 11.3 Renewable Energy Integration in the Smart Grid 298 11.3.1 Resource Characteristics and Distributed Generation 298 11.3.2 Why Is Integration Necessary? 299 11.4 Opportunities and Challenges 299 11.4.1 Energy Storage (ES) 300 11.4.1.1 Key Energy Storage Technologies 300 11.4.1.2 Key Energy Storage Challenges in SG 301 11.4.2 Distributed Generation (DG) 302 11.4.2.1 Key DG Sources and Generators 303 11.4.2.2 Key Parts and Functions of a DG System and Its Distribution 303 11.4.2.3 DG and Dispatch Challenges 304 11.4.3 Resource Forecasting, Modeling, and Scheduling 305 11.4.3.1 Resource Modeling and Scheduling 305 11.4.3.2 Resource Forecasting (RF) 307 11.4.4 Demand Response 308 11.4.5 Demand-Side Management (DSM) 309 11.4.6 Monitoring 310 11.4.7 Transmission Techniques 311 11.4.8 System-Related Challenges 311 11.4.9 V2G Challenges 312 11.4.10 Security Challenges in the High Penetration of RE Resources 314 11.5 Case Studies 314 11.6 Conclusion 315 References 316 12 Environmental Monitoring for Smart Buildings 327Petros Spachos and Konstantinos Plataniotis 12.1 Introduction 327 12.2 Wireless Sensor Networks in Monitoring Applications 329 12.3 Application Requirements and Challenges 330 12.3.1 Monitoring Area 330 12.3.2 Application Scenario and Design Goal 332 12.3.3 Requirements 333 12.3.3.1 Sensor Type 333 12.3.3.2 Real-Time Data Aggregation 335 12.3.3.3 Scalability 335 12.3.3.4 Usability, Autonomy, and Reliability 336 12.3.3.5 Remote Management 336 12.3.4 Challenges 336 12.3.4.1 Power Management 336 12.3.4.2 Wireless Network Coexistence 337 12.3.4.3 Mesh Routing 337 12.3.4.4 Robustness 337 12.3.4.5 Dynamic Changes 337 12.3.4.6 Flexibility 337 12.3.4.7 Size and cost 337 12.4 Wireless Sensor Network Architecture 338 12.4.1 Framework 338 12.4.2 Hardware Infrastructure 339 12.4.3 Data Processing 341 12.4.3.1 Noise Reduction, Data Smoothing, and Calibration 341 12.4.3.2 Packet formation process 342 12.4.3.3 Information Processing and Storage 343 12.4.4 Indoor Monitoring System 343 12.5 Experiments and Results 343 12.5.1 Experimental Setup 343 12.5.2 Results Analysis 347 12.6 Conclusions 350 References 350 13 Cooperative EnergyManagement in Microgrids 355Ioannis Zenginis, John Vardakas, Prodromos-VasileiosMekikis and Christos Verikoukis 13.1 Introduction 355 13.2 The Cooperative Energy Management System Model 357 13.2.1 PV Panel Modeling 359 13.2.2 Energy Storage System 360 13.2.3 Inverter 361 13.2.4 Microgrid Energy Exchange 361 13.3 Evaluation and Discussion 362 13.4 Conclusion 366 Acknowledgment 367 References 368 14 Optimal Planning and Performance Assessment of Multi-Microgrid Systems in Future Smart Cities 371ShouxiangWang, LeiWu, Qi Liu and Shengxia Cai 14.1 Optimal Planning of Multi-Microgrid Systems 372 14.1.1 Introduction 372 14.1.2 Optimal Structure Planning 373 14.1.2.1 Definition of Indices 373 14.1.2.2 Structure Planning Method 375 14.1.3 Optimal Capacity Planning 377 14.1.3.1 Definition of Indexes 377 14.1.3.2 Capacity Planning Method 381 14.1.4 Conclusions 384 14.2 Performance Assessment of Multi-Microgrid System 384 14.2.1 Introduction 384 14.2.2 Comprehensive Evaluation Indexes 386 14.2.2.1 MMGS Source-Charge Capacity Index 386 14.2.2.2 MMGS Energy Interaction Index 388 14.2.2.3 MMGS Reliability Index 390 14.2.2.4 MMGS Economics Index 395 14.2.2.5 Energy Utilization Efficiency Index 398 14.2.2.6 Energy Saving and Emission Reduction Index 398 14.2.2.7 Renewable Energy Utilization Index 399 14.2.3 Performance Assessment 400 14.2.3.1 Performance Assessment of Grid-Connected MMGS 400 14.2.3.2 Performance Assessment of Islanded MMGS 401 14.2.3.3 Annual Performance Assessment of the MMGS 402 14.2.4 Case Studies 403 14.2.4.1 System Description 403 14.2.4.2 Numerical Results 403 14.3 Conclusions 406 Acknowledgment 407 References 407 SECTION IV Smart Cities, Intelligent Transportation Systemand Electric Vehicles 411 15 Wireless Charging for Electric Vehicles in the Smart Cities: Technology Review and Impact 413Alicia Triviño-Cabrera and José A. Aguado 15.1 Introduction 413 15.2 Review of theWireless Charging Methods 415 15.2.1 Technologies SupportingWireless Power Transfer for EVs 415 15.2.2 Operation Modes forWireless Power Transfer in EVs 416 15.3 Electrical Effect of Charging Technologies on the Grid 418 15.3.1 Harmonics Control in EVWireless Chargers 418 15.3.2 Power Factor Control in EVWireless Chargers 419 15.3.3 Implementation of Bidirectionality in EVWireless Chargers 420 15.3.4 Discussion 421 15.4 Scheduling Considering Charging Technologies 421 15.5 Conclusions and Future Guidelines 423 References 424 16 Channel Access Modelling for EV Charging/Discharging Service through Vehicular ad hoc Networks (VANETs) Communications 427Dhaou Said and Hussein T. Mouftah 16.1 Introduction 428 16.2 Technical Environment of the EV Charging/Discharging Process 428 16.2.1 EVSE Overview 429 16.2.2 Inductive Chargers: Opportunities and Potential 429 16.3 Overview of Communication Technologies in the Smart Grid 430 16.3.1 Power Line Communication 430 16.3.2 Wireless Communications for EV–Smart Grid Applications 431 16.4 Channel Access Model for EV Charging Service 432 16.4.1 Overview of VANET and LTE 432 16.4.2 Case Study: Access ChannelModel 433 16.4.3 Simulations Results 438 16.5 Conclusions 440 References 440 17 Intelligent Parking Management in Smart Citie s 443Sanket Gupte andMohamed Younis 17.1 Introduction 443 17.2 Design Issues and Taxonomy of Parking Solutions 445 17.2.1 Design Issues for Autonomous Parking Systems 445 17.2.2 Taxonomy of Parking Solutions 445 17.3 Classification of Existing Parking Systems 447 17.3.1 Sensing Infrastructure 447 17.3.2 Communication Infrastructure 457 17.3.3 Storage Infrastructure 460 17.3.4 Application Infrastructure 461 17.3.5 User Interfacing 463 17.3.6 Comparison of Existing Parking Systems 465 17.4 Participatory Sensing–Based Smart Parking 465 17.4.1 The Components 467 17.4.1.1 Users 467 17.4.1.2 IoT Devices 467 17.4.1.3 Server 468 17.4.1.4 Parking Spots 468 17.4.2 Parking Management Application 469 17.4.2.1 User Interface 469 17.4.2.2 Smart Reporting System 470 17.4.2.3 Leaderboard 470 17.4.2.4 Rewards Store 471 17.4.2.5 Enforcement and Compliance 472 17.4.2.6 External Integration 472 17.4.3 Data Processing and Cloud Support 472 17.4.3.1 Availability Computation 472 17.4.3.2 Reputation System 473 17.4.3.3 Scoring System 474 17.4.3.4 ReservationModel 474 17.4.3.5 Analysis and Learning 474 17.4.4 Implementation and Performance Evaluation 474 17.4.4.1 Prototype Application 474 17.4.4.2 Experiment Setup 475 17.4.4.3 Simulation Results 475 17.4.5 Features and Benefits 477 17.5 Conclusions and Future Advancements 479 References 480 18 Electric Vehicle Scheduling and Charging in Smart Cities 485Muhammmad Amjad, Mubashir Husain Rehmani and Tariq Umer 18.1 Introduction 485 18.1.1 Integration of EVs into Smart Cities 486 18.1.1.1 Enhancing the Existing Power Capacity 486 18.1.1.2 Designing the Communication Protocols to Support the Smart Recharging Structure 486 18.1.1.3 Development of a Well-designed Recharging Architecture 486 18.1.1.4 Considering the Expected Load on the Smart Grid 486 18.1.1.5 Need for Scheduling Approaches for EVs Recharging 486 18.1.2 Main Contributions 487 18.1.3 Organization of the Chapter 487 18.2 Smart Cities and Electric Vehicles: Motivation, Background, and ApplicationScenarios 488 18.2.1 Smart Cities: An Overview 488 18.2.1.1 Provision of Smart Transportation 488 18.2.1.2 Energy Management in Smart cities 488 18.2.1.3 Integration of the Economic and Business Model 488 18.2.1.4 Wireless Communication Needs/Communication Architectures for Smart Cities 489 18.2.1.5 Traffic Congestion Avoidance in Smart Cities 489 18.2.1.6 Support of Heterogeneous Technologies in Smart Cities 489 18.2.1.7 Green Applications Support in Smart Cities 489 18.2.1.8 Security and Privacy in Smart Cities 490 18.2.2 Motivation of Using EVs in Smart cities 490 18.2.3 Application Scenarios 490 18.2.3.1 Avoiding Spinning Reserves 490 18.2.3.2 V2G and G2V Capability 491 18.2.3.3 CO2 Minimization 491 18.2.3.4 Load Management on the Local Microgrid 491 18.3 EVs Recharging Approaches in Smart Cities 491 18.3.1 Centralized EVs Recharging Approach 491 18.3.1.1 Main Contributions and Limitations of Centralized EVs-Recharging Approach 492 18.3.2 Distributed EVs Recharging Approach 493 18.3.2.1 Main Contributions and Limitations of the Distributed EVs-recharging Approach 493 18.4 Scheduling EVs Recharging in Smart Cities 493 18.4.1 Objectives Achieved via Different Scheduling Approaches 494 18.4.1.1 Reduction of Power Losses 494 18.4.1.2 Minimizing Total Cost of Energy for Users 495 18.4.1.3 Maximizing Aggregator Profit 496 18.4.1.4 Frequency Regulation 497 18.4.1.5 Voltage regulation 497 18.4.1.6 Support for Renewable Energy Sources for Recharging of EVs 497 18.4.2 Resource Allocation for EVs Recharging in Smart Cities (Optimization Approaches) 498 18.5 Open Issues, Challenges, and Future Research Directions 498 18.5.1 Support ofWireless Power Charger 499 18.5.2 Vehicle-to-Anything 499 18.5.3 Energy Management for Smart Grid via EVs 499 18.5.4 Advance Communication Needs for Controlled EVs Recharging 499 18.5.5 EVs Control Applications 499 18.5.6 Standardization for Communication Technologies Used for EVs Recharging 500 18.6 Conclusion 500 References 500 SECTION V Security and Privacy Issues and Big Data in Smart Cities 507 19 Cyber-Security and Resiliency of Transportation and Power Systems in Smart Cities 509Seyedamirabbas Mousavian,Melike Erol-Kantarci and Hussein T. Mouftah 19.1 Introduction 509 19.2 EV Infrastructure and Smart Grid Integration 510 19.3 System Model 512 19.3.1 Model Definition and Assumptions 512 19.4 Estimating the Threat Levels in the EVSE Network 513 19.5 Response Model 514 19.6 Propagation Impacts on Power System Operations 515 19.6.1 Cyberattack Propagation in PMU Networks 515 19.6.2 Threat Level Estimation in PMU Networks 515 19.6.3 Response Model in PMU Networks 518 19.6.4 PMU Networks: Experimental Results 521 19.7 Conclusion and Open Issues 525 References 525 20 Protecting the Privacy of Electricity Consumers in the Smart City 529Binod Vaidya and Hussein T. Mouftah 20.1 Introduction 529 20.2 Privacy in the Smart Grid 530 20.2.1 Privacy Concerns over Customer Electricity Data Collected by the Utility 531 20.2.2 Privacy Concerns on Energy Usage Information Collected by a Non-Utility-OwnedMetering Device 532 20.2.3 Privacy Protection 532 20.3 Privacy Principles 532 20.4 Privacy Engineering 535 20.4.1 Privacy Protection Goals 535 20.4.2 Privacy Engineering Framework and Guidelines 538 20.5 Privacy Risk and Impact Assessment 540 20.5.1 System Privacy Risk Model 540 20.5.2 Privacy Impact Assessment (PIA) 541 20.6 Privacy Enhancing Technologies 542 20.6.1 Anonymization 544 20.6.2 Trusted Computation 545 20.6.3 Cryptographic Computation 545 20.6.4 Perturbation 546 20.6.5 Verifiable Computation 547 Acknowledgment 547 References 548 21 Privacy Preserving Power Charging Coordination Scheme in the Smart Grid 555Ahmed Sherif, Muhammad Ismail, Marbin Pazos-Revilla,Mohamed Mahmoud, Kemal Akkaya, Erchin Serpedin and Khalid Qaraqe 21.1 Introduction 555 21.1.1 Smart Grid Security Requirements 555 21.1.2 Charging Coordination Security Requirement 556 21.2 Charging Coordination and Privacy Preservation 558 21.3 Privacy-Preserving Charging Coordination Scheme 560 21.3.1 Network andThreat Models 560 21.3.2 The Proposed Scheme 561 21.3.2.1 Anonymous Data Submission 561 21.3.2.2 Charging Coordination 565 21.4 Performance Evaluation 567 21.4.1 Privacy/Security Analysis 567 21.4.2 Experimental Study 568 21.4.2.1 Setup 568 21.4.2.2 Metrics and Baselines 568 21.4.2.3 Simulation Results 569 21.5 Summary 572 Acknowledgment 573 References 573 22 Securing Smart Cities Systems and Services: A Risk-Based Analytics-Driven Approach 577Mahmoud Gad and Ibrahim Abualhaol 22.1 Introduction to Cybersecurity for Smart Cities 577 22.2 Smart Cities Enablers 579 22.3 Smart Cities Attack Surface 580 22.3.1 Attack Domains 580 22.3.1.1 Communications 580 22.3.1.2 Software 580 22.3.1.3 Hardware 580 22.3.1.4 Social Engineering 580 22.3.1.5 Supply Chain 581 22.3.1.6 Physical Security 581 22.3.2 Attack Mechanisms 582 22.4 Securing Smart Cities: A Design Science Approach 582 22.5 NIST Cybersecurity Framework 583 22.6 Cybersecurity Fusion Center with Big Data Analytics 585 22.7 Conclusion 587 22.8 Table of Abbreviations 587 References 588 23 Spatiotemporal Big Data Analysis for Smart Grids Based on Random Matrix Theory 591Robert Qiu, Lei Chu, Xing He, Zenan Ling and Haichun Liu 23.1 Introduction 591 23.1.1 Perspective on Smart Grids 591 23.1.2 The Role of Data in the Future Power Grid 594 23.1.3 A Brief Account for RMT 595 23.2 RMT: A Practical and Powerful Big Data Analysis Tool 596 23.2.1 Modeling Grid Data using Large Dimensional Random Matrices 596 23.2.2 Asymptotic Spectrum Laws 598 23.2.3 Transforms 600 23.2.4 Convergence Rate 601 23.2.5 Free Probability 603 23.3 Applications to Smart Grids 608 23.3.1 Hypothesis Tests in Smart Grids 609 23.3.2 Data-DrivenMethods for State Evaluation 609 23.3.3 Situation Awareness based on Linear Eigenvalue Statistics 612 23.3.4 Early Event Detection Using Free Probability 621 23.4 Conclusion and Future Directions 626 References 629 Index 635
£109.76
John Wiley & Sons Inc Anechoic and Reverberation Chambers
Book SynopsisA comprehensive review of the recent advances in anechoic chamberand reverberation chamber designs and measurements Anechoic and Reverberation Chambers is a guide to the latest systematic solutions for designing anechoic chambers that rely on state-of-the-art computational electromagnetic algorithms. This essential resource contains a theoretical and practical understanding forelectromagnetic compatibility and antenna testing. The solutions outlined optimise chamber performance in the structure, absorber layout and antenna positions whilst minimising the overall cost. The anechoic chamber designs are verified by measurement results from Microwave Vision Group that validate the accuracy of the solution. Anechoic and Reverberation Chambers fills this gap in the literature by providing a comprehensive reference to electromagnetic measurements, applications and over-the-air tests inside chambers. The expert contributors offer a summary of the latest developments in anechoic and reverberTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xi About the Contributors xiii Acknowledgements xv Acronyms xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Background 1 1.1.1 Anechoic Chambers 1 1.1.2 Reverberation Chambers 3 1.1.3 Relationship between Anechoic Chambers and Reverberation Chambers 6 1.2 Organisation of this Book 6 References 8 2 Theory for Anechoic Chamber Design 11 2.1 Introduction 11 2.2 Absorbing Material Basics 11 2.2.1 General Knowledge 11 2.2.2 Absorbing Material Simulation 14 2.2.3 Absorbing Material Measurement 16 2.3 CEM Algorithms Overview 22 2.4 GO Theory 23 2.4.1 GO from Maxwell Equations 23 2.4.2 Analytical Expression of a Reflected Field from a Curved Surface 24 2.4.3 Alternative GO Form 28 2.5 GO-FEM Hybrid Method 29 2.6 Summary 30 References 30 3 Computer-aided Anechoic Chamber Design 35 3.1 Introduction 35 3.2 Framework 35 3.3 Software Implementation 35 3.3.1 3D Model Description 35 3.3.2 Algorithm Complexities 36 3.3.3 Far-Field Data 39 3.3.4 Boundary Conditions 40 3.3.5 RAM Description 41 3.3.6 Forward Algorithm 42 3.3.7 Inverse Algorithm 54 3.3.8 Post Processing 55 3.4 Summary 56 References 57 4 Anechoic Chamber Design Examples and Verifications 59 4.1 Introduction 59 4.2 Normalised Site Attenuation 59 4.2.1 NSA Definition 59 4.2.2 NSA Simulation and Measurement 60 4.3 Site Voltage Standing Wave Ratio 68 4.3.1 SVSWR Definition 68 4.3.2 SVSWR Simulation and Measurement 72 4.4 Field Uniformity 75 4.4.1 FU Definition 75 4.4.2 FU Simulation and Measurement 76 4.5 Design Margin 79 4.6 Summary 86 References 87 5 Fundamentals of the Reverberation Chamber 89 5.1 Introduction 89 5.2 Resonant Cavity Model 89 5.3 Ray Model 95 5.4 Statistical Electromagnetics 96 5.4.1 Plane-Wave Spectrum Model 96 5.4.2 Field Correlations 99 5.4.3 Boundary Fields 102 5.4.4 Enhanced Backscattering Effect 108 5.4.5 Loss Mechanism 109 5.4.6 Probability Distribution Functions 112 5.5 Figures of Merit 117 5.5.1 Field Uniformity 117 5.5.2 Lowest Usable Frequency 121 5.5.3 Correlation Coefficient and Independent Sample Number 121 5.5.4 Field Anisotropy Coefficients and Inhomogeneity Coefficients 124 5.5.5 Stirring Ratio 126 5.5.6 K-Factor 126 5.6 Summary 128 References 128 6 The Design of a Reverberation Chamber 133 6.1 Introduction 133 6.2 Design Guidelines 133 6.2.1 The Shape of the RC 133 6.2.2 The Lowest Usable Frequency 134 6.2.3 The Working Volume 135 6.2.4 The Q Factor 135 6.2.5 The Stirrer Design 137 6.3 Simulation of the RC 140 6.3.1 Monte Carlo Method 140 6.3.2 Time Domain Simulation 142 6.3.3 Frequency Domain Simulation 142 6.4 Time Domain Characterisation of the RC 145 6.4.1 Statistical Behaviour in the Time Domain 146 6.4.2 Stirrer Efficiency Based on Total Scattering Cross Section 151 6.4.3 Time-Gating Technique 163 6.5 Duality Principle in the RC 166 6.6 The Limit of ACS and TSCS 169 6.7 Design Example 172 6.8 Summary 174 References 174 7 Applications in the Reverberation Chamber 185 7.1 Introduction 185 7.2 Q Factor and Decay Constant 185 7.3 Radiated Immunity Test 192 7.4 Radiated Emission Measurement 193 7.5 Free-Space Antenna S-Parameter Measurement 196 7.6 Antenna Radiation Efficiency Measurement 199 7.6.1 Reference Antenna Method 199 7.6.2 Non-reference Antenna Method 200 7.7 MIMO Antenna and Channel Emulation 212 7.7.1 Diversity Gain Measurement 212 7.7.2 Total Isotropic Sensitivity Measurement 219 7.7.3 Channel Capacity Measurement 220 7.7.4 Doppler Effect 220 7.8 Antenna Radiation Pattern Measurement 223 7.8.1 Theory 223 7.8.2 Simulations and Measurements 228 7.8.3 Discussion and Error Analysis 238 7.9 Material Measurements 243 7.9.1 Absorption Cross Section 243 7.9.2 Average Absorption Coefficient 250 7.9.3 Permittivity 257 7.9.4 Material Shielding Effectiveness 263 7.10 Cavity Shielding Effectiveness Measurement 264 7.11 Volume Measurement 270 7.12 Summary 276 References 276 8 Measurement Uncertainty in the Reverberation Chamber 283Xiaoming Chen, Yuxin Ren, and Zhihua Zhang 8.1 Introduction 283 8.2 Procedure for Uncertainty Characterisation 283 8.3 Uncertainty Model 283 8.3.1 ACF Method 284 8.3.2 DoF Method 285 8.3.3 Comparison of ACF and DoF Methods 286 8.3.4 Semi-empirical Model 289 8.4 Measurement Uncertainty of Antenna Efficiency 293 8.5 Summary 300 References 301 9 Inter-Comparison Between Antenna Radiation Efficiency Measurements Performed in an Anechoic Chamber and in a Reverberation Chamber 305Tian-Hong Loh and Wanquan Qi 9.1 Introduction 305 9.2 Measurement Facilities and Setups 306 9.2.1 Anechoic Chamber 306 9.2.2 Reverberation Chamber 307 9.3 Antenna Efficiency Measurements 308 9.3.1 Theory 308 9.3.1.1 Radiation Efficiency Using the Anechoic Chamber 308 9.3.1.2 Radiation Efficiency Using the Reverberation Chamber 309 9.3.2 Comparison Between the AC and the RC 309 9.3.2.1 Biconical Antenna 309 9.3.2.2 Horn Antenna 312 9.3.2.3 MIMO Antenna 312 9.4 Summary 318 Acknowledgement 319 References 319 10 Discussion on Future Applications 323 10.1 Introduction 323 10.2 Anechoic Chambers 323 10.3 Reverberation Chambers 323 References 325 Appendix A Code Snippets 327 Appendix B Reference NSA Values 339 Appendix C Test Report Template 345 Appendix D Typical Bandpass Filters 351 Appendix E Compact Reverberation Chamber at NUAA 359 Appendix F Relevant Statistics 373 Index 379
£88.16
John Wiley & Sons Inc Photovoltaic Modeling Handbook
Book SynopsisThis book provides the reader with a solid understanding of the fundamental modeling of photovoltaic devices. After the material independent limit of photovoltaic conversion, the readers are introduced to the most well-known theory of classical silicon modeling. Based on this, for each of the most important PV materials, their performance under different conditions is modeled. This book also covers different modeling approaches, from very fundamental theoretic investigations to applied numeric simulations based on experimental values. The book concludes wth a chapter on the influence of spectral variations. The information is supported by providing the names of simulation software and basic literature to the field. The information in the book gives the user specific application with a solid background in hand, to judge which materials could be appropriate as well as realistic expectations of the performance the devices could achieve.Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Introduction 1Monika Freunek Müller 2 Fundamental Limits of Solar Energy Conversion 7Thorsten Trupke and Peter Würfel 2.1 Introduction 8 2.2 The Carnot Efficiency – A Realistic Limit for PV Conversion? 8 2.3 Solar Cell Absorbers – Converting Heat into Chemical Energy 10 2.4 No Junction Required – The IV Curve of a Uniform Absorber 12 2.5 Limiting Efficiency Calculations 15 2.6 Real Solar Cell Structures 19 2.7 Beyond the Shockley Queisser Limit 20 2.8 Summary and Conclusions 22 Acknowledgement 23 References 24 3 Optical Modeling of Photovoltaic Modules with Ray Tracing Simulations 27Carsten Schinke, Malte R.Vogt and Karsten Bothe 3.1 Introduction 28 3.1.1 Terminology 30 3.2 Basics of Optical Ray Tracing Simulations 32 3.2.1 Ray Optics 32 3.2.1.1 Basic Assumptions 33 3.2.1.2 Absorption of Light 33 3.2.1.3 Refraction of Light at Interfaces 34 3.2.1.4 Modeling of Thin Films 35 3.2.2 Ray Tracing 37 3.2.3 Monte-Carlo Particle Tracing 38 3.2.4 Statistical Uncertainty of Monte-Carlo Results 40 3.2.5 Generating Random Numbers with Non-Uniform Distributions 42 3.3 Modeling Illumination 46 3.3.1 Basic Light Sources 46 3.3.2 Modeling Realistic Illumination Conditions 48 3.3.2.1 Preprocessing of Irradiance Data 49 3.3.2.2 Implementation for Ray Tracing 50 3.3.2.3 Application Example 52 3.4 Specific Issues for Ray Tracing of Photovoltaic Modules 53 3.4.1 Geometries and Symmetries in PV Devices 55 3.4.2 Multi-Domain Approach 57 3.4.2.1 Module domain 59 3.4.2.2 Front Finger Domain 60 3.4.2.3 Front Texture Domain 60 3.4.2.4 Rear Side Domains 61 3.4.3 Post processing of Simulation Results 61 3.4.4 Ray Tracing Application Examples 64 3.4.4.1 Validation of Simulation Results 64 3.4.4.2 Optical Loss Analysis: From Cell to Module 66 3.4.4.3 Bifacial Solar Cells and Modules 68 3.5 From Optics to Power Output 69 3.5.1 Calculation Chain: From Ray Tracing to Module Power Output 70 3.5.1.1 Inclusion of the Irradiation Spectrum 73 3.5.1.2 Calculation of Module Output Power 75 3.5.1.3 Outlook: Energy Yield Calculation 75 3.5.2 Application Examples 76 3.5.2.1 Calculation of Short Circuit Current and Power Output 77 3.5.2.2 Current Loss Analysis: Standard Testing Conditions vs. Field Conditions 79 3.6 Overview of Optical Simulation Tools for PV Devices 80 3.6.1 Analysis of Solar Cells 82 3.6.2 Analysis of PV Modules and Their Surrounding 82 3.6.3 Further Tools Which are not Publicly Available 85 Acknowledgments 85 References 86 4 Optical Modelling and Simulations of Thin-Film Silicon Solar Cells 93Janez Krc, Martin Sever, Benjamin Lipovsek, Andrej Campa and Marko Topic 4.1 Introduction 94 4.2 Approaches of Optical Modelling 95 4.2.1 One-Dimensional Optical Modelling 96 4.2.2 Two- and Three-Dimensional Rigorous Optical Modelling 97 4.2.3 Challenges in Optical Modelling 97 4.3 Selected Methods and Approaches 98 4.3.1 Finite Element Method 98 4.3.2 Coupled Modelling Approach 100 4.4 Examples of Optical Modelling and Simulations 102 4.4.1 Texture Optimization Applying Spatial Fourier Analysis 103 4.4.2 Model of Non-Conformal Layer Growth 110 4.4.3 Optical Simulations of Tandem Thin-Film Silicon Solar Cell 118 4.5 The Role of Illumination Spectrum 129 4.6 Conclusion 133 Acknowledgement 134 References 135 5 Modelling of Organic Photovoltaics 141Ian R. Thompson 5.1 Introduction to Organic Photovoltaics 141 5.2 Performance of Organic Photovoltaics 143 5.3 Charge Transport in Organic Semiconductors 145 5.4 Energetic Disorder in Organic Semiconductors 150 5.5 Morphology of Organic Materials 153 5.6 Considerations for Photovoltaics 155 5.6.1 Excitons in Organic Semiconductors 155 5.6.2 Optical Absorption in Organic Photovoltaics 160 5.6.3 Carrier Harvesting in Organic Photovoltaics 161 5.7 Simulation Methods of Organic Photovoltaics 163 5.7.1 Lattice Morphologies and Device Geometry 163 5.7.2 Gaussian Disorder Model 164 5.7.3 Kinetic Monte Carlo Methods 164 5.7.4 Electrostatic Interactions 168 5.7.5 Neighbour Lists 169 5.8 Considerations When Modelling Organic Photovoltaics 169 5.8.1 The Next Steps for OPV Modelling 171 Acknowledgements 172 References 172 6 Modeling the Device Physics of Chalcogenide Thin Film Solar Cells 177Nima E. Gorji and Lindsay Kuhn 6.1 Introduction 177 6.2 Kosyachenko’s Approach: Carrier Transport 178 6.3 Demtsu-Sites Approach: Double-Diode Model 181 6.4 Kosyachenko’s Approach: Optical Loss Modeling 184 6.5 Karpov’s Approach 186 6.6 Conclusion 187 Acknowledgements 188 References 188 7 Temperature and Irradiance Dependent Efficiency Model for GaInP-GaInAs-Ge Multijunction Solar Cells 191Monika Freunek Mueller, Bruno Michel and Harold J. Hovel 7.1 Motivation 191 7.2 Efficiency Model 196 7.3 Results and Discussion 209 7.4 Conclusions 211 7.5 Acknowledgments 211 References 212 Appendix: Shockley-Queisser-Modell Calculations 213 8 Variation of Output with Environmental Factors 217Youichi Hirata, Yuzuru Ueda, Shinichiro Oke and Naotoshi Sekiguchi 8.1 Conversion Efficiency and Standard Test Conditions (STC) 218 8.2 Variation of I-V curve with Each Environmental Factor 218 8.2.1 Irradiance 219 8.2.2 Cell Temperature 221 8.2.3 Spectral Response 222 8.3 Example of Measurement of Spectral Distribution of Solar Radiation 222 8.3.1 Example of Changes with Weather 223 8.3.2 Spectral Variation with Season 225 8.3.3 Effect of Variation in Spectral Solar Radiation 226 8.4 Irradiance 227 8.5 Effects on Performance of PV Modules/Cells 229 8.5.1 System Configurations and Measurements 229 8.5.2 Evaluation Methods 231 8.5.2.1 Performance Ratio 231 8.5.2.2 Effective Array Peak Power of PV Systems 233 8.5.3 Measurement Results 233 8.5.3.1 Performance Ratios 233 8.5.3.2 Degradation Rates 234 8.6 Cell Temperature 236 8.6.1 Output Energy by Temperature Coefficient 236 8.6.2 Output Energy with Different Installation Method 237 8.7 Results for Concentrated Photovoltaics 239 8.7.1 Introduction 239 8.7.2 Field Test of a CPV Module 239 8.7.3 Decline of Efficiency of the Early-Type CPV Module 239 8.7.4 Influences of the Degradation 241 Acknowledgments 243 References 244 9 Modeling of Indoor Photovoltaic Devices 245Monika Freunek Müller 9.1 Introduction 245 9.1.1 Brief History of IPV 246 9.1.2 Characteristics of IPV Modeling 247 9.2 Indoor Radiation 248 9.2.1 Modeling Indoor Spectral Irradiance 250 9.3 Maximum Efficiencies 252 9.3.1 Intensity effects 255 9.4 Demonstrated Efficiencies and Further Optimization 257 9.5 Characterization and Measured Efficiencies 261 9.5.1 Irradiance Measurements 261 9.6 Outlook 262 9.7 Acknowledgement 264 References 264 10 Modelling Hysteresis in Perovskite Solar Cells 267James M. Cave and Alison B. Walker 10.1 Introduction to Perovskite Solar Cells 267 Acknowledgements 277 References 277 Index 279
£146.66
John Wiley & Sons Inc Encyclopedia of Renewable Energy
Book SynopsisENCYCLOPEDIA OF RENEWABLE ENERGY Written by a highly respected engineer and prolific author in the energy sector, this is the single most comprehensive, thorough, and up-to-date reference work on renewable energy. The world's energy industry is and has always been volatile, sometimes controversial, with wild swings upward and downward. This has, historically, been mostly because most of our energy has come from fossil fuels, which is a finite source of energy. Every so often, a technology comes along, like hydrofracturing, that is a game-changer. But is it, really? Aren't we just delaying the inevitable with these temporary price fixes The only REAL game-changer is renewable energy. For decades, renewable energy sources have been sought, developed, and studied. Sometimes wind is at the forefront, sometimes solar, and, for the last decade or so, there has been a surge in interest for biofeedstocks and biofuels. There are also the old standbys of nuclear and geothermal energy, which hTable of ContentsIntroduction xxxvii A 1 B 99 C 227 D 329 E 365 F 423 G 481 H 585 I 651 J 681 K 683 L 689 M 741 N 781 O 807 P 835 Q 921 R 923 S 969 T 1057 U 1095 V 1105 W 1111 X 1199 Y 1203 Z 1207 Conversion Factors 1211 Further Reading 1213 About the Author 1215
£296.06
John Wiley & Sons Inc Designing Embedded Systems and the Internet of
Book SynopsisA comprehensive and accessible introduction to the development of embedded systems and Internet of Things devices using ARM mbed Designing Embedded Systems and the Internet of Things (IoT) with the ARM mbed offers an accessible guide to the development of ARM mbed and includes a range of topics on the subject from the basic to the advanced. ARM mbed is a platform and operating system based on 32-bit ARM Cortex-M microcontrollers. This important resource puts the focus on ARM mbed NXP LPC1768 and FRDM-K64F evaluation boards. NXP LPC1768 has powerful features such as a fast microcontroller, various digital and analog I/Os, various serial communication interfaces and a very easy to use Web based compiler. It is one of the most popular kits that are used to study and create projects. FRDM-K64F is relatively new and largely compatible with NXP LPC1768 but with even more powerful features. This approachable text is an ideal guide that is divided into four sectiTable of ContentsAbout the Author xiii Preface xv Author’s Acknowledgments xix About the Companion Website xxi Part I Introduction to Arm® Mbed™ and IoT 1 1 Introduction to Arm® Mbed™ 3 1.1 What is an Embedded System? 3 1.2 Microcontrollers and Microprocessors 4 1.3 ARM® Processor Architecture 8 1.4 The Arm® Mbed™ Systems 10 1.4.1 NXP LPC1768 11 1.4.2 NXP LPC11U24 14 1.4.3 BBC Micro:bit 15 1.4.4 The Arm® Mbed™ Ethernet Internet of Things (IoT) Starter Kit 17 1.5 Summary 21 1.6 Chapter Review Questions 21 2 Introduction to the Internet of Things (IoT) 23 2.1 What is the Internet of Things (IoT)? 23 2.2 How Does IoT Work? 24 2.3 How Will IoT Change Our Lives? 25 2.4 Potential IoT Applications 27 2.4.1 Home 27 2.4.2 Healthcare 28 2.4.3 Transport 28 2.4.4 Energy 28 2.4.5 Manufacture 28 2.4.6 Environment 28 2.5 Summary 29 2.6 Chapter Review Questions 29 3 IoT Enabling Technologies 31 3.1 Sensors and Actuators 31 3.2 Communications 31 3.2.1 RFID and NFC (Near‐Field Communication) 32 3.2.2 Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) 32 3.2.3 LiFi 33 3.2.4 6LowPAN 33 3.2.5 ZigBee 34 3.2.6 Z‐Wave 34 3.2.7 LoRa 34 3.3 Protocols 35 3.3.1 HTTP 35 3.3.2 WebSocket 36 3.3.3 MQTT 37 3.3.4 CoAP 38 3.3.5 XMPP 38 3.4 Node‐RED 39 3.5 Platforms 41 3.5.1 IBM Watson IoT—Bluemix (http://www.ibm.com/internet‐of‐things/) 41 3.5.2 Eclipse IoT (https://iot.eclipse.org/) 42 3.5.3 AWS IoT (https://aws.amazon.com/iot/) 42 3.5.4 Microsoft Azure IoT Suite (https://azure.microsoft.com/en‐us/suites/iot‐suite/) 42 3.5.5 Google Cloud IoT (https://cloud.google.com/solutions/iot/) 44 3.5.6 ThingWorx (https://www.thingworx.com/) 44 3.5.7 GE Predix (https://www.predix.com/) 44 3.5.8 Xively (https://www.xively.com/) 44 3.5.9 macchina.io (https://macchina.io/) 45 3.5.10 Carriots (https://www.carriots.com/) 45 3.6 Summary 45 3.7 Chapter Review Questions 45 Part II Arm® Mbed™ Development 47 4 Getting Started with Arm® Mbed™ 49 4.1 Introduction 49 4.2 Hardware and Software Required 49 4.2.1 Hardware 49 4.2.2 Software 50 4.3 Your First Program: Blinky LED 53 4.3.1 Connect the Mbed to a PC 53 4.3.2 Click “mbed.htm” to Log In 53 4.3.3 Add the FRDM‐K64F Platform to Your Compiler 54 4.3.4 Import an Existing Program 54 4.3.5 Compile, Download, and Run Your Program 57 4.3.6 What Next? 57 4.4 Create Your Own Program 57 4.5 C/C++ Programming Language 58 4.6 Functions and Modular Programming 58 4.7 Manage Platforms 61 4.8 Clone Your Program 63 4.9 Search and Replace 64 4.10 Compile Your Program for Multiple Platforms 65 4.11 Delete Your Program 65 4.12 Disaster Recovery Procedure 67 4.13 Upgrade Firmware 67 4.14 Help 67 4.15 Summary 69 5 Inputs and Outputs 71 5.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs 71 5.1.1 Digital Inputs 71 5.1.2 Digital Outputs 74 5.1.3 BusIn, BusOut, and BusInOut 79 5.2 Analog Inputs and Outputs 81 5.2.1 Analog Inputs 81 5.2.2 Analog Outputs 82 5.3 Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) 86 5.4 Accelerometer and Magnetometer 88 5.5 SD Card 96 5.6 Local File System (LPC1768) 99 5.7 Interrupts 100 5.8 Summary 101 6 Digital Interfaces 103 6.1 Serial 103 6.2 SPI 106 6.3 I2C 108 6.4 CAN 111 6.5 Summary 113 7 Networking and Communications 115 7.1 Ethernet 115 7.2 Ethernet Web Client and Web Server 119 7.3 TCP Socket and UDP Socket 124 7.4 WebSocket 128 7.5 WiFi 131 7.6 Summary 135 8 Digital Signal Processing and Control 137 8.1 Low‐Pass Filter 137 8.2 High‐Pass Filter 141 8.3 Band‐Pass Filter 143 8.4 Band‐Stop Filter and Notch Filter 146 8.5 Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) 149 8.6 PID Controller 160 8.7 Summary 164 9 Debugging, Timer, Multithreading, and Real‐Time Programming 165 9.1 Debugging 165 9.2 Timer, Timeout, Ticker, and Time 167 9.3 Network Time Protocol (NTP) 171 9.4 Multithreading and Real‐Time Programming 173 9.5 Summary 179 10 Libraries and Programs 181 10.1 Import Libraries and Programs 181 10.2 Export Your Program 181 10.3 Write Your Own Library 182 10.4 Publish Your Library 188 10.5 Publish Your Program 190 10.6 Version Control 192 10.7 Collaborations 196 10.8 Update Your Library and Program 201 10.9 Summary 202 Part III The IoT Starter Kit and IoT Projects 203 11 Arm® Mbed™ Ethernet IoT Starter Kit 205 11.1 128×32 LCD 205 11.2 Joystick 207 11.3 Two Potentiometers 208 11.4 Speaker 209 11.5 Three‐Axis Accelerometer 211 11.6 LM75B Temperature Sensor 211 11.7 RGB LED 212 11.8 Summary 214 12 IoT Projects with Arm® Mbed™ 215 12.1 Temperature Monitoring over the Internet 215 12.2 Smart Lighting 224 12.3 Voice‐Controlled Door Access 230 12.4 RFID Reader 237 12.5 Cloud Example with IBM Watson Bluemix 242 12.5.1 IBM Quickstart Service 243 12.5.2 IBM Registered Service (Bluemix) 245 12.5.3 Add IBM Watson IoT Service to Your Application 252 12.5.4 Add Your Mbed Device to Your Watson IoT Organization 252 12.5.5 Adding Credentials onto Your Mbed Device 257 12.5.6 Link Your IBM IoT Watson Application to Your Mbed Device 257 12.5.7 Sending Commands from Your IBM IoT Watson Application to Your Mbed Board 261 12.5.8 More with Node-RED 261 12.6 Real-Time Signal Processing 271 12.7 Summary 277 Part IV Appendices 279 Appendix A: Example Codes 281 Appendix B: HiveMQ MQTT Broker 285 Appendix C: Node‐RED on Raspberry Pi 295 Appendix D: String and Array Operations 303 Appendix E: Useful Online Resources 311 Index 313
£92.66
John Wiley & Sons Inc Modular Multilevel Converters
Book SynopsisAn invaluable academic reference for the area of high-power converters, covering all the latest developments in the field High-power multilevel converters are well known in industry and academia as one of the preferred choices for efficient power conversion. Over the past decade, several power converters have been developed and commercialized in the form of standard and customized products that power a wide range of industrial applications. Currently, the modular multilevel converter is a fast-growing technology and has received wide acceptance from both industry and academia. Providing adequate technical background for graduate- and undergraduate-level teaching, this book includes a comprehensive analysis of the conventional and advanced modular multilevel converters employed in motor drives, HVDC systems, and power quality improvement. Modular Multilevel Converters: Analysis, Control, and Applications provides an overview of high-power converters, referTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xiii Preface xvii Acknowledgments xxi Acronyms xxiii Symbols xxvii About the Companion Website xli Part I General Aspects of Conventional mmc 1 Review of High-Power Converters 3 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Overview of High-Power Converters 4 1.3 Voltage Source Converters 6 1.3.1 Neutral-Point Clamped Converter 8 1.3.2 Active Neutral-Point Clamped Converter 10 1.3.3 Flying Capacitor Converter 11 1.3.4 Nested Neutral-Point Clamped Converter 12 1.3.5 Cascaded H-bridge Converter 13 1.3.6 Cascaded Neutral-Point Clamped Converter 15 1.4 Current Source Converters 16 1.4.1 Load-Commutated Current Source Converter 16 1.4.2 PWM Current Source Converter 18 1.5 Matrix Converters 19 1.5.1 Direct Matrix Converter 19 1.5.2 Indirect Matrix Converter 20 1.5.3 Multi-Modular Matrix Converter 21 1.6 Modular Multilevel Converters 23 1.6.1 Converter Technology 24 1.6.2 Applications 24 1.6.3 Technical Challenges 31 1.7 Summary 33 References 34 2 Fundamentals of Modular Multilevel Converter 37 2.1 Introduction 37 2.2 Modular Multilevel Converter 38 2.2.1 Converter Con guration 39 2.2.2 Con guration of Submodules 39 2.2.3 Comparison of Submodules 46 2.2.4 Principle of Operation 48 2.3 Pulse Width Modulation Schemes 49 2.3.1 Phase-Shifted Carrier Modulation 51 2.3.2 Level-Shifted Carrier Modulation 59 2.3.3 Sampled Average Modulation 60 2.3.4 Space Vector Modulation 65 2.3.5 Staircase Modulation 73 2.4 Summary 77 References 77 3 Classical Control of Modular Multilevel Converter 79 3.1 Introduction 79 3.2 Overview of Classical Control Method 80 3.3 Submodule Capacitor Voltage Control 82 3.3.1 Leg Voltage Control 82 3.3.2 Voltage Balance Strategy 83 3.4 Output Current Control 88 3.4.1 Reference Frame Theory 88 3.4.2 Control of MMC with Passive Load 92 3.5 Circulating Current Control 95 3.5.1 Mathematical Model 96 3.5.2 Control in Synchronous-dq Reference Frame 97 3.5.3 Control in Stationary-abc Reference Frame 100 3.6 Summary 101 References 101 4 Model Predictive Control of Modular Multilevel Converter 103 4.1 Introduction 103 4.2 Mathematical Model of mmc 105 4.2.1 Continuous-Time Model 105 4.2.2 Discretization Methods 108 4.2.3 Discrete-Time Model 110 4.3 Extrapolation Techniques 113 4.3.1 Vector Angle Extrapolation 113 4.3.2 Lagrange Extrapolation 113 4.4 Cost Function and Weight factors 114 4.4.1 Formulation of Cost Function 114 4.4.2 Selection of Weight Factors 116 4.5 Direct Model Predictive Control 117 4.5.1 Design Procedure 117 4.5.2 Control Algorithm 120 4.6 Indirect Model Predictive Control 124 4.6.1 Design Procedure 125 4.6.2 Control Algorithm 127 4.7 Summary 128 References 128 Part II Advanced Modular Multilevel Converters 5 Passive Cross-Connected Modular Multilevel Converters 133 5.1 Introduction 133 5.2 Passive Cross-Connected mmc 134 5.2.1 Con guration of Power Circuit 134 5.2.2 Switching States and Output Voltage 135 5.3 Principle of Operation 138 5.3.1 Modeling of PC-MMC 138 5.3.2 Phase-Shifted Carrier Modulation for PC-MMC 140 5.4 Low/Zero Frequency Operation of PC-MMC 144 5.4.1 Equivalent Circuit 145 5.4.2 Design of Cross-Connected Capacitor 146 5.4.3 Submodule Capacitor Voltage Ripple 148 5.4.4 Common-Mode Voltage 151 5.5 Classical Control of PC-MMC 153 5.5.1 Output Current Control 154 5.5.2 Submodule Capacitor Voltage Control 156 5.5.3 Synthesis of Modulation Signals 159 5.6 Summary 162 References 162 6 Active Cross-Connected Modular Multilevel Converters 165 6.1 Introduction 165 6.2 Active Cross-Connected mmc 166 6.2.1 Circuit Con guration of AC-MMC 166 6.2.2 Switching States and Output Voltage 166 6.3 Principles of Operation 169 6.3.1 Modeling of AC-MMC 170 6.3.2 Phase-Shifted Carrier Modulation for AC-MMC 171 6.4 Low-Frequency Operation of AC-MMC 176 6.4.1 Equivalent Circuit 176 6.4.2 Submodule Capacitor Voltage Ripple 178 6.4.3 Common-Mode Voltage 181 6.4.4 Current Stress on Semiconductor Devices 184 6.5 Classical Control of AC-MMC 185 6.5.1 Output Current Control 186 6.5.2 Submodule Capacitor Voltage Control 186 6.5.3 Synthesis of Modulation Signals 189 6.6 Summary 192 References 192 7 Star and Delta-Channel Modular Multilevel Converters 195 7.1 Introduction 195 7.2 Star-Channel Modular Multilevel Converter 196 7.2.1 Circuit Con guration of Star-Channel mmc 196 7.2.2 Switching States and Output Voltage 197 7.3 Principles of Operation 200 7.3.1 Modeling of Star-Channel mmc 200 7.3.2 Phase-Shifted Carrier Modulation for Star-Channel mmc 203 7.4 Low-Frequency Operation of Star-Channel mmc 207 7.4.1 Equivalent Circuit 208 7.4.2 Submodule Capacitor Voltage Ripple 209 7.4.3 Common-Mode Voltage 213 7.5 Classical Control of Star-Channel mmc 216 7.5.1 Output Current Control 217 7.5.2 Submodule Capacitor Voltage Control 217 7.5.3 Synthesis of Modulation Signals 221 7.6 Delta-Channel Modular Multilevel Converter 223 7.7 Comparison of Advanced Modular Multilevel Converters 225 7.8 Summary 226 References 227 Part III Applications of Modular Multilevel Converters 8 Modular Multilevel Converter Based Medium-Voltage Motor Drives 231 8.1 Introduction 231 8.2 Fundamentals of MMC-Based Motor Drive 232 8.2.1 System Con gurations 232 8.2.2 Control Schemes 233 8.3 Voltage-Oriented Control of Grid-Side mmc 234 8.3.1 Principle of voltage orientation 235 8.3.2 Implementation of PLL 236 8.3.3 Block diagram of VOC 237 8.4 Indirect Field-Oriented Control of Motor-side mmc 240 8.4.1 Principle of Field Orientation 241 8.4.2 Rotor Flux Vector Estimator 242 8.4.3 Block diagram of IFOC approach 244 8.5 Low-Speed Operation of MMC-based Motor Drive 248 8.5.1 Analysis of Submodule Capacitor Voltage Ripple 248 8.5.2 Analysis of MMC with High-Frequency Voltage and Current Injection 254 8.5.3 Estimation of High-Frequency Voltage and Current Magnitude 256 8.5.4 Minimization of Submodule Capacitor Voltage Ripple 257 8.6 Common-Mode Voltage Issues and Blocking Schemes 262 8.6.1 De nition of Common-Mode Voltage 262 8.6.2 Blocking of Common-Mode Voltage 264 8.7 Transformer-less MMC-based Motor Drive 265 8.8 Summary 269 References 269 9 Role of Modular Multilevel Converters In The Power System 271 9.1 Introduction 271 9.2 MMC-Based HVDC Transmission Systems 272 9.2.1 Two-Terminal System 273 9.2.2 Multi-Terminal System 274 9.2.3 DC-Side Short-Circuit Fault Protection 275 9.2.4 HVDC Circuit Breakers 277 9.3 Control of Two-Terminal MMC-Based HVDC System 278 9.3.1 Sending-End Converter Control 279 9.3.2 Receiving-End Converter Control 281 9.4 Control of Multi-Terminal MMC-Based HVDC System 286 9.4.1 Voltage Margin Control Scheme 288 9.4.2 Voltage Droop Control Scheme 293 9.5 MMC-based Static Synchronous Compensator 294 9.5.1 System Con guration 295 9.5.2 Reactive Power Compensation 295 9.5.3 Compensation of Unbalanced AC-Grid Currents 298 9.6 MMC-based Uni ed Power Quality Conditioner 306 9.7 Summary 307 References 307 Appendix A MATLAB Demo Projects 311 References 312 Index 313
£102.56
John Wiley & Sons Inc Billmeyer and Saltzmans Principles of Color
Book SynopsisThis book offers detailed coverage of color, colorants, the coloring of materials, and reproducing the color of materials through imaging. It combines the clarity and ease of earlier editions with significant updates about the advancement in color theory and technology. Provides guidance for how to use color measurement instrumentation, make a visual assessment, set a visual tolerance, and select a formulation Supplements material with numerical examples, graphs, and illustrations that clarify and explain complex subjects Expands coverage of topics including spatial vision, solid-state lighting, cameras and spectrophotometers, and translucent materials Table of ContentsPreface xi Chapter 1 Physical Properties of Colors 1 A What this Book is about? 1 B The Spectrum and Wave Theory 2 C Light Sources 3 D Conventional Materials 5 Transmission 5 Absorption 6 Surface Scattering 7 Internal Scattering 7 Terminology – Dyes Versus Pigments 10 Spectral Characteristics of Conventional Materials 12 E Fluorescent Materials 12 F Gonioapparent Materials 14 Metallic Materials 14 Pearlescent Materials 14 Interference Materials 15 Diffraction Materials 16 G Photochromic and Thermochromic Colorants 16 H Summary 16 Chapter 2 Color and Spatial Vision 17 A Trichromacy 17 B Light and Chromatic adaptation 21 C Compression 23 D Opponency 23 E Spatial Vision 26 F Observer variability 29 G Summary 34 Chapter 3 Visual Color Specification 37 A One-Dimensional Scales 37 Hue 37 Lightness 38 Chromatic Intensity 39 B Three-Dimensional Systems 39 Geometries 39 Natural Color System 40 Munsell Color System 42 Other Color-Order Systems 46 C Color Appearance: Multidimensional systems 46 D Color-Mixing systems 47 RGB and HSB 47 The Pantone Matching System 48 Limitations of Color-Mixing Systems for Color Specification 49 E Summary 49 Chapter 4 Numerical Color Specification: Colorimetry 51 A Color Matching 51 B Derivation of the Standard observers 53 Theoretical Considerations 53 The Color-Matching Experiment 54 The 1924 CIE Standard Photopic Observer 57 The 1931 CIE Standard Colorimetric Observer 58 The 1964 CIE Standard Colorimetric Observer 61 Cone-Fundamental-Based Colorimetric Observers 62 C Calculating Tristimulus values for Materials 62 D Chromaticity Coordinates and the Chromaticity diagram 63 E Calculating Tristimulus values and Chromaticity Coordinates for sources 67 F Transformation of Primaries 68 Displays 68 Cone Fundamentals 71 G Approximately Uniformly Spaced Systems 71 L* Lightness 72 u′v′ Uniform-Chromaticity Scale Diagram 72 Cieluv 73 Cielab 74 Rotation of CIELAB Coordinates 75 H Color-appearance models 78 I Whiteness and Yellowness 83 Whiteness 83 Yellowness 84 J Summary 84 Chapter 5 Color-Quality Specification 85 A Perceptibility and Acceptability Visual Judgments 85 B Color-Difference Geometry 86 C Ellipses and Ellipsoids 89 D The Color-Difference Problem 92 E Weighted Color-Difference Formulas 96 F CMC(L:C) Color-Difference Formula 99 G Ciede2000 Color-Difference Formula 100 H Uniform Color-Difference Spaces 105 I Determining Color-Tolerance Magnitude 106 J Summary 110 Chapter 6 Color and Material-Appearance Measurement 111 A Basic Principles of Measuring Color and Material Appearance 111 B The Sample 112 C Visual Color Measurement 113 D Measurement geometries 114 Bidirectional Reflectance Distribution Function 115 CIE Recommended Geometries for Measuring Spectral Reflectance Factor 115 CIE Recommended Geometries for Measuring Spectral Transmittance Factor 118 Multiangle Geometries 118 E Spectrophotometry 119 F Spectroradiometry 121 G Fluorescence Measurements 122 H Precision and Accuracy Measurements 124 Repeatability 125 Intramodel Reproducibility 127 Accuracy 128 I spectral Imaging 134 J Material-Appearance Measurements 137 Gloss 137 Microstructure – Bidirectional Reflectance Distribution Function 137 Macrostructure 142 Sparkle and Graininess 143 K Summary 144 Chapter 7 Lighting 145 A Standard Illuminants 145 B Luminance Illuminance and Luminous Efficacy 148 C Correlated Color Temperature 149 D Color Rendition 150 E Summary 155 Chapter 8 Metamerism and Color Inconstancy 157 A Metamerism Terminology 157 B Producing Metamers 158 C Indices of Metamerism 160 Special Index of Metamerism 160 General Index of Metamerism 162 Using Indices of Metamerism 163 D Color Inconstancy and Indices of Color Inconstancy 164 E Summary 168 Chapter 9 Optical Modeling of Colored Materials 169 A Generic Approach to Color Modeling 169 B Modeling Transparent Materials 171 C Modeling Opaque Materials 174 Opaque Paints 176 Opaque Textiles 181 D Modeling Gonioapparent Materials 184 E Color-Formulation Software 184 F Summary 188 Chapter 10 Color Imaging 189 A Analysis and Synthesis 190 B Color Management 191 C Additive versus Subtractive Mixing 195 D Displays and Encoding 198 E Printing 204 F Digital Cameras 212 Colorimetric Accuracy 213 Spectral Accuracy 217 G Spectral Color Reproduction 219 H Summary 219 Bibliography 221 Annotated Bibliography 237 Recommended Books 243 Index 247
£107.96
John Wiley & Sons Inc Fundamentals of Public Safety Networks and
Book SynopsisA timely overview of a complete spectrum of technologiesspecifically designed for public safety communications as well as their deployment as management In our increasingly disaster-prone world, the need to upgrade and better coordinate our public safety networks combined with successful communications is more critical than ever. Fundamentals of Public Safety Networks and Critical Communications Systems fills a gap in the literature by providing a book that reviews a comprehensive set of technologies, from most popular to the most advanced communications technologies that can be applied to public safety networks and mission-critical communications systems. The book explores the technical and economic feasibility, design, application, and sustainable operation management of these vital networks and systems. Written by a noted expert in the field, the book provides extensive coverage of systems, services, end-user devices, and applications of public-safety Table of ContentsForeword by Alan Kaplan xv Foreword by Hussein Mouftah xvii Preface xix Acknowledgments xxiii List of Abbreviations xxv About the Author xxxv 1 OVERVIEW 1 1.1 Background 1 1.2 Technologies Used in Critical Communications 4 1.2.1 Narrowband Land and Private Mobile Radio Systems 4 1.2.2 Broadband Technologies for Critical Communications 6 1.2.3 Interoperability 9 1.3 Applications, Systems, and End-User Devices 11 1.3.1 Applications and Systems 11 1.3.2 End-User Terminals and Consoles 13 1.4 Standards, Policies, and Spectrum 15 1.4.1 Frequency Spectrum for Critical Communications 15 1.4.2 Standards Development in Critical Communications 16 1.5 Planning, Design, Deployment, and Operational Aspects 18 1.5.1 Planning 18 1.5.2 Technology Considerations for a Critical Communications System 19 1.5.3 Economic and Financial Considerations 20 1.5.4 Paving the Way 21 1.5.5 Design and Deployment 22 1.5.6 Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning (a.k.a. Management) 24 1.6 Summary and Conclusions 25 References 27 2 USERS OF CRITICAL COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 33 2.1 Introduction 33 2.2 Organizations Involved in Public Safety 34 2.2.1 Police Departments 34 2.2.2 Fire Departments 35 2.2.3 Emergency Medical Services 36 2.2.4 Emergency Management Agencies 37 2.2.5 Coast Guard 37 2.2.6 Other Organizations in Public Safety 38 2.3 Other Sectors using Critical Communications Systems 39 2.3.1 Transportation 40 2.3.2 Utilities 40 2.3.3 Others 41 2.4 Summary and Conclusions 42 References 42 3 CHARACTERISTICS OF CRITICAL COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 45 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 Features Common to Both Critical Communications Systems and Other Wireless Networks 47 3.3 Features Unique to Critical Communications Systems 50 3.4 Importance of Interoperability Features 52 3.5 Summary and Conclusions 53 References 54 4 INTRODUCTION TO TECHNOLOGIES AND STANDARDS FOR CRITICAL COMMUNICATIONS 55 4.1 Introduction 55 4.2 Analog Systems—Historical Perspective 58 4.3 Narrowband Land and Private Mobile Radio Systems 59 4.4 Limitations of Narrowband PMR/LMR Systems 60 4.5 Broadband Technologies 60 4.6 Other Technologies 61 4.7 Summary and Conclusions 63 References 63 5 PROJECT 25 (P25) 65 5.1 Introduction 65 5.2 Architecture 68 5.3 Interfaces 71 5.3.1 Air Interfaces 72 5.3.2 Wireline Interfaces 73 5.3.3 Data Interfaces 74 5.3.4 Security Interfaces 75 5.4 Services 75 5.5 Operations 76 5.6 Security 77 5.7 RF Spectrum 77 5.8 Standardization 78 5.9 Deployment 80 5.10 Future 81 5.11 Summary and Conclusions 84 References 85 6 TERRESTRIAL TRUNKED RADIO (TETRA) 87 6.1 Introduction 87 6.2 Architecture 88 6.3 Interfaces 90 6.3.1 Air Interfaces 90 6.3.2 Intersystem Interface 92 6.3.3 Terminal Equipment Interface (TEI) 93 6.3.4 Line Station (Dispatcher) Interface 94 6.3.5 Network Management Interface 94 6.3.6 PSTN/ISDN/PDN 94 6.4 Services 95 6.4.1 Basic Voice Services 95 6.4.2 Supplementary Services 96 6.4.3 Data Services 97 6.5 Operations 97 6.6 Security 98 6.7 Spectrum 98 6.8 Standardization 99 6.9 Deployment 100 6.9.1 Cost Factors Impacting TETRA Wireless Systems 100 6.10 Future 104 6.11 Summary and Conclusions 105 References 105 7 DIGITAL MOBILE RADIO (DMR) 107 7.1 Introduction 107 7.2 Architecture 109 7.3 Interfaces 111 7.3.1 DMR Air Interface (AI) 112 7.3.2 Trunking Interface 113 7.3.3 Data Application Interface 113 7.4 Services 113 7.4.1 Voice Services 114 7.4.2 Data Services 115 7.5 Operations 116 7.6 Security 116 7.7 Spectrum 117 7.8 Standardization 117 7.9 Deployment 118 7.10 Future 119 7.11 Summary and Conclusions 119 References 120 8 LONG-TERM EVOLUTION (LTE) 121 8.1 Introduction 122 8.2 Architecture 125 8.2.1 E-UTRAN 125 8.2.2 Evolved Packet Core (EPC) 127 8.3 Interfaces 128 8.3.1 Air Interface 129 8.3.2 E-UTRAN Network Interfaces 129 8.3.3 EPC Interfaces 130 8.3.4 Interworking Interfaces 131 8.4 Services 132 8.5 Operations 133 8.6 Security 134 8.7 Spectrum 135 8.8 Standardization 136 8.9 Future 138 8.10 Deployment 138 8.11 Use of LTE as a Critical Communications Network 139 8.12 Summary and Conclusions 142 References 143 9 FUTURE TECHNOLOGIES FOR CRITICAL COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 145 9.1 Introduction 145 9.2 5G and Beyond 146 9.3 Augmented Reality (AR) 150 9.4 Internet of Things (IoT) 151 9.5 Big Data Analytics 152 9.6 Summary and Conclusions 153 References 154 10 SYSTEMS AND APPLICATIONS USED IN CRITICAL COMMUNICATIONS 157 10.1 Introduction 157 10.2 Command and Control Centers 158 10.3 Emergency Response Systems 158 10.4 Incident Management System 160 10.5 Public Warning Systems 161 10.6 Others 162 10.7 Summary and Conclusions 163 References 163 11 END-USER DEVICES CONNECTED TO CRITICAL COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 165 11.1 Introduction 165 11.2 Mobile Radios 166 11.3 Portable Radios 167 11.4 Dispatch Consoles 170 11.5 Others 171 11.6 Summary and Conclusions 172 References 172 12 PLANNING FOR DEPLOYMENT AND OPERATIONS OF CRITICAL COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 175 12.1 Introduction 175 12.2 Developing Policies 176 12.2.1 National Broadband Policy 177 12.2.2 Governance Policy 177 12.2.3 Spectrum Management Policy 178 12.3 Developing a Business Case 180 12.3.1 Identifying Alternatives 181 12.3.2 Feasibility Studies 184 12.3.3 Interoperability Concerns 185 12.3.4 Comparison of Alternatives and the Recommendation 188 12.4 Developing Project Plans 190 12.5 Summary and Conclusions 192 References 193 13 ECONOMIC AND FINANCIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR DEPLOYING CRITICAL COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 195 13.1 Introduction 195 13.2 Cost and Benefit of Deploying and Operating a Public Safety Network 196 13.2.1 Cost of Deploying and Operating a Public Safety Network 196 13.2.2 Benefits of Deploying and Operating a Public Safety Network 198 13.3 Financing Alternatives 199 13.3.1 Bond Financing 199 13.3.2 Lease Financing 200 13.3.3 Financing via Sharing the Network 200 13.4 Evaluation of Financing Alternatives 201 13.5 Summary and Conclusions 202 References 203 14 DESIGNING, IMPLEMENTATION, AND INTEGRATION 205 14.1 Introduction 205 14.2 Network Architecture and Design 205 14.2.1 Designing Narrowband Technologies Based Network 206 14.2.2 Designing a Broadband Technology Based Network 208 14.3 Implementation and Installation 213 14.4 System Integration, Verification, and Validation Testing 214 14.5 Summary and Conclusions 215 References 215 15 OPERATIONS, ADMINISTRATION, AND MAINTENANCE OF CRITICAL COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 217 15.1 Introduction 217 15.2 Developing Operations Plans 220 15.3 Operation Support Systems (OSSs), Tools, and Applications 221 15.3.1 Many Types of OSSs: Layered Organization 222 15.3.2 Interfaces among OSSs 223 15.3.3 OSSs Supporting Network Management Functions 223 15.3.4 Tools and Applications Supporting Operations 224 15.3.5 OSSs Supporting Network Technologies 225 15.4 Operations Support Centers, Policies, Guidelines, and Procedures 226 15.4.1 Centers, People, Administration 228 15.4.2 Configuration Management Related Procedures 230 15.4.3 Fault Management Related Procedures 232 15.4.4 Performance Management Related Procedures 233 15.4.5 Accounting Management Related Procedures 234 15.4.6 Security Management Related Procedures 235 15.5 Summary and Conclusions 236 References 237 16 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS 239 16.1 Major Points and Observations 239 16.2 Challenges in Deploying Critical Communications Systems 241 A PROJECT 25 DOCUMENTS 243 B TETRA DOCUMENTS BY ETSI 249 C LTE CRITICAL COMMUNICATIONS RELATED DOCUMENTS 265 Index 273
£90.86
John Wiley & Sons Inc Space Modulation Techniques
Book SynopsisExplores the fundamentals required to understand, analyze, and implement space modulation techniques (SMTs) in coherent and non-coherent radio frequency environments This book focuses on the concept of space modulation techniques (SMTs), and covers those emerging high data rate wireless communication techniques. The book discusses the advantages and disadvantages of SMTs along with their performance. A general framework for analyzing the performance of SMTs is provided and used to detail their performance over several generalized fading channels. The book also addresses the transmitter design of these techniques with the optimum number of hardware components and the use of these techniques in cooperative and mm-Wave communications. Beginning with an introduction to the subject and a brief history, Space Modulation Techniques goes on to offer chapters covering MIMO systems like spatial multiplexing and space-time coding. It then looks at channel models, such as Rayleigh, Rician, NakaTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Wireless History 1 1.2 MIMO Promise 2 1.3 Introducing Space Modulation Techniques (SMTs) 3 1.4 Advanced SMTs 4 1.4.1 Space–Time Shift Keying (STSK) 4 1.4.2 Index Modulation (IM) 4 1.4.3 Differential SMTs 5 1.4.4 OpticalWireless SMTs 6 1.5 Book Organization 6 2 MIMO System and ChannelModels 9 2.1 MIMO System Model 9 2.2 SpatialMultiplexing MIMO Systems 11 2.3 MIMO Capacity 11 2.4 MIMO ChannelModels 13 2.4.1 Rayleigh Fading 15 2.4.2 Nakagami-n (Rician Fading) 15 2.4.3 Nakagami-m Fading 16 2.4.4 The ;;–;; MIMO Channel 17 2.4.5 The ;;–;; Distribution 20 2.4.6 The ;;–;; Distribution 23 2.5 Channel Imperfections 26 2.5.1 Spatial Correlation 26 2.5.1.1 Simulating SC Matrix 29 2.5.1.2 Effect of SC on MIMO Capacity 31 2.5.2 Mutual Coupling 31 2.5.2.1 Effect of MC on MIMO Capacity 33 2.5.3 Channel Estimation Errors 34 2.5.3.1 Impact of Channel Estimation Error on the MIMO Capacity 34 3 SpaceModulation Transmission and Reception Techniques 35 3.1 Space Shift Keying (SSK) 36 3.2 Generalized Space Shift Keying (GSSK) 39 3.3 SpatialModulation (SM) 41 3.4 Generalized SpatialModulation (GSM) 44 3.5 Quadrature Space Shift Keying (QSSK) 45 3.6 Quadrature SpatialModulation (QSM) 48 3.7 Generalized QSSK (GQSSK) 53 3.8 Generalized QSM (GQSM) 55 3.9 Advanced SMTs 55 3.9.1 Differential Space Shift Keying (DSSK) 55 3.9.2 Differential SpatialModulation (DSM) 60 3.9.3 Differential Quadrature SpatialModulation (DQSM) 60 3.9.4 Space–Time Shift Keying (STSK) 65 3.9.5 Trellis Coded-Spatial Modulation (TCSM) 66 3.10 Complexity Analysis of SMTs 69 3.10.1 Computational Complexity of the ML Decoder 69 3.10.2 Low-Complexity Sphere Decoder Receiver for SMTs 70 3.10.2.1 SMT-Rx Detector 70 3.10.2.2 SMT-Tx Detector 71 3.10.2.3 Single Spatial Symbol SMTs (SS-SMTs) 71 3.10.2.4 Double Spatial Symbols SMTs (DS-SMTs) 72 3.10.2.5 Computational Complexity 73 3.10.2.6 Error Probability Analysis and Initial Radius 74 3.11 Transmitter Power Consumption Analysis 75 3.11.1 Power Consumption Comparison 77 3.12 Hardware Cost 80 3.12.1 Hardware Cost Comparison 81 3.13 SMTs Coherent and Noncoherent Spectral Efficiencies 82 4 Average Bit Error Probability Analysis for SMTs 85 4.1 Average Error Probability over Rayleigh Fading Channels 85 4.1.1 SM and SSK with Perfect Channel Knowledge at the Receiver 85 4.1.1.1 Single Receive Antenna (Nr = 1) 86 4.1.1.2 Arbitrary Number of Receive Antennas (Nr) 88 4.1.1.3 Asymptotic Analysis 89 4.1.2 SM and SSK in the Presence of Imperfect Channel Estimation 90 4.1.2.1 Single Receive Antenna (Nr = 1) 91 4.1.2.2 Arbitrary Number of Receive Antennas (Nr) 92 4.1.2.3 Asymptotic Analysis 92 4.1.3 QSM with Perfect Channel Knowledge at the Receiver 94 4.1.4 QSM in the Presence of Imperfect Channel Estimation 96 4.2 A General Framework for SMTs Average Error Probability over Generalized Fading Channels and in the Presence of Spatial Correlation and Imperfect Channel Estimation 98 4.3 Average Error Probability Analysis of Differential SMTs 101 4.4 Comparative Average Bit Error Rate Results 103 4.4.1 SMTs, GSMTs, and QSMTs ABER Comparisons 103 4.4.2 Differential SMTs Results 107 5 Information Theoretic Treatment for SMTs 109 5.1 Evaluating the Mutual Information 110 5.1.1 Classical SpatialMultiplexing MIMO 110 5.1.2 SMTs 111 5.2 Capacity Analysis 114 5.2.1 SMX 114 5.2.2 SMTs 115 5.2.2.1 Classical SMTs Capacity Analysis 115 5.2.2.2 SMTs Capacity Analysis by Maximing over Spatial and Constellation Symbols 119 5.3 Achieving SMTs Capacity 121 5.3.1 SSK 121 5.3.2 SM 124 5.4 Information Theoretic Analysis in the Presence of Channel Estimation Errors 128 5.4.1 Evaluating the Mutual Information 128 5.4.1.1 Classical SpatialMultiplexing MIMO 128 5.4.1.2 SMTs 129 5.4.2 Capacity Analysis 131 5.4.2.1 SpatialMultiplexing MIMO 131 5.4.2.2 SMTs 134 5.4.3 Achieving SMTs Capacity 135 5.4.3.1 SSK 135 5.4.3.2 SM 136 5.5 Mutual Information Performance Comparison 138 6 Cooperative SMTs 141 6.1 Amplify and Forward (AF) Relaying 141 6.1.1 Average Error Probability Analysis 143 6.1.1.1 Asymptotic Analysis 147 6.1.1.2 Numerical Results 147 6.1.2 Opportunistic AF Relaying 149 6.1.2.1 Average Error Probability Analysis 151 6.1.2.2 Asymptotic Analysis 152 6.2 Decode and Forward (DF) Relaying 152 6.2.1 Multiple single-antenna DF relays 152 6.2.2 Single DF Relay with Multiple Antennas 153 6.2.3 Average Error Potability Analysis 154 6.2.3.1 Multiple Single-Antenna DF Relays 154 6.2.3.2 Single DF Relay with Multiple-Antennas 157 6.2.3.3 Numerical Results 157 6.3 Two-Way Relaying (2WR) SMTs 158 6.3.1 The Transmission Phase 159 6.3.2 The Relaying Phase 161 6.3.3 Average Error Probability Analysis 162 6.3.3.1 Numerical Results 165 7 SMTs for Millimeter-Wave Communications 167 7.1 Line of Sight mmWave Channel Model 168 7.1.1 Capacity Analysis 168 7.1.1.1 SM 168 7.1.1.2 QSM 169 7.1.1.3 Randomly Spaced Antennas 169 7.1.1.4 Capacity Performance Comparison 172 7.1.2 Average Bit Error Rate Results 174 7.2 Outdoor Millimeter-Wave Communications 3D Channel Model 175 7.2.1 Capacity Analysis 179 7.2.2 Average Bit Error Rate Results 182 8 Summary and Future Directions 185 8.1 Summary 185 8.2 Future Directions 187 8.2.1 SMTs with Reconfigurable Antennas (RAs) 187 8.2.2 Practical Implementation of SMTs 188 8.2.3 Index Modulation and SMTs 188 8.2.4 SMTs for OpticalWireless Communications 189 A MatlabCodes 191 A.1 Generating the Constellation Diagrams 191 A.1.1 SSK 191 A.1.2 GSSK 192 A.1.3 SM 193 A.1.4 GSM 194 A.1.5 QSSK 195 A.1.6 QSM 196 A.1.7 GQSSK 197 A.1.8 GQSM 199 A.1.9 SMTs 200 A.1.10 DSSK 202 A.1.11 DSM 203 A.1.12 DSMTs 204 A.2 Receivers 205 A.2.1 SMTs ML Receiver 205 A.2.2 DSMTs ML Receiver 206 A.3 Analytical and Simulated ABER 207 A.3.1 ABER of SM over Rayleigh Fading Channels with No CSE 207 A.3.2 ABER of SM over Rayleigh Fading Channels with CSE 209 A.3.3 ABER of QSM over Rayleigh Fading Channels with No CSE 211 A.3.4 ABER of QSM over Rayleigh Fading Channels with CSE 214 A.3.5 Analytical ABER of SMTs over Generalized Fading Channels and with CSE and SC 216 A.3.6 Simulated ABER of SMTs Using Monte Carlo Simulation over Generalized Fading Channels and with CSE and SC 222 A.3.7 Analytical ABER of DSMTs over Generalized Fading Channels 228 A.3.8 Simulated ABER of DSMTs Using Monte Carlo Simulation over Generalized Fading Channels 232 A.4 Mutual Information and Capacity 235 A.4.1 SMTs Simulated Mutual Information over Generalized Fading Channels and with CSE 235 A.4.2 SMTs Capacity 240 References 243 Index 265
£100.76
